· commonly asked questions......44 customer support.......................53 product...

My-T-Pen®

for Windows

IndestructibleKeyboards and

Indispensable Utilites

Version 1.78 Release 4

User’s Guide

My-T-Pen®: for Windows; Indestructible Keyboardsand Indispensable Utilites; Version 1.78 Release 4;User’s Guide

Table of ContentsPart I. Getting Started................................. xi

1. Quick Start .........................................12. Getting Started ...................................4

My-T-Pen User’s Guide................4Using this Guide ...........................7What is My-T-Pen?.....................10Why do I need My-T-Pen? .........13Features.......................................14What You Need...........................17Installing / Un-Installing

My-T-Pen ..........................18Starting My-T-Pen ......................21Licensing Information ................22License Manager ........................24Tutorial and Standard Settings....35My-T-Pen Setup..........................37

General Information onMy-T-Pen Setup ......39

iii

Commonly Asked Questions ......44Customer Support .......................53Product Catalog ..........................56

Part II. Using My-T-Pen..............................623. My-T-Pen Panels ..............................64

General Operation ......................64Tool Bar Panel and Keys ............65Control Panel and Keys ..............68Keyboard Panels and Keys .........70Windows Control Panels and Keys

73Macro Panels and Keys ..............79Calculator Panel..........................81Quick Help Panel........................84System Information Panel ..........84Magnifier Panel ..........................85

4. My-T-Pen Menu ...............................88My-T-Pen Menu .........................88

5. My-T-Pen Setup ...............................97My-T-Pen Setup - Overview.......97

iv

Help ..........................................102Change My-T-Pen Configuration

103My-T-Pen Panel Selection

Dialog Box ............112Operation Options...........114Interface Settings ............122Key Options ....................125My-T-Pen Special Handling

Dialog Box ............131My-T-Pen Panel Motion

Dialog Box ............140My-T-Pen Size Selections

Dialog Box ............141System Information Display

Dialog Box ............144My-T-Pen Colors Dialog

Box ........................145My-T-Pen Background

Colors Dialog Box.151Fonts................................152

v

Select Keyboard Layouts..........156Keyboard Layouts &

Windows................164Advanced Notes on

Keyboard Layouts .167Build-A-Macro .........................182Information on Advanced Macro

Editing.............................190Add-A-Macro Dialog Box

191Delete-A-Macro Dialog Box

192Document Macro Dialog

Box ........................194Document All Macros

Dialog Box ............196Documentation File Save

Dialog Box ............197Macro Key Dialog Box ...198Macro Panel Dialog Box.201Macro Zoom Dialog Box206

vi

Macro Select Dialog Box212Active Window Dialog Box

212Configure your Mouse Buttons 214Select the Cursor and Icon........219Exit My-T-Pen ..........................222

6. My-T-Pen Logon Utilities ..............224My-T-Pen Logon Utilities

Overview.........................224My-T-Pen Logon Utilities for 2000

/ XP .................................225Configure Secure Logon

Utility (Windows2000/XP) ...............229

My-T-Soft 2 Keyboard(Windows 2000 andlater) ......................231

Large Keyboard Dialog...247Advanced Logon

Configuration Options

vii

(Windows 2000/XP)258

Advanced Notes for LogonUtilities (LargeKeyboard Dialog -Windows 2000/XP)271

Configure Automatic Logon277

My-T-Pen Logon Utilities forWindows Vista ................280My-T-Soft 2 Keyboard ....282Configure Automatic Logon

for Windows Vista .291

Part III. My-T-Pen TechnicalDocumentation .................................2947. Advanced User Notes.....................297

Advanced User Notes &Information .....................297

Final Release Notes ..................299

viii

Important User Notes ...............305Technical Notes ........................307Application Notes.....................308Windows Developers ................315About this product ....................316Customer Suggestions ..............322

8. Files & File Notes & InstallationInformation ...............................325My-T-Pen Files & File Notes &

Installation Information ..325Installation Information ..345Deployment Information.352

9. Operation Notes .............................359My-T-Pen Operation and Release

Notes ...............................359EGA Users................................359Year 2038 Limitations ..............360Windows Menus .......................361Keyboard Notes ........................362Build-A-Macro Notes...............367Memory ....................................379

ix

Command Line Options ...........379Build-A-Board Support ............389My-T-Pen Button Display ........392My-T-Pen Setup | Configuration |

Special.............................393Windows Notes.........................395Sounds (Advanced Notes) ........396

10. Initialization File Documentation(MYTPEN.INI) ........................406My-T-Pen Initialization File

Documentation(MYTPEN.INI)...............406

11. Error Messages and Numbers ......581My-T-Pen Error Messages........581

Index............................................................591

x

Part I. GettingStarted

General informationabout this guide, theproduct, installation,and getting started

(how to get My-T-Penrunning).

Chapter 1 - Quick Start contains details onthe fastest way to install & begin using

My-T-Pen

Chapter 2 - Getting Started has moreinformation about this guide, My-T-Penfeatures, Installing / Un-Installing, LicensingInformation, Standard Settings, usingMy-T-Pen Setup, Commonly Asked Questions,and information about Customer Support.

Chapter 1. Quick StartInstall My-T-Pen

• In Windows, insert the CD or DVD - theAutoRun feature will load the InstallationAssistant - you may Install a licensedproduct , Install other product demos, orview Release Information. If you have aCertificate of Authenticity, enter yourLicense Key, Serial Number, and Name toInstall and automatically License.

• If AutoRun is not enabled:

• In Windows, Click on the Start Button

• Select Run

• Select D:SETUP, or type D:SETUP (orE:SETUP if CD/DVD drive E:, etc.)

• Press (ENTER) or click on OK

1

Chapter 1. Quick Start

• In Windows Vista, you may not have theRun Option - select Computer, yourCD/DVD drive, and open Setup

• Answer the questions and follow theinstructions on your screen

WarningServer Installation(Terminal Server /Terminal Services)Note:When installingon a server, for properoperation, you MUSTinstall the software fromthe Control Panel |Add/Remove Programsicon.

Note: You may also Un-Install My-T-Penby running SETUP.EXE After My-T-Pen

2

Chapter 1. Quick Start

has been properly installed. (My-T-PenSetup will ask you if you wish toUn-Install.) This has been provided as aconvenience to the user. It isrecommended that you use the ControlPanel | Add/Remove Programs Icon toremove My-T-Pen.

Start My-T-Pen

Click on the Start Button, and open the StartMenu.

Select (All) Programs, then Select My-T-Pen.The My-T-Pen menu will have selectionscorresponding to the icons in the group. SelectMy-T-Pen to begin operation.

The My-T-Pen Welcome will automatically runafter install. The Tutorial and this manual canbe used to learn all the features and capabilitiesof My-T-Pen.

3

Chapter 2. GettingStarted

My-T-Pen User’s GuideVersion 1.78 Release 4

11/24/2009

A Utility for Windows

Information in this document is subject tochange without notice and does not represent acommitment on the part of InnovationManagement Group, Inc. The softwaredescribed in this document is furnished under alicense agreement or nondisclosure agreement.The software and documentation may be usedor copied only in accordance with the terms of

4

Chapter 2. Getting Started

this agreement. It is against the law to copy thesoftware on any medium except as specificallyallowed in the license or nondisclosureagreement. The purchaser may be allowed tomake a back-up copy. No part of this manual orguide may be reproduced or transmitted in anyform or by any means, electronic ormechanical, including photocopying,recording, or information storage and retrievalsystems, for any purpose other than thepurchasers personal use, without the expresswritten permission of Innovation ManagementGroup, Inc.

This manual and product represent over 16years of on-going development, testing, andsupport. There are numerous legal, license, andcross-license agreements associated with theend product. Licensed users of the software areone of the most important aspects of the entireprocess that brings this manual and product

5


into existence. Please be respectful of allparties involved.

Trademarks:

Microsoft Windows is a trademark ofMicrosoft Corporation.

My-T-Mouse®, My-T-Pen®, My-T-Touch® andMy-T-Soft® are registered trademarks ofInnovation Management Group, Inc.

Patents:

This product was produced under U.S. PatentNo. 4,725,694.

Copyrights

My-T-Pen Copyright © 1993-2009 InnovationManagement Group, Inc.

My-T-Pen User’s Guide Copyright ©1993-2009 Innovation Management Group,Inc.

6


All Rights Reserved. Software Subject toRestricted Rights.

Using this GuideThis guide is a comprehensive collection ofdetails, notes, and information aboutMy-T-Pen. Portions are incorporated within theproduct itself, and it is also available in variousforms (e.g. printed, on-line, PDF, etc.).

Important User Information

This guide is for users who are familiar withWindows, its basic concepts, and how tooperate within Windows. If you are not, theinformation you may need to fully utilizeMy-T-Pen and this guide may be limited. Youmay wish to review Windows help, tutorials,and other available information on using and

7


operating Windows before continuing usingthis guide.

Product Versions

In order to address various customer needs andrequirements, there are numerous versions,customizations, and special releases available.This guide is created from a single source, andcan contain references and information aboutother versions, capabilities, and features thatmay NOT be represented in the version you areusing. In some places within this guide, theremay be mentions of other supporting softwarethat are part of the IMG family of products.

• Build-A-Board - customizable keyboardlayout generator with support for multipleplatforms

• CrossScanner - complete Windows accessfrom a single-switch (for users who can’t

8


use standard input devices)

• Joystick-To-Mouse - enables point andclick operation within Windows from ajoystick or gaming device

• Touchright Utilities - right-click access fortouchscreens and other pointing devices

Specific notes for these and other products maybe found within this guide.

Conventions used within this guide

Note: Notes and other additionalinformation will be indicated in this way

9


WarningSpecial and otherimportant details to payclose attention to willappear this way

What is My-T-Pen?My-T-Pen provides on-screen keyboards,buttons, and utilities that allow Pens,Touchscreens, and other pointing devices tooperate Windows 2000 / XP / Vista / 7 withoutthe need for a physical keyboard or membranepanel. This product is the culmination of over16 years of on-going development, customersupport & feedback, and meeting the needs ofusers throughout the world.

10


My-T-Pen Software is intended to provide allthe functionality of a keyboard without using akeyboard, thus allowing the user to remain onthe primary input device at all times. Withmost applications being driven by theGraphical User Interface (GUI) point & clickapproach, My-T-Pen completes the user /operator interface with its heads-up display andis ideal for users who need to go to thekeyboard only occasionally. My-T-Pen is idealfor kiosks, controlled applications, industrial /hazardous environments, challenged users, oranywhere the Man-Machine-Interface (MMI /HMI) needs to be intuitive and practical. Usingthe Operator mode & Show / Hide Keyoptions, a Supervisor can configure My-T-Penfor secure applications, network logons,password entry, and various other controlledinput situations. My-T-Pen is also a very usefultool for quick Macros and Windowscommands. My-T-Pen has various screen sizes

11


and its option panels can expand and retractdependent upon your requirements.

Note: My-T-Pen is available in manyforms, by many names, and can trace itshistory back to My-T-Mouse, originallyintroduced to the world at Fall COMDEX1993 (when COMDEX, i.e. the ComputerDealers Exposition, was the premier tradeshow for everything happening in thecomputer industry - My-T-Mouse wasfeatured as one of the highlights of theshow in a program called "ComputerChronicles" (a well known series that ranfrom 1981 through 2002). You can find thisarchived video [Computer Chronicles FallCOMDEX 1993] at the Internet Archive(http://www.archive.org)). There areversions that support Windows 3.0 / 3.1,Windows 95 / 98 / Me, Windows NT,Windows 2000, Windows XP, Embeddedversions (NT/XP & Windows CE),Windows Server versions, and Windows

12


Vista. Other operating system & platformsupport can be found in Build-A-Board, thenext generation of the My-T-Soft software.

Why do I need My-T-Pen?My-T-Pen is intended to give the user all thefunctionality of a keyboard without using akeyboard. Because the software is auser-interface enhancement, and a functionalreplacement for a physical keyboard in manycases, the software is used throughout theworld for both simple and complex tasks...

My-T-Mouse is... (the original)

My-Typing-Mouse - The Software That MakeYour Mouse a Mouse That Types!

My-T-Pen is...13


My-Typing-Pen - The Software That MakesYour Pen a Pen That Types!

My-T-Touch is...

My-Typing-Touchscreen - The Software ThatMakes Your Touchscreen a Touchscreen ThatTypes!

My-T-Soft is...

My-Typing-Software - The Software ThatTypes!

Features

• Seamless operation from Mouse, Trackball,Touchscreen, Pen, or any other pointingdevice

14


• Microsoft Windows 2000 / XP / Vista / 7Compatible

• Workstation / Network Logon Options

• Developer Tool Kit and Extensions

• Developer examples of integrating intoexisting applications

• Supervisor / Operator Modes

• Show & Hide Keys

• Selectable Sizes

• Realistic 3D graphics

• Infinite Sizing

• Support for Build-A-Board layouts -completely customizable user interface

• 11 panels, individually selectable, or createyour own with Build-A-Board

• Great for editing - Quick & Easy!

15


• Special Windows Short-cut Keyboard -Power Users Dream!

• 101 & 104 key layouts

• Multiple Keyboard Layouts with ABCLayout for Non-Typists

• International support - numerous keyboardlayouts from around the world

• Create Macro Keys & Panels

• Specific Key & Key Combination Enable /Disable

• Attach Executable programs to Keys & KeyCombos or Window Activation

• Includes the Calculator with Calculator Tape& Send Feature

• Time & Date Display

• Memory, Disk Space, Resources statusDisplay

16


• Completely Configurable for all of yourneeds

• Built-In Magnifier

• Color-code Panels for easy identification

• On-line Quick Help for First-Time Users

• Minimizes to a Button for convenient access

• Once you use it, you won’t want to livewithout it!

• Keyboard not required (Just Say No... toyour Keyboard.)

• End-user and Developer Support

What You NeedTo run My-T-Pen you need the followingequipment (hardware requirements):

17


• IBM 80386 or higher or compatible

• 200 mb hard disk space available

• 32 mb memory or higher

• Windows 2000 / XP / Vista / 7

• EGA or higher resolution monitor, VGA orSVGA recommended

• Any Windows supported pointing device

Installing / Un-InstallingMy-T-Pen

• In Windows, insert the CD or DVD - theAutoRun feature will load the InstallationAssistant - you may Install a licensedproduct , Install other product demos, or

18


view Release Information. If you have aCertificate of Authenticity, enter yourLicense Key, Serial Number, and Name toInstall and automatically License.

• If AutoRun is not enabled:

• In Windows, Click on the Start Button

• Select Run

• Select D:SETUP, or type D:SETUP (orE:SETUP if CD / DVD drive E:, etc.)

• Press (ENTER) or click on OK

• In Windows Vista, you may not have theRun Option - select Computer, yourCD/DVD drive, and open Setup

• Answer the questions and follow theinstructions on your screen

19


WarningServer Installation(Terminal Server /Terminal Services)Note: When installingon a server, for properoperation, you MUSTinstall the software fromthe Control Panel |Add/Remove Programsicon as Administrator.

Note: You may also Un-Install My-T-Penby running SETUP.EXE After My-T-Penhas been properly installed. (My-T-PenSetup will ask you if you wish toUn-Install.) This has been provided as aconvenience to the user. It isrecommended that you use the ControlPanel | Add/Remove Programs Icon toremove My-T-Pen.

20


Starting My-T-PenClick on the Start Button, and open the StartMenu. Select (All) Programs, then SelectMy-T-Pen. The My-T-Pen menu will haveselections corresponding to the icons in thegroup. Select My-T-Pen to begin operation.

The My-T-Pen Welcome will automatically runthe first time you load My-T-Pen.

The following icons will also be available inthe My-T-Pen group:

My-T-Pen Welcome - Opening Welcome,access to tutorial, documents, product

My-T-Pen - runs My-T-Pen!

My-T-Pen Setup - Configuration options21


Licensing Information - Displays currentlicense status of My-T-Pen, allows instantlicensing

Install Developer’s Kit - Tool to allow quickinstallation Developer’s Kit

My-T-Pen Logon Utilities - Setup My-T-Penfor Windows logon, or Auto Logon

Licensing InformationMy-T-Pen uses the IMG License Manager tomanage the licensed use of this product. Ifunlicensed, the product will run as demo (i.e. ademonstration version). In the demo(unlicensed) mode, My-T-Pen will run forabout an hour (or 250 keystrokes), and thenexit, displaying the license manager(announcing that it is unlicensed). You may

22


restart My-T-Pen up to 100 times (thedemonstration period limit). After thedemonstration period is over, My-T-Pen willnot operate unless it is licensed. For extendedevaluation and testing purposes, please contactIMG Customer Service for an evaluationlicense. Once licensed, the operation will notbe limited in any way.

The most common methods of licensing areelectronic (web/e-mail based) and bycertificate (Certificate of Authenticity). In bothcases, there will be a registered serial number,and a license key made available once a licensehas been purchased - these need to be enteredinto the IMG License Manager to activate avalid license. For further details, refer to theIMG License Manager.

Note: There are numerous licenseschemes (including OEM, site, &enterprise licenses) available to meet the

23


needs of all our customers. If you haveany licensing questions, please contactInnovation Management Group, Inc.directly.

License ManagerIn order to License My-T-Pen, the correctLicense Key and Serial Number must beentered into the IMG License Manager, alongwith some text for the Customer (and optionalCompany) text areas. The License Key andSerial Number can be found on the Certificateof Authenticity, or in the Software UnlockCodes e-mail.

My-T-Pen License Manager24


- Authentication

The License Key and Serial No. entries are amatched pair, and will work together to unlockthe software. The Customer entry is required(i.e. some text must be entered in the Customertext area), but is not part of the license unlockprocess. The Company text area is optional,and will be shown as the Source when theproduct is licensed.

25


To quickly and easily license the software (on asystem that has internet access), simply clickon the "Purchase License Now" button. Onceconnected to IMG’s website, you will be askedto enter billing information and paymentinformation. Once paid, your order will beprocessed, and you will receive a confirmatione-mail and a separate e-mail with licenseinformation. Once the order is fully processed,you can then click the "Retrieve PurchasedLicense" button to automatically license yoursystem.

System ID Note: The System ID is usedto accurately match the Product andVersion you wish to license with theLicense Information provided. If thesystem you wish to License does not haveInternet Access, you can use the CopySystem ID to Clipboard to accurately copythe System ID to the clipboard (which canbe saved in a text file or other document

26


and moved to a system that does haveInternet Access).

Note: The "Retrieve Purchased License"uses a unique identifier to automaticallylicense your system (which is only sent ifthe "Purchase License Now" is used). Ifyou try this on a different system, or after asystem update or re-install (or after achange to this unique ID), the software willnot license automatically. You will eitherneed to enter the License Key and SerialNumber, or go into Additional LicenseOptions (see below) and use your OrderConfirmation Number and Order E-mail toretrieve the license.

Important Note: Be sure to save and/orprint your Order Confirmation number

27


(with Order E-mail), along with yourLicense Key and Serial Number in caseyou need to re-license the software in thefuture (Operating System Re-install, harddisk reformat, new system, etc.)

Certificate of Authenticity Note: ForElectronic Licenses, and Certificate ofAuthenticity can be retrieved on IMG’swebsite:https://www.imgpresents.com/orders/account/licmanager.htm.This requires a valid License Key andSerial Number. Once entered, you mayview a PDF of the Certificate, or downloadthe Certificate of Authenticity PDF file (forprinting or saving).

My-T-Pen License Manager

28


- Additional LicenseOptions

The Additional License Options section hastools and options to Enter or Paste Evaluationor Other License Information; Request andRetrieve Evaluation Licenses; Support Optionsto View and Delete (Reset) the License file;and a mechanism to retrieve a Purchased

29


License by entering the Order ConfirmationNumber and the Order E-mail address.

Often, interested parties want to review or testthe software without the demonstration licenselimitations, and to accommodate this, IMGmakes available Evaluation Licenses. TheseEvaluation Licenses are fully functionallicenses, but with a date limit (when theevaluation date has passed, the software willreturn back to the Unlicensed, Demonstrationmode).

Evaluation Licenses may be requested at theProduct Download pages on the website, or byusing the Request / Retrieve EvaluationLicense button here. Note that all EvaluationLicense requests are reviewed, and EvaluationLicenses must be created by IMG personnel(generation is not automated).

An Evaluation License sent via e-mail containsa block of text that has the license details for

30


the License Manager. When sent via e-mail,the text can be copied and subsequently pastedinto the text area here (Paste Text fromClipboard), then saved to enable (set) theLicense Information (Save License Info).

Alternatively, if an Evaluation License isRequested, then after processing, it may beautomatically Retrieved directly by clickingthe Request / Retrieve Evaluation Licensebutton. Please refer to any additionalinformation provided by the messages shownwhen using this approach.

The View Current License File(LICENSE.LIC) button will load the fileLICENSE.LIC from the installation folder.This file contains the actual license informationfor the product, or the license information usedto validate a License Key and Serial Number.

Note: Because an Evaluation License

31


uses this same file, the Delete (Reset)option should be used if Licensing theproduct after using an Evaluation License.

The Delete (Reset) License File(LICENSE.LIC) will remove the existingLICENSE.LIC, then copy the fileLICENSE.ORG to LICENSE.LIC (both in theinstallation folder). The file LICENSE.ORG isthe "as shipped" license file, and should be theLicense File when using a License Key andSerial Number to license the software.

Note: For License Purposes, using theSupport Option to Delete (Reset) theLicense File is essentially the same asun-installing, then re-installing thesoftware. Because this option is quickerand simpler, it is the preferred approach toresolve any license issues. Note that

32


manually copying the file LICENSE.ORGto LICENSE.LIC (in the installation folder)performs the same operation as thisoption.

The License Retrieval Option will retrieveLicense Information from IMG’s Website forelectronically purchased licenses. The OrderConfirmation Number and Order E-mail isrequired (which appear on the OrderConfirmation page provided after successfullyplacing an on-line order, and are providedseparately via an Order Confirmation E-mail).

Note: For Retrieved Licenses (via RetrievePurchased License, and via the RetrieveLicense Support Option), License Key andSerial Number information is processedexactly as if this information was directlyentered in the Authentication area.

33


Therefore, all issues that may affectlicensing also apply to these automatedoptions (e.g. License File status, Userpermissions, etc.)

My-T-Pen License Manager- Licensed Display

34


When properly Licensed, a screen similar tothis will show the License Information for theproduct. The display of this indicates that thesoftware is Licensed.

Note: Evaluation licenses also show thisscreen during the days that the EvaluationLicense is valid.

Tutorial and StandardSettings

The My-T-Pen tutorial explains each of thepanels and keys available. Following is adescription of the standard settings forMy-T-Pen and a brief description of the panelsthat are initially displayed. The tutorial and

35


Section II of this manual will explain each keyand panel in detail. The My-T-Pen Tutorialmay be run from the My-T-Pen Welcomewindow or by selecting Tutorial from theMy-T-Pen Menu.

Settings in the standard configuration

Left Mouse button (or pen or touchscreen tap)is set to press a key. Right Mouse button (ifsupported by touchscreen / pointing devicedriver) is for opening the My-T-Pen menu.

The following panels are initially displayed:

The Keyboard Panels

With a document or input window open, a leftbutton click on any key on the alpha panel, editpanel, and numeric panel, acts exactly likepressing the corresponding key on thekeyboard.

The My-T-Pen Tool Bar

36


The Tool (top) button when clicked will openand close the My-T-Pen Control Panel, whichgives you access to the keys for the otheravailable panels and actions.

The middle button will pop-up the My-T-PenMenu

The bottom button will minimize My-T-Pen toeither an icon or a button as set in theconfiguration.

The My-T-Pen Control Panel

Click on each button to open or close theindicated panel(s). The blue letters indicate anopen panel, black letters a closed panel.

Change the size of My-T-Pen (SzUp, SzDn).

Exit My-T-Pen. (Exit)

37


My-T-Pen SetupTo run My-T-Pen Setup:

Open the Start Menu, Select (All) Programs,Select My-T-Pen, then select the My-T-PenSetup icon in the My-T-Pen Program GroupMenu.

OR

From My-T-Pen, click the My-T-Pen menubutton on the tool bar and click My-T-PenSetup.

OR

From My-T-Pen, open the Main Macro Panel,and click on the button labeled "Setup"

If My-T-Pen is running while you are selectingoptions from the following setup screens it willchange to the new settings immediately afteryou click OK to save the changes. You do notneed to restart My-T-Pen to configure it with

38


the new settings. On each screen you may alsochoose to click Cancel to exit without savingthe new settings.

Once you have created a configuration that youwish to keep, you may wish to save it soMy-T-Pen will re-open in the sameconfiguration and screen position. To save aconfiguration or position, open the My-T-PenMenu, select Current Settings, and select Saveto Save Current Settings (and/or SelectPosition, Save Current Position). Once saved,My-T-Pen will always open in the savedconfiguration until another configuration issaved.

In the Operator Mode, My-T-Pen Setup willrequire a password to allow changes. SeeSpecial Handling for information about theOperator Mode.

39


General Information onMy-T-Pen SetupOK

The OK button will save all your changes.

CANCEL

The CANCEL button will ignore any changesyou have made, and restore your previousconfiguration.

Pull-down Box

40


This is a Pull-down Box.

Radio Button

41


These are a Radio Buttons.

Active Application

The Active Application is always identified asfollows:

1. It has the input focus (the blinking cursor).

2. The Caption (Window Title) bar is coloredin the highlighted color.

Cursors

This is a Cursor.

Icons42


This is an Icon.

Check-Buttons

These are Check-box Buttons.

Panels

43


This is an example of a My-T-Pen Panel.

Commonly Asked QuestionsCompatibility

1. Does My-T-Pen work with all WindowsApplications?

Yes.

44


2. Does My-T-Pen run in DOS?

No, My-T-Pen is a Windows Application,although you may operate DOS applications ina DOS Window. For example, try the DOSMacro Panel to see the command prompt in awindow.

Display

3. My-T-Pen covers too much of myWindow. What can I do?

a) Resize and/or reconfigure My-T-Pen. b)My-T-Pen can be minimized to a button, andwill reside in the upper left corner of youractive window. This way you can quickly openthe My-T-Pen window when you need it. c) Setyour second or third Mouse Button to "LookThrough My-T-Pen." d) Work withDeveloper’s Kit to allow on-demand display

4. Why doesn’t My-T-Pen open the way Ilast closed it?

45


My-T-Pen always opens and first displays withthe settings that are saved. To assure thatMy-T-Pen opens the way you desire, configureMy-T-Pen and then Open the My-T-Pen Menu,Select "Current Settings" and then Select "SaveCurrent Settings" from the pop-up Menu.My-T-Pen will now remember these settingsand open with the current configuration. Youcan also save the Screen position whereMy-T-Pen first appears by Saving CurrentPosition from the My-T-Pen Menu. Note thatthe Developer’s Kit allows extrenal control ofsettings If there are pre-defined configurations& settings that are controlled externally viaanother application, then this may override thedefault action of the software. Check with yoursystem administrator for more details.

5. My-T-Pen Interferes with myapplication’s Display. What can I do?

Some Windows Applications do not handle the46


screen display properly, and don’t expect anyother window to be displayed over theapplications’ window. Since My-T-Pen candisplay over any window, sometimes a displayconflict can occur. Refer to the Advanced UserInformation .

My-T-Pen Operation

6. How do I view the Cursor in theMagnifier?

The Magnifier Cursor indicator is Set On inSetup-Configuration-Panels.

7. When I press a key on My-T-Pen itdoesn’t do what I expect (or does nothing).What is the problem? Usually this occurswhen the key pressed on My-T-Pen actuallydoes nothing in the active window, or what youdidn’t expect - verify this by using yourcomputer’s actual keyboard. Remember thatonly one window can be active at a time, and

47


the active window receives all keyboard andMy-T-Pen keystrokes.

8. Why doesn’t the pause key work?

Due to the nature of the Windows operatingenvironment, most applications can not stopthe operation of the system in an acceptablemanner. My-T-Pen actually does send theproper Windows Keyboard Events, but mostapplications ignore this key.

9. Why doesn’t the Print Screen Key printthe whole screen?

The Print Screen Key on My-T-Pen capturesthe image of the Active Window. Maximize thewindow by pressing MAX on the My-T-PenWindows Control Panel, and then use the PrintScreen Key.

10. My Macro doesn’t work properly. Whatis the problem?

48


The Keystroke macro feature is relatively easyto setup and use, however doing complexkeystroke macros can be tedious. First, verifythe keystroke combinations and sequence byusing My-T-Pen to perform the Macro, thenverify that the sequence is exactly the same inthe Macro entered. Also, when working withAlt, Control, and Shift keys you must be extracareful that the down and up keystrokescorrespond properly to the way the applicationexpects the keystrokes. For example, to do an[Alt]-F you must use [Alt-Down]F[Alt-Up]. Itmay be necessary to use lowercase lettersinstead of uppercase to work properly withincertain applications. Note that a My-T-PenKeystroke Macro character represents aKey-Down, and Key-Up sequence. Finally,make sure that the Caps lock is in the samestate as the Keystroke Macro recording. Alsosee notes in the Build-A-Macro section, andAdvanced User Information.

49


11. Why does My-T-Pen Move its positionfor certain windows?

My-T-Pen senses the active window. When theactive window is a certain type of window,My-T-Pen will act in certain ways, asconfigured in the initialization file. Forexample, My-T-Pen moves off of WindowsDialog boxes, so the information required bythe application is not obscured by My-T-Pen.All of these settings can be modified, but acertain level of understanding of Windows isrequired. Refer to Operation Options and/orAdvanced User Information .

Memory

12. How Much Memory does My-T-Pen usewhile running?

This depends on your screen display colors(16, 256, etc.), and the current My-T-Penconfiguration. Normal operation requires less

50


than 100K RAM. If My-T-Pen runs slow oryou have memory problems see "SystemMemory Note" in the Advanced User Notes.

13. Is My-T-Pen a TSR (Terminate and StayResident)? [the original product was releasedso long ago that this was once a commonlyasked question - it is left here for perspective]

My-T-Pen is a normal Windows Application.Nothing stays resident once My-T-Pen isClosed.

International Operation

14. What do I need to do to operateMy-T-Pen with an International Keyboardlayout?

You must select the desired keyboard displayfor My-T-Pen and then set the proper keyboardlayout in the Windows Control Panel forproper operation.

51


15. Does My-T-Pen Translate?

No.

Input Devices

16. Can I Operate my Computer without aKeyboard?

Yes, but special BIOS may be required. Mostsystems allow your computer to boot-upwithout a Physical Keyboard - sometimes thisisn’t intuitive, and may require settings forerrors rather than the keyboard. As long asWindows is automatically started, you may runMy-T-Pen on a system without a keyboard.

17. Does My-T-Pen require a Mouse?

No, but My-T-Pen does require at least sometype of pointing device that emulates a mouseto the extent that the user can move the cursorand click on at least one button. MostTouchscreen and Pen drivers support this type

52


of interface. Contact your touchscreen or penmanufacturer for more information oncompatible drivers.

18. Does My-T-Pen require any specialdrivers?

No. My-T-Pen works with all standardWindows drivers supplied by all well-knowntouchscreen manufacturers / dealers.

19. Does My-T-Pen operate with pens,joysticks, touchscreens, digitizer pads, andother pointing devices?

Yes, as long as they truly emulate the mousecursor movement and mouse button clicks.Contact Innovation Management Group, Inc.regarding My-T-Mouse®, My-T-Pen®,My-T-Touch® & My-T-Soft®.

53


Customer SupportMy-T-Pen Software is backed by a supportstaff trained to provide you with fast, courteousservice. Over the years, IMG has astoundedindividuals at the quality of it software and itssupport. So that we can continue to focus ourresources on development and providinghigh-quality products & support, we doappreciate your assistance in reviewing thehelp, manual, and support informationavailable at our website to see if the problem orquestion has already been addressed. However,if you need assistance beyond what the manual,tutorial, help files, and on-line support databaseprovide, please contact IMG Customer Service:

Innovation Management Group, Inc.Customer Service179 Niblick Road #454Paso Robles, CA 93446

54


USA(800) 889-0987 (US & Canada)(818) 701-1579(818) 936-0200 (fax)<[email protected]>http://www.imgpresents.com

To open a Technical Support case and create asupport ticket, please refer tohttps://www.imgpresents.com/orders/support/techsupport.htm.

Please provide, or have the followinginformation ready when you ask for assistance:

• My-T-Pen version number, update level.

• Registered serial number (or if runningdemo)

• Make and Model of your computer.

55


• Windows version number, any Service Packsor major updates.

• A description of the problem.

• If possible, a list of the steps required torecreate the problem.

• If you have seen an error code, record andreport the number.

• Additional information may be required,such as monitor type, type of pointingdevice, amount of RAM in your system,other software running (anti-virus, spyware,virtual machine, etc.).

Product CatalogInnovation Management Group, Inc.’sProducts

56


Commercial DivisionProducts...Indestructible Keyboards & IndispensableUtilities!

My-T-Soft® Build-A-Board

The Ultimate Tool for creating and modifyingOn-Screen Keyboards, buttons, and Panels.My-T-Soft Family, plus Cross-PlatformSupport

My-T-Pen® for Windows

On-Screen Keyboards & Utilities for PenBased Systems

My-T-Touch® for Windows

On-Screen Keyboards & Utilities forTouchsreens

My-T-Soft® for Windows

57


On-Screen Keyboards & Utilities for anypointing device

My-T-Soft® TS for Terminal Services

On-Screen Keyboards for Terminal Server /Terminal Services

TouchRight Utilities

Right Click Access for Pens & Touchscreens

Assistive TechnologyDivision Products...Enabling Tools for Special Needs

AT Accessibility Suite

IMG’s Assistive Technology Software with sitelicense options

Joystick-To-Mouse

58


The Software That Lets You Run WindowsWith A Joystick!

My-T-Mouse®

The Software That Makes Your Mouse aMouse That Types! Indispensable & Utilitiesfor any Mouse or Trackball

OnScreen

Special Features for disabled & impaired usersWord Prediction / Word Completion / WindowControl / Scanning

OnScreen with CrossScanner

Complete control of Windows from a singleswitch! Support for Keyboard, Mouse, Joystickinterfaces

SmartClick

Operate Windows without the need toPress/Click a Button

59


The Magnifier

Area and Full Screen Magnifier, CursorLocator, Visual Aids

WordComplete

Word Completion, adaptive word prediction,Word List Management, etc. Type Better, TypeLess - we do the rest!

For further information...Contact your Local Software Dealer

or

Innovation Management Group, Inc.179 Niblick Road #454Paso Robles, CA 93446USA(800) 889-0987 (US & Canada)(818) 701-1579

60


(818) 936-0200 (fax)<[email protected]>http://www.imgpresents.comhttp://www.my-t-mouse.comhttp://www.my-t-pen.comhttp://www.my-t-soft.comhttp://www.my-t-touch.comhttp://www.onscreen-keyboard.comhttp://www.build-a-board.comhttp://www.joystick-to-mouse.comhttp://www.themagnifier.us

For International Contacts, please see WebSite...


61

Part II. UsingMy-T-Pen

Description of howto operate and

configureMy-T-Pen.

Description of how to operate and configureMy-T-Pen.

Chapter 3 - My-T-Pen Panels containsgeneral operation information, along withspecific information about each of My-T-Pen’spanels.

Chapter 4 - My-T-Pen Menu outlines thevarious options accessible from the My-T-Penmenu, and provides details on sizing,minimizing, saving, and closing My-T-Pen.

Chapter 5 - My-T-Pen Setup details all of theconfiguration options and dialogs available toconfigure and setup My-T-Pen.

Chapter 6 - My-T-Pen Logon Utilities coversthe specific options available for using thelogon utilities that enable using an on-screenkeyboard when logging onto Windows.

Chapter 3. My-T-PenPanels

General OperationAll features and actions within My-T-Pen areperformed by moving the cursor / pointer overthe desired button and single clicking theselected button. My-T-Pen may be repositionedon the screen by clicking anywhere on thebackground (anywhere that is not a button) ofMy-T-Pen and dragging it to the new screenposition.

My-T-Pen can also assign a secondary button(if supported by the hardware driver) to moveMy-T-Pen. See My-T-Pen Setup Help for moreinformation on how to change your Mouse

64

Chapter 3. My-T-Pen Panels

Button Assignments.

Tool Bar Panel and KeysMy-T-Pen may be configured to operate in aSupervisor or Operator Mode, which changesthe functionality of the Tool Bar. The Tool Barmay be covered or hidden under a CustomLogo. Consult My-T-Pen Setup, SpecialHandling and the Advanced User Informationfor Details.

The Tool Bar can also be closed, but this isintended as a developer / integrator function.From the Current Settings | Panels menu youmay individually select panels to open andclose. There is also a manual override,available in Panels. When this is enabled, a3-click (1-2-3) click combination will togglethe panel - if opened, it will be closed - if

65


closed, it will be opened. The original designcreated the Tool Bar as the one panel that cannever be closed, and it is handled differentlythan the other selectable panels. Allowing it toclose creates certain usability issues, and incertain cases the Control Panel will bemodified to offer other options when the ToolBar is closed. If the Tool Bar is closed, resizingand certain other actions will force the ToolBar open.

The Tool Button opens and closes My-T-Pen66


Control Panel in the normal / SupervisorMode. In Operator Mode, the Tool Button doesnot function.

The Menu Button pops up the My-T-PenMenu. It allows you quick access to some ofthe frequently used options as well as theability to run My-T-Pen Help. You may alsosave your current configuration & screenposition from the My-T-Pen Menu . InOperator Mode, the Menu Button does notfunction.

The Minimize Button minimizes My-T-Pen toan icon or a button, based on your currentconfiguration.

Important Note: Disabling thefunctionality and/or changing theappearance of the Tool Bar is possible(often used when in the Operator Mode).The Operator Mode is an Advanced

67


Function. Consult My-T-Pen Setup,Special Handling and the Advanced UserInformation for Details.

Control Panel and Keys

The Control panel allows you to open and68


close all My-T-Pen panels. Click on each keyto perform the toggle action. Blue(highlighted) letters indicate an open panel,black letters indicate a closed panel.

Click on the Tool Button to activate the ControlPanel. To prevent the Operator from accessingthis panel, see My-T-Pen Setup, SpecialHandling and the Advanced User Notes forDetails.

Keys & Functions

Kybd: opens and closes the alpha keyboardpanelEdit: opens and closes the edit panelNum: opens and closes the numeric panelMag: opens and closes the Magnifier panelSzUp: steps up the size of My-T-Pen currentlydisplayed If the Tool Bar is closed, this buttonwill change to become Tool. If Tool is clickedon, the Tool Bar will open.

69


SzDn: steps down the size of My-T-Pencurrently displayed If the Tool Bar is closed,this button will change to become Hide. IfHide is clicked on, the Control Panel will hide.If the Control Panel is the only button panelopened, this button will change to becomeSwap. If Swap is clicked on, the Tool Bar willopen, and the Control panel will close.Help: opens and closes the Quick Help panelInfo: opens and closes the System InformationpanelWin: opens and closes the Windows ControlspanelMacro: opens and closes the Macro panelCalc: opens and closes the CalculatorExit: exits My-T-Pen and Closes theMy-T-Pen Window

70


Keyboard Panels and Keys

When you click any of the keys on theKeyboard (Alpha) Panel, Edit Panel, andNumeric Panel, they will respond exactly likethe corresponding keystroke on a physicalkeyboard. In order to type with My-T-Pen,another window must be the ActiveApplication and have the input focus. Windowstypically indicate where typed characters willbe displayed by the Caret, or text cursor. Thisusually is displayed as a flashing bar, althoughother shapes may be used.

To use combination keys i.e. Shift, Alt, or Ctrljust click on that key. Your cursor will change

71


and My-T-Pen will display which key iscurrently locked. For example, if you haveclicked on the Alt key, the cursor will have theword Alt visible. The lock will be releasedafter you click on a normal key, i.e. A-Z keys.You may carry more than one combination keyat a time.

On some international layouts, the right-mostAlt key is treated as the "AltGr" key. Whenpressed, this key acts as if both the Ctrl key andthe Alt key have been pressed, and the cursorwill indicate this combination state. Thisadditional state (e.g. Ctrl & Alt keys bothpressed) allows access to additional letters andkeys.

There are numerous layouts available for thekeyboard panel, accessible through My-T-PenSetup, Keyboards - See My-T-Pen Setup Helpfor information on available panels and how tochange the current keyboard layout.

72


You may also select from some pre-defined(included) Build-A-Board custom layouts. Tocreate your own layouts, you will need IMG’sBuild-A-Board.

Keys may be programmed with commands orMacros. See Key Options in Setup andreference the My-T-Pen Developer’s Kit formore information.

Windows Control Panels and

73


Keys

Click on each button to perform the actiondescribed. The keystroke equivalent is shownin the [brackets]. Page 1 - Windows ControlsDesktop Panel

MENU Opens the control (system) menu ofthe active window. [Alt][Space]

Prop Properties / Opens the Context Menu (if

74


available) [Shift][F10]

NEXT Go to next window and restore windowsize. [Alt][Tab]

Yes Yes answer. [Alt][Y]

No No answer. [Alt][N]

Tile Tile the windows/icons. [Shift][F4]

FIND Switches through all open windows.[Alt][Esc]

RSTR Restore the window to its former size.[Alt][Space][R]

CLOSE Close the active window. [Alt][F4]

MIN Minimize the active window (to an icon).[Alt][Space][N]

MAX Maximize the active window (fullscreen). [Alt][Space][X]

Casc Cascade the windows/icons. [Shift][F5]

Find Find the next child window. [Ctrl][Tab]75


Enter Enter Key. [ENTER]

Close Close the active child window of anactive window. [Ctrl][F4]

Rstr Restore the child window to its formersize. [Alt][Space][R]

Max Maximize the child window.[Alt][Space][X]

Pg2 Move to Page 2 of the Windows Controls.

Page 2 - Windows Controls Application Panel

UNDO Undo last command. [Alt-BkSp]

CUT Cut highlighted object to clipboard.[Shft-Del][Ctrl-X]

COPY Copies highlighted object to clipboard.[Ctrl-Ins][Ctrl-C]

PASTE Pastes object from clipboard to activewindow. [Shft-Ins][Ctrl-V]

76


PPST Pastes object from clipboard to previouswindow.

PPSTR Pastes object from clipboard toprevious window and returns.

FIND Switches through all open windows.[Alt-Esc]

PREV Goes to previous active window (ifavailable).

CLOSE closes active window. [Alt-F4]

MIN minimizes active window (to an icon).[Alt][Space][N]

MAX maximizes active window (full screen).[Alt][Space][X]

RSTR Restore the window to its former size.[Alt][Space][R]

Find find the next child window. [Ctrl-Tab]

Enter Enter Key. [Enter]

77


Close Close the active child window of anactive window. [Ctrl][F4]

Rstr Restore the child window to its formersize. [Alt][Space][R]

Max maximize the child window.[Alt][Space][X]

Pg1 return to page 1.

In order to use the PPST and PPSTRfunctions, you must do the following:

1. These functions work best when you havetwo windows on your desktop.

2. Use the FIND button to select the secondwindow.

3. Verify that both windows are in sequenceby using the PREV key.

4. If both windows switch back and forth,then this feature is available.

78


5. Highlight some text in Window1 and pressCOPY or CUT.

6. Use PPST to paste to Window2.

7. Use PPSTR to past to Window2 and returnto Window1.

8. This feature will continue to be available,until either Window is closed or anotherwindow receives the input focus.

79


Macro Panels and Keys

The purpose of the Macro Panel is to give youthe capability of defining your own buttons tolaunch programs, open other Macro Panels, orcreate keystroke combinations.

In My-T-Pen, a Macro is a sequence ofkeystrokes or actions tied to a button. TheMacro is initiated by selecting the button.

The main Macro Panel provided has options

80


preprogrammed to show you the vastcapabilities of this panel. For more informationsee the User’s Guide, or see My-T-Pen SetupHelp (How to create Macros).

Several Example Macro Panels have also beenprovided. Macro Panels have the ability toAuto-Open when the appropriate applicationbecomes the active window. The Auto-Openfeature will only operate if the Macro Panel isopen on My-T-Pen, and the My-T-Pen windowis not minimized.

81


Calculator Panel

The calculator is a standard four functioncalculator. To operate simply press the desirednumber, press an operation key, press the nextnumber, and press an operation key or the total(=) key. You may then send the displayednumber to the active window by pressing theSD (Send) button. While there is a numberstored in memory, the calculator’s displaywindow frame will change color to indicate

82


that memory has a value stored.

Calculator Tape

The Tape key will allow you to run a history ofany calculations, just as on paper tape and thenyou may save it as a file, print it, or import it toanother document. If you want to use the tape,it must be activated BEFORE any operationsare performed. Click on the Tape button toactivate. You may also click on the calculatordisplay window to activate & deactivate thecalculator tape. The calculator tape willautomatically close if you close the CalculatorPanel on My-T-Pen. If necessary, you will beasked if you wish to save any informationrecorded in the Tape.

The Calculator Tape window has a drop-downFile Menu which has options to save the Tapeas file, print, or open a previously saved tape.The drop-down Edit menu has the standard editfunctions - Undo, Cut, Copy, and Paste.

83


Quick Help Panel

The Quick Help panel appears above thecurrently displayed panels and describes eachkey as it is passed over with the cursor. Youmay open or close the Quick Help panel fromthe My-T-Pen Menu or from the Help buttonon the My-T-Pen Control Panel .

To assign the Quick Help capability to yourmacros, see How to create Macros inMy-T-Pen Setup Help.

System Information Panel

The information panel appears below the

84


currently displayed panels and shows date,time, system resources, etc. as chosen fordisplay in My-T-Pen Setup. You may rearrangethe order of the information shown by clickingon any item. This will move that item to firstplace on the left in the information panel. Ifyou have more than one hard-drive or aCD-ROM drive, or if you are operating on aNetwork , use the up-and-down arrows todisplay the current free space of each drive.

Time & Date display depend on Internationaldisplay settings set by the Windows ControlPanel.

85


Magnifier Panel

The Magnifier will display a magnified view ofthe area where your Cursor (Pointer) iscurrently over. The Magnifier Panel magnifiesanywhere on the screen and can magnifybetween 1x through 10x (2x default). This isvery helpful when My-T-Pen is open as a smallboard. You still will be able to select all keysby looking at the magnifier. This is also an aid

86


to the visually impaired. To select a differentmagnification, slide the cursor over theMagnifier panel and click - a menu with 1x to10x selections will appear - select the desiredmagnification with the menu.

If you want to display the Cursor inside theMagnifier, run My-T-Pen Setup and click on"Configuration" | click on "Panels" | check"Display Cursor" On or Off, and click OK.Note that this is a reference cursor, not theactual cursor visible on the screen.

87

Chapter 4. My-T-PenMenu

The My-T-Pen Menu will give you quickaccess to the most used functions of My-T-Penand Windows System Menu functions. Thedefault operation of the right mouse button (i.e.second button) will open this menu when it isclicked over the My-T-Pen window.

My-T-Pen MenuSize

Clicking on Size will open a pop-up menu. Youmay select Size Up or Size Down to go up orgo down a single size. Here you can select anyof the 12 smaller sizes of My-T-Pen. The

88

Chapter 4. My-T-Pen Menu

current size is indicated with a check-mark.

When larger than Size 12, you may only SizeUp or Size Down.

The Screen-Edge Scroll option will have acheck mark when Enabled. When Enabled anda portion of the My-T-Pen window isoff-screen, My-T-Pen will scroll backon-screen when the cursor (pointer) is held atthe extreme edge of the screen. This featuremay be useful for larger sizes. NOTE: Certainpointing devices may not react desirably whenthis feature is Enabled - select the Screen-EdgeScroll to clear the check mark and Disable thisfeature.

Minimize to Icon

Minimize to Button

The check-mark indicates the way My-T-Penwill be minimized, when you click on theMinimize Button. Select which way My-T-Pen

89


will look when minimized. Note that the Iconon Taskbar can only be selected via My-T-PenSetup. If currently at Button and Minimize toIcon is selected, the Icon option will be used.By clicking on either selection, My-T-Pen willbe minimized immediately.

My-T-Pen Quick Help

Clicking on My-T-Pen Quick Help will openand close the Quick Help panel. Thecheck-mark will indicate its current status.

My-T-Pen Help!

Clicking on My-T-Pen Help will openMy-T-Pen Help (information in this guide).

My-T-Pen Tutorial

Clicking on My-T-Pen Tutorial will begin theMy-T-Pen Tutorial.

My-T-Pen Setup

90


Clicking on My-T-Pen Setup will openMy-T-Pen Setup Window.

Current Settings

Note: Saving BOTH the Settings andPosition is required for returning to thecurrent layout when closing & restartingMy-T-Pen. Refer to the Developer’s Kitnotes for other configuration options,saving, restoring, etc. Settings refers tothe current panels shown, and the currentsize (the current, visible layout). Clickingon Current Settings will open a pop-upmenu. Here you can select Save CurrentSettings, or Restore Settings.

Save Current Settings: This will saveMy-T-Pen as it appears. My-T-Pen will alwaysopen with this saved configuration.

91


Restore Settings: If you have changedMy-T-Pen and want to return to the savedconfiguration, select Restore Settings.Panels: Clicking on Panels will open apop-up menu. This allows you to open andclose individual panels. When the panel isalready opened, a check mark will be next tothe Panel. If the panel is opened, and you selectthe panel from the menu, it will close thepanel. If you select a closed panel from themenu, it will open the panel. From this menu,you may not close a panel if there is only onepanel opened.

Position

Clicking on Position will open a pop-up menu.Here you can select Save Position, or RestorePosition.

Save Position: This will save My-T-Pen’scurrent screen position.

92


Restore Position: If you have movedMy-T-Pen and want to return to the savedposition, select Restore Position.Set Position: Clicking on Set Position willopen a pop-up menu. From this menu you mayselect a screen position for My-T-Pen from theoptions available.

Close

Clicking on Close will close My-T-Pen.

Advanced Features

Selecting Advanced Features will open apop-up menu. Here you can access somespecial features.

Transparency

Clicking on Transparency... will open aTransparency control window, allowing you toEnable or Disable this feature. When Enabled,you can set the current Transparency level by

93


sliding the control - to the left is moretransparent, to the right is less transparent (oropaque). The current Transparency level isused if My-T-Pen is closed and then re-opened.

Transparency Notes: WhenTransparency is Enabled, the windowinterface to Windows changes (LayeredWindows), and the following are knownissues:

• The Magnifier panel can now magnifyimages under the My-T-Pen windowitself, providing a more intuitiveoperation.

• When operating with CrossScanner,CrossScanner’s IconWindow will bedisplayed below My-T-Pen. It is stronglyrecommended that Transparency not beenabled if using CrossScanner.

94


Manual Tool Bar Control

Clicking on Manual Tool Bar Control willEnable or Disable this capability - whenchecked, you can click 3 times on a blank(non-key) area or border, and toggle the Toolbar Panel - if open, it will close, and if closed itwill open. For further info, see notes inMy-T-Pen Setup | Panels.

Tablet PC Input Panel

Note: Windows XP Tablet PC VersionsOnly - this interface is not available inWindows Vista.

When operating on the Tablet PC, My-T-Pencan replace the Tablet PC Input Panel. Clickingon Tablet PC Input Panel will Enable orDisable this capability. When enabled, clickingon the "Tablet PC Input Panel" on the task bar

95


will toggle the visibility of My-T-Pen. Whenenabled, the My-T-Pen Tablet PC Interface willbe running, and will be in the StartUp group.

Note: You must be an Administrator tofully disable the My-T-Pen Tablet PCInterface (or have sufficient rights toremove the All Users | StartUp groupshortcut). When Enabled, Exit or Closefrom the Menu will only hide My-T-Pen andMy-T-Pen will not exit with the Developer’sKit CloseMTS. To fully close My-T-Pen,first disable the Tablet PC Input Paneloption on the Advanced Features Menu,then select Close from the My-T-Penmenu. For additional information, refer tothe PanelWatch in Advanced User Notes.

96

Chapter 5. My-T-PenSetup

My-T-Pen Setup - Overview

My-T-Pen Setup provides an easy interface tochange options, settings, and the configuration

97

Chapter 5. My-T-Pen Setup

for My-T-Pen.

Advanced Notes: The filesKEYBOARD.KBF and MYTPEN.INIcontain all of the configuration informationfor My-T-Pen. There can also be KeyboardMacro files for customized Macro panels(e.g. MAC?????.KMF) and WordList files.All of these files are stored in a locationdetermined by the ConfigPath entry in theMYTPEN.INI file. (Refer to the ConfigPathentry in the Initialization file for additionalinformation.) This location determines ifthe files are per user or shared, and therequired permissions for normal operation.By default, these files are personalized foreach user, and the specific location can bereferenced from the File menu in My-T-PenSetup. You may also access the WindowsControl Panel from the File menu.

98


In the File menu, you can access WindowsControl Panel, view the current folder locationof the configuration files, Import/Export settingfiles, and Exit.

• Run Control Panel - This opens theWindows Control Panel to access systemlevel properties like Appearance, andavailable Keyboard Layouts. For most users,the Windows Control Panel not required - itis provided here as a convenience.

• Show Config File Location - This displaysthe actual path to the My-T-Penconfiguration files for the current user. Referto the ConfigPath entry in the Initializationfile for additional information.

• Export Current User Configuration -When selected, and the operation confirmed,this will save and compress the currentuser’s configuration files and place a

99


My-T-Pen_Settings.zip file on the Desktop.This file can be saved as a backup, or movedto another system to transfer theconfiguration from one system to another. Ifmultiple exports are done, each file namewill change by adding a "+" symbol to theexport file name.

• Import Configuration - This will open aFile Selection window to select a"???_Settings.zip". If selected, and theoperation confirmed, the current user’sexisting settings will be overwritten and bereplaced with the settings contained withinthe selected file. For best results, use settingsfiles from the same product & version, andperform this operation from My-T-Pen Setupwhile My-T-Pen is closed

• Exit - this will Close and Exit My-T-PenSetup.

In the Options menu, each major Setup section100


can be accessed, along with Save options whenrunning My-T-Pen.

When My-T-Pen is running and My-T-PenSetup is opened, the setting Save Settings onExit is checked "On" by default. Thissynchronizes My-T-Pen with the changes madein Setup and My-T-Pen. If this option ischecked "Off" and My-T-Pen is running whilechanging settings, the settings will be saved asnormal upon an "OK", but these changes willnot be reflected in My-T-Pen until it isrestarted.

• Save After Move - the current settings andposition are saved after the completion of amove. This can be useful to always preservethe current position while operatingMy-T-Pen.

• Save After Change - this saves the settingsand position after a size or panel change.

101


This can be helpful in preserving the currentconfiguration.

• Save At Close - the configuration andposition will be saved when My-T-Pen isclosed. This ensures that My-T-Pen willalways open in the last used configuration.

• Save At End Session - if Windows isshut-down or the user logs off, the currentsettings and position will be saved.

Access to Help and the Help Index (i.e. accessto this guide) are available from the HelpMenu.

You may also Check for Updates... from theHelp Menu in My-T-Pen Setup.

About My-T-Pen... in the Help Menu providesversion and release information aboutMy-T-Pen.

102


Help

Click on the Help Button.

Help brings up the My-T-Pen Help, whichoffers various views into this guide. Helpincludes help for My-T-Pen, My-T-Pen Setup,My-T-Pen Logon Utilities, and AdvancedNotes. Click the Help Button or click Help onthe caption bar menu to access the on-line helpscreens for My-T-Pen Setup. Each dialog boxin My-T-Pen Setup also has context sensitiveHelp available by selecting the Help button.

103


Change My-T-PenConfiguration

Click on the Configuration Button.

104


Within Configuration, you will be able to setconditions that influence how My-T-Pen willappear and behave on screen.

Minimize My-T-Pen to...

You can select how My-T-Pen will act when itis minimized.

Title Bar Button - In order to minimizeMy-T-Pen to a Title Bar Button, do thefollowing steps:

1. Click on the diamond-shapedRadio-Button with the title "Title BarButton".

2. Press the OK Button.

My-T-Pen now will minimize to a button,which is always attached to the activeapplication’s title bar (top caption bar). Torestore the window back to full size, click onthe button once.

105


Note: There are numerous customerrequested button size & positioningoptions - see detailed information inInitialization File Documentation.

TaskBar Button - In order to minimizeMy-T-Pen to a Taskbar Button, do thefollowing steps:

1. Click on the diamond-shapedRadio-Button with the title "TaskbarButton".


My-T-Pen now will minimize to a button onthe Taskbar. To restore the window back to fullsize, click on the button on the WindowsTaskbar, or right-click and select restore ormaximize.

106


Tray Icon - In order to minimize My-T-Pen toan icon in the System Tray, do the followingsteps:

1. Click on the diamond-shapedRadio-Button with the title "Tray Icon".


My-T-Pen now will minimize to an icon in theSystem Tray (in the area with the clock &volume control). To restore the window back tofull size, click on the small icon in the task bar,or right-click and select restore.

Window - In order to minimize My-T-Pen toan floating Window, do the following steps:

1. Click on the diamond-shapedRadio-Button with the title "a Window".


107


My-T-Pen now will minimize to a smallfloating window. To restore the window back tofull size, click on the window. The minimizedfloating window can be resized and positionedas desired - when My-T-Pen is minimized, thelast position and size of the minimized floatingwindow will be used.

Operation Options

This will open an Operation Options dialogallowing you to set your preferences whileusing My-T-Pen. These include Reacting toDialogs and other Windows, Typematicoperation, Keystroke / Click option, VirtualPointer, Action Button Move, Lower Casedisplay, Track Pointing Device Input, and KeyBorder.

Key Options

This opens the Key Options dialog where youcan select Keys and Key combos (Ctrl, Shift,

108


Alt) that may be Enabled or Disabled.Additionally, a Key or Key Combo can launchan executable. In conjunction with theMy-T-Pen Developers Kit, this capability canbe used to create new operational features, suchas Minimize after the Enter key is pressed.

Special Options

This opens the Special Options dialog boxwhere Special handling features for Advancedusers, developers, and integrators can be found.Includes the Supervisor/Operator modeoptions, and Custom Logo Feature, along withthe ability to react to other windows in thesystem as they become active (SpecialHandling), including the ability to launch aseparate executable.

The six buttons in the middle of the dialog boxoffer additional configuration options forMy-T-Pen.

109


Panels Select the panels which My-T-Pendisplays.

Motion Select the motion of your panels.

Size Select the size of My-T-Pen.

Info Select the information displayed in theInformation panel.

Colors Select the colors for each panel.

Fonts Select different character display forMy-T-Pen.

Display Options

Display 3D Keys - Check this option On toenable the display of the shaded,three-dimensional look keys. For resolutions of256 colors or less, it is recommended that thisoption be set Off. My-T-Pen checks the currentdisplay capabilities when started, and mayoverride this option. Note that the 3D keys areonly displayed for sizes 8 or higher (the

110


smaller sizes do not have enough displayedpixels to effectively render the 3-D look).

Show & Hide Keys

This opens My-T-Pen in a special mode thatallows keys on the main keyboard panel to behidden. This is useful for controlledapplications where certain keys or keycombinations need to be unavailable - forexample, hiding the Alt key makes Alt-F4impossible. To hide a key, click on the key -My-T-Pen will be repainted without the keyjust selected. To re-display a hidden key, clickon the space where the key normally wouldappear, and the key will be shown again. ToSave the current setting, click on OK . SelectCANCEL to ignore any changes. Select Resetto Show All Keys on My-T-Pen.

My-T-Pen Logon Utilities

In order to logon onto Windows & obtain

111


access to Network resources, the appropriatelogon configuration is required withinWindows. There are various options availablein My-T-Pen to display & interact with thelogon requirements. This opens the appropriateconfiguration options for the Windowsplatform running. See My-T-Pen LogonUtilities for more information.

Note: In general, when you make changeswithin My-T-Pen Setup, the changes areimmediate and reflected by My-T-Pen.However, some display optioncombinations may require a restart ofMy-T-Pen for proper display. The logonoptions typically require a restart ofWindows.

My-T-Pen Panel Selection112


Dialog Box

My-T-Pen lets you select which panels areopen every time you start My-T-Pen.

If you want ALL panels to be open every timeyou run My-T-Pen, click on the "All Panels"Check-Button.

To allow manual control of opening & closingthe Tool Bar, place a check-mark in the ToolbarManual Control. When enabled, a 3-click(1-2-3) click on a non-button (e.g. border or

113


other non-key area) will toggle the Tool Bar toopen if closed, and to close if opened.

You can click on-and-off each individual panel.

The panels with a check-mark will be openeach time you start My-T-Pen.

To Display the cursor within the Magnifier,place a check-mark in the Display CursorCheck-Button.

Press the OK Button.

If you do not want to save your changes, pressthe CANCEL button.

114


Operation Options

IMPORTANT NOTE: There are varioussettings here to change how My-T-Penoperates. If you are having problemstyping, see Interface Settings.

React to Dialogs and other Windows(Window Contention)

115


This is a global setting for My-T-Pen that willchange the internal operation of the software.If set On, My-T-Pen will move off of dialogs,and react to other Windows based on Specialand Macro Panel settings. If set Off, thissensing & reacting to other windows in thesystem will be disabled. For certain types ofuse, having My-T-Pen remain in a particularscreen location at all times and not affectingother windows in the system is preferred.

IMPORTANT NOTE: My-T-Pen’sautomatic sensing for Special & MacroPanel options will NOT operate if this is setOff.

Enable Typematic Operation

The automatic typing of a character while aparticular key is pressed down for a period of

116


time requires that Enable Typematic Operationbe set On. If set Off, this automatic typingoperation is disabled. Specific settings forTypematic operation can be found in theMYTPEN.INI initialization file. See AdvancedUser Information for more details.

No Keystroke until Down and Up ClickCompleted

My-T-Pen reacts like a physical keyboard, anda Click then Drag motion off of a particularkey results in the down and subsequent releaseof that key, resulting in a keystroke beinggenerated. To disable this default action, set theoption On. Setting this option On is preferredby users who do not have precise control overthe positioning of the mouse pointer while aclick occurs. When set On, TypematicOperation is automatically set Off to disablemultiple keystrokes of the same key. This theforces the pointing device to complete the

117


Down & Up Click to generate the keystrokeinitially selected by the Down click.

Virtual Pointer in Use

This setting should be set On if a the deviceused to move the mouse cursor (pointer) is nota standard mouse, or trackball. Any hardwaredevice that interacts via a "device driver" withWindows should not be considered a VirtualPointer (unless the implementation does notfully emulate a standard mouse [which is morecommon than otherwise]). Various AssistiveTechnology devices such as cameras or lasersthat track the eye, other biometric sensors, orother software based translation interfaces(such as the MouseKeys in Microsoft’sAccessibilities options) when used should havethe Virtual Pointer setting On. This featureforces My-T-Pen to operate slightly differentlyfor "Clicks" (button down, button up), andduring moving the My-T-Pen window.

118


Alternate Virtual Interface

This setting should be set on ONLY when thereare typing difficulties AND the pointing devicedoes not activate the down/up display ofMy-T-Pen buttons. This setting may berequired for software interfaces, and othernon-physical approaches to operating themouse cursor and generating clicks. Olderversions of "Joystick-To-Mouse" will requirethis to be set On.

Allow Action Button Move

The setting is default On, and it allows theAction button (as set in My-T-Pen Setup,Mouse Buttons, Action button) to move theMy-T-Pen window by clicking on the frame orany unused area (Click, drag, then release). Ifthe mouse cursor is not always trackedaccurately, it is recommended that this be set toOff to prevent accidental moves. This may alsobe set off to prevent the operator from moving

119


the My-T-Pen window (note that the secondand/or third button must be configuredproperly).

Windows 2000/XP/Vista (This setting does notapply, and is disabled)

Track Pointing Device Input at all times

This setting is default Off, unless Setup sensesa known driver or interface that requires thissetting On. If there are any focus problems (i.e.typing [clicking] on My-T-Pen does not type[send keystrokes] into the currently activewindow), then this setting should be set On tosee if it resolves this problem. In general, thissetting should be Off if at all possible. SeeAdvanced User Notes for more information onthis setting and how it affects My-T-Penoperation.

Use Upper Case Characters Always(Keyboard Panel)

120


By default, lower case characters are displayedon the Keyboard (Alpha) panel, unless the Shiftor Caps lock is engaged. Check this option Onto force Upper Case display at all times.

Key Border (# of pixels inside key edgeignored as key press)

This setting is used to reduce the area of eachkey that can register a press. For maximumeffect, the default setting is no border area. Asthe Key Border values increase, the pixelsinside each edge (top, left, bottom, right) areremoved from the area of the key that will reactto a click. Because of the differing sizes of thepanels and keys, this setting may affect certainsize ranges differently. It is recommended thatthe particular size for usage be selected first,and then the desired Key Border be set tomatch the current size.

Note: My-T-Pen automatically sets the

121


"Allow Action Button Move" to Off whenthere is a border in use (greater than 0).This prevents the undesirable move whenclicks & releases are not accurate due toeither software driver or operatingconditions.

Interface SettingsThese are the steps that should be tried if youare having difficulties typing with My-T-Pen.

1) The following settings are the preferredoptions:

Virtual Pointer in Use = On

Alternate Virtual Interface = Off

Track Pointing Device Input at All Times =Off

122


2) If you are working with a Touchscreen or aPen, and when tapping on My-T-Pen, youobserve the buttons being pressed, but theactive application (where you are trying to typeinto) becomes inactive, try setting TrackPointing Device Input at All Times to On.


Alternate Virtual Interface = Off

Track Pointing Device Input at All Times =On

3) If you are working with a virtual, assistive,or another non-hardware pointing device, andwhen clicking on My-T-Pen, you do notobserve the buttons being pressed, set theAlternate Virtual Interface to On


Alternate Virtual Interface = On

Track Pointing Device Input at All Times =123


Off

Other Notes

The Virtual Pointer in Use should ONLY be setOff if you are using a physical mouse, or adevice that interfaces like a physical mouse.The device MUST support theGetAsyncKeyState for the VK_LBUTTON &VK_RBUTTON. In general, there is nonegative aspect to having this setting On evenif you are using a physical mouse.

The Alternate Virtual Interface overrides theTrack Pointing Device Input at All Times, sothere is never a case where they BOTH wouldbe On.

If you are still having difficulties withMy-T-Pen after trying the above, check thedevice settings to see if there are other optionsavailable - it is possible it is operating in amode that is not compatible with other

124


Windows programs. You may also wish to testwith a physical mouse to see if the pointingdevice is truly emulating a mouse pointer.

If you continue to have difficulties, pleasecontact Technical Support.

Key Options

Key Options offers customization capabilitiesfor keys on the main Alpha Keyboard Panel

125


and the Edit panel. Keys may be disabled,assigned to other functions, and can bere-mapped using the Launch Key EXE inconjunction with the Developer’s Kit (e.g. theEsc key could be re-mapped to send Alt-F4).

Select Key

This Drop-Down list allows you to select thespecific key you wish to work with. Thenumber in parentheses is the internal ID usedby My-T-Pen for the key’s position. Refer tothe Build-A-Macro Notes for more details onthese internal IDs.

Select Key Modifier (Key with...)

This Drop-Down list allows you to select aspecific key combination (i.e. Ctrl-Alt-Delete)for the currently selected Key. All combinationoptions are available. Note that with the propersetting, you can disable Ctrl-F1, but not F1, orjust disable Alt-F4, or Shift-Esc. Due to the

126


complexity of available applications, eachpossible option for each key is given. See theKey Display (below) which is a quick visualaid to see if a particular key has any enhancedsettings.

Key Display

This is a visual aid only. When it is 0 (zero),there are no enhanced key settings in use. Allkeys are Enabled, and there is no Launchsetting on. Any non-zero display means that atleast one enhanced key setting is selected forthe currently selected Key.

Clear

This button will remove all enhanced settingsfor the currently selected key. All keystrokeswill be Enabled, and any Launch settings willbe removed (No Additional Action will beselected to every possible keystroke). This willnot remove the Key EXE entry, but this is

127


disabled since all Launch settings will becleared.

Enable Keystroke(s) / Disable Keystroke(s)

This defines the state of the particular key andits current modifier (Ctrl, Shift, Alt). IfEnabled, then My-T-Pen will generate & sendthe keystroke. If Disabled, then thekeystroke(s) will be removed and no action byMy-T-Pen will occur when the particularkeystroke(s) is/are initiated by the user. Notethat this action is independent of the LaunchKey EXE capability.

No Additional Action / Launch Key EXE

In general, the No Additional Action for anykeystroke is the typical setting. Due tocustomer requests, we have added thecapability of also initiating other actions tied tospecific Keystrokes. By using the My-T-PenDevelopers Kit, these (or any other developer

128


selected action) can be tied to a particularkeystroke or combination. Some of theserequested capabilities are:

- Minimize to button upon Enter (type Enter,then minimize = Enter Key Enabled, LaunchMINMZMTS.EXE)

- Ctrl-Alt-Delete restarts system(Ctrl-Alt-Delete Launches NTRSTART.EXE)

- Alt-F4 cannot close window (Alt-F4Disabled)

- Make F1 run special Application Helpprogram tied to a different key (F1 KeyDisabled, Launch SDSTRMTS.EXE withappropriate alternate keystroke used)

This adds a great deal of flexibility to thegeneral keyboard (similar to the capabilities ofthe Macro panels), but it also creates a greaterchance of confusion. These should only beused when implementing a system for only 1

129


type of use. In general, these settings arepotentially more dangerous then helpful.Wondering why the keyboard disappearseverytime you press Enter is certainly not theend goal of productivity - so please beextremely careful when using these options,and document any changes for developers tocome and for your users!

Key EXE

This is an Executable file that will be run if the"Launch key EXE" option is selected for theparticular Key Combination. Note you may addcommand line options, but be sure to click onOK when you are through editing the selection.

Browse

This button will open a File Open BrowseDialog that will let you explore your system toselect an executable. Because of backwardcompatibility, only short path & file names are

130


used.

It is strongly recommended that onlyDeveloper Kit EXEs be used.

My-T-Pen Special HandlingDialog Box

Important Note: This dialog box contains

131


advanced user options. In general, mostusers should ignore these settings.

Select Special Options:

Some Windows applications do not conform topre-defined Windows standards, or requirespecial handling to work along with My-T-Pen.Some known applications are included in thePull-down box box on the left. On the right,click on a Radio-Button to select the actioneach application should perform to work alongMy-T-Pen. You may add new Applications bytyping the name in the top box on the left. Thiswill add the Application Name to the list. Onceselected, choose one of the options on the rightto indicate how My-T-Pen should react whenthe selected Application becomes active. Todelete an entry, highlight the entire selection,press the Delete key to remove the text, and

132


then press Enter to remove the entry from thelist.

Minimize to Button

When My-T-Pen overlaps the Application, a"Goto Button" command will minimizeMy-T-Pen to a Button.

Minimize to Icon

When My-T-Pen overlaps the Application a"Goto Icon" command will minimizeMy-T-Pen to an Icon.

Move Off Application

This will move My-T-Pen below theApplication Window. Note that based onwindow size and My-T-Pen size, areas may bemoved off screen.

Hide

This option currently matches the Minimize toIcon.

133


Resize

This will move My-T-Pen off the window, andresize the Application so that it occupies therest of the screen area above My-T-Pen.

Ignore

This option is meant for the user who maywant different actions based on changingcircumstances, and may not want special actionduring a period of time.

Run EXE

The ability to Run an Executable file adds greatflexibility, and should be used in conjunctionwith the My-T-Pen Developers Kit. Theexecutable file is run once until anotherexecutable is launched via My-T-Pen (typicallywhen some other window becomes active thatis in the Special Handling list). Primarily this ismeant to be used to position or reconfigureMy-T-Pen as different windows become active

134


(different web pages, different applications,etc.). My-T-Pen only checks the Activewindow when it is open normally (NOT as anIcon or Button). Also, the React to Dialog andother Windows in Operation Options canoverride these settings.

Browse

This button will open a File Open BrowseDialog that will let you explore your system toselect an executable. For maximumcompatibility, only short path & file names areused. When the Run EXE is updated, it is alsosaved for the currently selected "ApplicationWindow Text". If you wish to modify the entry(e.g. add command line options), you mustthen click on OK to save these changes.

Notes on Application Window Text &Advanced Notes

The entire Caption bar (or entire Window

135


Name) is searched for a match, starting in theorder of the Special List. Any part of thewindow name will match, therefore beingspecific is important. This substring match cancause problems, especially if the Window Textis common, e.g. "Word" will match WordPad,Microsoft Word, WordPerfect, etc. Becauseeach entry is checked regularly by My-T-Pen,it can affect system operation as the list grows.This list should be used sparingly with extremecare, and only when using the Developers Kitwithin a separate Application is not an option.

Edit My-T-Pen Initialization file:

Pushing this button will allow you to directlyedit the contents of the My-T-Pen initializationfile. Caution: Editing the .INI file can causeMy-T-Pen to operate incorrectly! Know whatyou are editing. Refer to the My-T-Pen User’sGuide section on the Initialization File forcomplete coverage of this option.

136


Return to Installation defaults:

If you would like to return all options to theoriginal defaults, press this button. This willreplace the current initialization file(MYTPEN.INI) and the configuration file(KEYBOARD.KBF) with the files from thetime of original installation. EVERYTHINGwill be reset to the configuration at that time(i.e. the time immediately after installation).

Enable Operator Security

To Enable Operator Security, Check this optionon. When Enabled, operation of My-T-Pen islimited in the following ways:

- The Operator may not operate the ToolButton to access the Control Panel

- The Operator may not open the My-T-PenMenu

- The Operator may not open Build-A-Macro

137


from the Main Macro Panel

- Access to My-T-Pen Setup is controlled via aPassword.

Note: The Default password is PASS. If youdecide to change the password, be sure torecord the new password for future reference!

General "Operator Security" Notes

Configure My-T-Pen so that the open panels,size, and colors are optimized for theapplication. In general, the Control Panelshould be closed, as the "Operator Mode" doesnot disable the actions of this panel. If theMacro Panel is open, make sure that all MacroPanel links, launched applications, etc. do notallow the user access to areas that need to besecure. Once My-T-Pen is configured properly,position the My-T-Pen Window where desired,and the from the My-T-Pen Menu selectCurrent Settings, Save Current Settings, and

138


then select Position, Save Current Position.Open My-T-Pen Setup, and SelectConfiguration, Special, Enable Operator ModeSecurity, then select OK. Close My-T-Pen &My-T-Pen Setup. When My-T-Pen is run in thefuture, it will appear as configured, and the userwill not be able to modify the configurationwithout the My-T-Pen Setup Password. Formore detailed coverage of other built-infeatures, consult the My-T-Pen User’s Guide.

Disable Operator Minimize

This option will only work if Operator Securityis Enabled. If this option is On, then theminimize button on the Tool Bar will also bedisabled. Useful for specific applications, andin conjunction with the Custom Logo.

Use Custom Logo

If this option is On, My-T-Pen will load anoptional Custom Logo Bitmap (.BMP) file

139


located in the installation directory. This is adeveloper / integrator option, and specificdetails are in the My-T-Pen User’s Guide,Advanced User Information and Logo notes inthe Developer’s Kit. Also see info on IMG’sweb site(http://www.imgpresents.com/imgdev.htm).

My-T-Pen Panel MotionDialog Box

140


Panel Motion

Choose "Snap-Out Panel" and My-T-Pen’spanels will snap in & out. The newconfiguration will be displayed withoutintermediate displays.

Choose "Slide-Out Panel" and My-T-Pen’spanels will slide in & out. The newconfiguration will be displayed with a visualeffect of motion.



My-T-Pen Size Selections

141


Dialog Box

The size Dialog box allows you to select whichsize My-T-Pen will be displayed each time youstart the program.

NOTE: This is not available if My-T-Pen isusing a size larger than 12 (infinite sizing). Forsizes larger than 12, you must use SzUp &SzDn from the My-T-Pen Control Panel.

Each of the 12 pictures show the approximatesize of My-T-Pen. In order to select a size for

142


My-T-Pen, do the following steps:

1. Click on the picture of the size you wantMy-T-Pen to be.



NOTE:

You can change My-T-Pen’s size also directlyfrom the My-T-Pen Control Panel or select anew size from the My-T-Pen Menu.

Oversize Window Options

Oversize refers to the state when the My-T-Penwindow is wider than the screen display width.These are the options available here toaccommodate the user.

Enable Screen-Edge Scroll

143


When the My-T-Pen window (keyboarddisplay window) is larger than the actualdisplay (e.g. My-T-Pen is wider than the screenwidth), select this option to enable theautomatic scroll when the mouse pointer(cursor) is held at the edge of the screen. IfMy-T-Pen is off-screen at that edge, it willautomatically scroll completely into view whenthis option is checked On.

System Information DisplayDialog BoxThe System Information Dialog Box allowsyou to select which options are to be displayedin the Information Panel:

This is the System Information Panel.

144


You can click on-and-off each individualCheck-Button. The options with a check-markwill be displayed each time you startMy-T-Pen. To Sort the display, either addindividually or click on the item in the SystemInformation window to move the item to thefront of the list (leftmost).



My-T-Pen Colors Dialog145


Box

Select Color Source Select "Use SystemColors" to use the Windows scheme (availablein Display Properties, Appearance)

NOTE:

When System Colors are used in conjunctionwith 3D keys, only pure RGB colors areallowed. (RGB - Red, Green, Blue - 3 valuesbetween 0 and 255 indicating the amount ofRed, Green, or Blue used to "build" a color -

146


this is sometimes referred to as 24-bit color (3x 1 byte <=> 3 x 8 bits = 24 bits) - pure RGBmeans a value of either 0 or 255 (no bits set, orall bits set)) Due to the shading & desire for aclean appearance, preservation of the systemcolor is not possible (disable 3D keys to seeactual system color). The following algorithmis used to create a "pure" RGB color: Thesystem color is split into the 3 RGBcomponents, and then the smallest value issubtracted away from all elements, leaving 0,1, or 2 positive values - these then are used todetermine use of a solid color (i.e. value of255) or no color (i.e. a value of 0). This is usedas the "background" of the shaded keys. Inmost cases, this is in the same color scheme asthe System Colors. You may adjust theWindows Appearance, "Display 3D keys", orrevert back to "Use Panel Colors" to review thevarious display options.

147


Select "Use Panel Colors" to use My-T-PenColors. My-T-Pen colors allows you tocustomize My-T-Pen by coloring each panel’skeys and buttons.

Panel Colors

In order to color a My-T-Pen panel, do thefollowing steps:

Select Panel to Color

1. Choose among the seven panels.

2. Click on the diamond-shapedRadio-Button of the panel you wish tocolor.

Select Item to be Colored

1. Click on the diamond-shapedRadio-Button of the part of the button youwish to color. You may also Click on the

148


appropriate area of the oversized button onthe right.

2. Click on a color that is provided below (16colors) to select the color.

3. The item you have selected will change itscolor, and show you a preview of the in theoversized button window.

4. Repeat this process for all button parts youwant to color.

Once you are finished coloring one panel, youeither press OK Button to save, or selectanother panel to color. If you select anotherpanel to be colored, the previous colored panelwill change its colors immediately.

Use current Colors on all Panels

If you want your current selected colors to bethe colors for all panels, press this button.

Set Panel Colors to Default149


If you want to return one or all your panels totheir default colors, press this button. Tochange one panel back to default colors, do thefollowing steps:

1. Click on the diamond-shapedRadio-Button of the panel you wish tochange.

2. Click on "Set Panel Colors to Default"button.

3. The colors will return to default.

To change all panels back to default colors, dothe following steps:

1. After completing 1-3 above, press "Usecurrent Colors on all Panels".

2. All panels will change to default colors.

Keyboard Background

150


To Select Keyboard Background Color

Use the Keyboard Background Button tochange the color of the keyboard background& frame.

My-T-Pen BackgroundColors Dialog Box

This Dialog Box allows you to switch thecolors of the My-T-Pen panels. The followingpanels will be affected:

151


1. Alpha Keyboard Panel

2. Edit Panel

In order to select a color for My-T-Pen panels,do the following steps:

1. Click on the picture of the color you wantMy-T-Pen to be. A black frame willappear around your selection.



152


Fonts

IMPORTANT NOTE:

The Font capabilities of My-T-Pen are limitedfor a variety of reasons. These limited optionshave only been included as a specific solutionfor a small subset of customers. Use My-T-PenBuild-A-Board for more complete control overthe appearance.

Base / Medium / Large Selections

Sizes 1-6 are the Base sizes. For almost all

153


uses, the MyTMouse font is the best choice.

Medium Sizes are 7-9.

Large Sizes are 10-12.

Select Button for Base / Medium / Large

Each button selects the corresponding sizerange font. A System Font Selection dialog isavailable to select from installed fonts.

Only the (Font) Face Name is preserved.

Character Set for Base / Medium / Large

For MyTMouse, use 22. For most others, 0 isthe best choice (ANSI). Symbols use characterset 2. Other choices are:

ANSI_CHARSET = 0

DEFAULT_CHARSET = 1

SYMBOL_CHARSET = 2

MyTMouse = 22

154


MAC_CHARSET = 77

SHIFTJIS_CHARSET = 128

HANGEUL_CHARSET = 129

HANGUL_CHARSET = 129

JOHAB_CHARSET = 130

GB2312_CHARSET = 134

CHINESEBIG5_CHARSET = 136

GREEK_CHARSET = 161

TURKISH_CHARSET = 162

VIETNAMESE_CHARSET 163

HEBREW_CHARSET = 177

ARABIC_CHARSET = 178

BALTIC_CHARSET = 186

RUSSIAN_CHARSET = 204

THAI_CHARSET = 222

155


EASTEUROPE_CHARSET = 238

OEM_CHARSET = 255

1 Character Size Adjust for Base / Medium /Large

This setting refers to the amount subtractedfrom the available area of the key (total pixels)used to display the font character. Even thoughit strongly affects key displays of 1 character(i.e. alphanumeric keys on the Keyboard(Alpha) panel), it does have some effect on allbuttons displayed. In some ways, this is similarto the Key border concept in Operation Options- the only use for this value is in calculating thebest point size for the key display.

156


Select Keyboard Layouts

Click on the Keyboards Button.

My-T-Pen can operate with many different157


keyboard layouts. By selecting the samekeyboard layout that Windows uses, you cansynchronize the display on My-T-Pen with thecharacters generated in your application.

The main US keyboard layout is called the 101United States Standard (sometimes called theQWERTY layout (for the top left row ofkeys)). To change to a different US Keyboardlayout, do the following:

1. On the right-hand side of the dialog, Selecta layout by clicking on its name.

2. Press the OK Button. (If you do not wantto change the current layout, press theCANCEL button).

Some Special US Layouts

Dvorak Standard

Dvorak Left Handed

158


Dvorak Right Handed

My-T-Easy - alphabetically ordered (ABC)keyboard layout

Note: The special US layouts will onlyoperate correctly with the US Standardlayout selected in Windows.

In order to change the My-T-Pen keyboardlayout to another language, do the followingsteps:

1. Select a language (layout) by clicking onits name.

2. Press the OK Button. (If you do not wantto change the selected language, press theCANCEL button).

159


Important: This process will only changethe My-T-Pen keyboard layout. If you wishto change your physical keyboard layout,you must change your Windows driverfrom the Windows Control Panel (availablein Keyboard Properties, Layout).

For proper font display & typing, you mayneed to set Regional Settings (available inRegional Settings).

For additional notes, see Keyboard Layouts &Windows and see Advanced Notes onKeyboard Layouts.

When an International keyboard is selected,My-T-Pen offers the option to run the WindowsControl Panel. On some International layouts,the right [Alt] key becomes a combination[Ctrl][Alt] keystroke, and may be labeled[AltGr].

160


Important: Many non-US layoutsincorporate an additional key not availableon the 101 layouts. In almost all cases, therecommended and supported layout is the104 layout for any non-US selection. Insome cases, only the 104 layout has beenupdated.

Additional Keyboard Notes:

Note: Some layouts date back to Windows3.1/Windows 95. These layouts arelabeled "(old)". For later releases ofWindows, these layouts may not matchchanges to the current keyboard layouts inWindows. Some layouts may only operatecorrectly under Windows 95/98 - refer tothe layouts available in your version ofWindows to select which layout to use inMy-T-Pen.

161


The old layouts are included as areference & reminder that keyboardlayouts are not as consistent as one mightbelieve. Because manufacturers haveflexibility in keyboard layouts (e.g. look atdifferent laptop keyboards), constantchanges to the underlying operatingsystem, and there are no specificinternational standards that can be usedas a reference, a keyboard layout can onlybe viewed as snapshot in time. And for allwe know, these "old" layouts may one daybe useful again. Refer to Developer Kitutilities for further information on Keyboardlayouts, and refer to IMG’s Build-A-Boardfor full keyboard layout customizationcapabilities.

Asian layouts require fonts for the East Asianlanguages - on some versions of Windows,these are not installed automatically - refer to

162


Regional and Language options in ControlPanel for adding these supplemental files. Notethat the Asian languages may not be supportedat all in certain versions of Windows!

Some layouts are designed for operation in thelocalized versions of Windows. Arabic, Greek,Hebrew, Russian, & Central / Eastern Europeanlayouts may not correctly display all charactersif a different ANSI code page is in use.

Typical users operate with only 1 keyboardlayout, but it is possible to switch betweenactive layouts for various applications inWindows. To automatically have My-T-Pensynchronize with changes to the active layoutin Windows, refer to the KeyboardSync utilityin the Developer’s Kit.

Select Custom Build-A-Board Layouts

163


There are a few sample, custom Build-A-BoardLayouts available. Additional Build-A-Boardlayouts can be created, and when placed in theInstallation Folder will be added to this list.When selected, the KEYBOARD.KBF in theusers configuration folder is replaced with theselected layout. When My-T-Pen is run, thelayout is recognized, and the Build-A-Boardcompatible run-time (MYTSOFT2.EXE) isused to operate with the version 2.x keyboardlayouts.

164


Keyboard Layouts &WindowsWindows has various Regional & KeyboardLayout settings, and these are best managedwithin the Windows Control panel. Changingthe Keyboard in My-T-Pen only affectsMy-T-Pen. Proper operation of the selectedlayout may depend on the version of Windows,your current Keyboard Layout, and Regional(International) settings.

If you wish to change the physical keyboardlayout used by Windows, you must changeyour Windows driver from the WindowsControl Panel (available in KeyboardProperties, Layout). You may be required tohave your Windows CD (or originalinstallation media) when loading a previouslyunused keyboard layout.

For proper font display & typing, you may165


need to set Regional Settings (available inRegional Settings).

NOTES:

When an International keyboard is selected,My-T-Pen offers the option to run the WindowsControl Panel.

On some International layouts, the right [Alt]key becomes a combination [Ctrl][Alt]keystroke, and may be labeled [AltGr].

My-T-Pen keyboard layouts include thecharacters displayed on My-T-Pen and thelow-level keyboard scancodes (scancodes arethe hardware level information about whichkey was pressed). Most keyboard layouts aresimilar, but if you experience improper displayor incorrectly typed characters, you must verifythe My-T-Pen layout, Windows KeyboardProperties, and Windows Regional Settings.

Font character set, AltGr handling, and the166


Lowercase display setting are automaticallyupdated when required for keyboard layoutsselected through My-T-Pen Setup. Refer toAdvanced Notes on Keyboard Layouts foradditional documentation.

Font & Character set issues can be referencedin Fonts.

Advanced Notes onKeyboard LayoutsKeyboard Layouts & Specific Notes

Notes:

The keyboard language/layout must bechanged for the keyboard to type correctlybased on the Windows Keyboard Layout,Windows Regional settings, and the displayedLayout.

167


Most users operate on one version of Windows,and are used to one keyboard layout. Afterselecting the layout when they first configureMy-T-Pen, they may never return to theKeyboard Layout selection again. This is whatthe objective was for the design & approach tohandling keyboard layouts in My-T-Pen.Changing the keyboard layout in My-T-Penonly affect My-T-Pen’s display & operation. Tosynchronize the display and operation withWindows, both My-T-Pen and Windows mustbe set to the same layout.

During the various updates in Windowsversions, keyboard layouts have changed. Keyshave been moved/added, internal scan codeschanged, etc. It is important to note there is nostandards body that determines what aparticular keyboard layout should be.Technically, it is left up to the manufacturer todetermine the physical keyboard layout (e.g.

168


look at different keyboard layouts onlaptops/notebooks/desktops). Microsoft mustsupport these different hardwareimplementations, and also is involved in layoutmodifications (e.g. adding keys, such as theWindows Key). The end result is that thekeyboard layout files must be viewed asdynamic and may be different between oneversion of Windows and the next. If youexperience a problem with a layout, pleasecontact technical support, or refer to ourDeveloper’s Corner(http://www.imgpresents.com/imgdev.htm) foroptions available.

Regional Settings (Refer to notes below)

Optional = the Regional Settings doesn’t haveto change for showing the correct labels.

Suggested = the Regional Settings has tochange for showing the correct labels

169


Char Set numbers has to be changed inMy-T-Pen to matching keyboardlanguage/layout.

There are several settings that take affect whenthe keyboard is selected through My-T-PenSetup. The appropriate character set isautomatically selected, the status of whether ornot the software should handle the AltGrkeystroke is set, and the setting for whether ornot the Lowercase display is allowed on thekeyboard panel is set for some layouts.Because of display issues, these settings havebeen pre-set for various layouts. Refer toAdvanced User notes and the setting forKeyboardUpdate (in initialization filedescription), and see manual setting below foradditional details on the actual implementation.

In some cases, the logic behind theupper/lowercase display causes minor displayissues with certain layouts - these issues are

170


documented under the layout.

Arabic

Char Set = 178

Belarusian

Regional Settings = Belarusian (Suggested)

Keyboard Language/Layout =Belarusian/Belarusian

Char Set = 204

Bulgarian

Regional Settings = Bulgarian (Suggested)

Keyboard Language/Layout =Bulgarian/Bulgarian

Char Set = 204

Bulgarian (Latin)

Regional Settings = Bulgarian (Suggested)

171


Keyboard Language/Layout =Bulgarian/Bulgarian (Latin)

Char Set = 204

Croatian

Regional Settings = Croatian (Suggested)

Keyboard Language/Layout =Croatian/Croatian

Char Set = 238

Czech (Qwerty)

Regional Settings = Czech (Suggested)

Keyboard Language/Layout = Czech/Czech(Qwerty)

Char Set = 238

Czech

Regional Settings = Czech (Suggested)

Keyboard Language/Layout = Czech/Czech

172


Char Set = 238

Estonian (Code Page might not be fullysupported by some version of Windows)

Regional Settings = Estonian (Optional)

Keyboard Language/Layout =Estonian/Estonian

Char Set = 186

Suggested Font: MS Sans Serif

Greek

Regional Settings = Greek (Suggested)

Keyboard Language/Layout = Greek/Greek

Char Set = 161

Hebrew

Char Set = 177

Hungarian

Regional Settings = Hungarian (Optional)173


Keyboard Language/Layout =Hungarian/Hungarian

Char Set = 238

Irish

Regional Settings = English (Ireland)(Optional)

Keyboard Language/Layout = English(Ireland)/Irish

Char Set = 0

Korean

Regional Settings = Korean

Keyboard Language/Layout = Korean (IME)

Char Set = 129

On the 104 layout, the key above the enter andnext to the right-shift appear the same. Thecorrect letter is displayed in Windows Vista,but not in Windows XP. The 2 keys generate

174


different virtual keys (220 & 226), but bothgenerate the same character.

Latvian (Latin) (Code Page might not befully supported by some version ofWindows)

Regional Settings = Latvian (Optional)

Keyboard Language/Layout = Latvian/Latvian(Latin)

Char Set = 186

Latvian (Code Page might not be fullysupported by some version of Windows)

Regional Settings = Latvian (Optional)

Keyboard Language/Layout = Latvian/Latvian

Char Set = 186

Polish

Regional Settings = Polish (Optional)

Keyboard Language/Layout = Polish/Polish175


Char Set = 238

Polish Programmer

Regional Settings = Polish (Optional)

Keyboard Language/Layout = Polish/Polish

Char Set = 238

Romanian

Regional Settings = Romanian (Suggested)

Keyboard Language/Layout =Romanian/Romanian

Char Set = 238

Russian

Regional Settings = Russian (Suggested)

Keyboard Language/Layout = Russian/Russian

Char Set = 204

Slovak

176


Regional Settings = Slovak (Suggested)

Keyboard Language/Layout = Slovak/Slovak

Char Set = 238

Slovak (Qwerty)

Regional Settings = Slovak (Suggested)

Keyboard Language/Layout = Slovak/Slovak(Qwerty)

Char Set = 238

Turkish (F Type)

Regional Settings = Turkish (Optional)

Keyboard Language/Layout = Turkish/Turkish(F type)

Char Set = 162

Turkish (Q Type)

Regional Settings = Turkish (Optional)

177


Keyboard Language/Layout = Turkish/Turkish(Q type)

Char Set = 162

HOW TO SETUP ADDITIONALKEYBOARD LAYOUTS MANUALLY

Make sure the My-T-Pen keyboard is closedduring these steps!

Step 1) Copy All (or the appropriate)KYBD????.KMF file to the My-T-PenInstallation folder

\Program Files\MYTPEN

Step 2) Modify the MYTPEN.INI file

Important: Refer to the ConfigPath entryin the Initialization file to determine whichMYTPEN.INI file is the correct file tomodify!

178


- My-T-Pen Setup | Configuration | SpecialOptions | Edit Initialization File

- Find the Keyboard=? setting in the[Configuration] section (top of file)

- Change to the appropriate numberedkeyboard layout

Layout Numbers

The values 1-96, and 101-196, and any 200+entries listed are valid, and are related asfollows:

01 = U.S. Standard, 02 = U.S. DvorakStandard, 03 = U.S. Dvorak Left-Handed, 04 =U.S. Dvorak Right-Handed, 05 = U.S.My-T-Easy (ABC) Alphabetic Keyboard, 06 =Belgian (comma), 07 = British, 08 = CanadianMulti-lingual, 09 = Danish, 10 = Dutch, 11 =Finnish, 12 = French, 13 = French Canadian,14 = German, 15 = Icelandic, 16 = Italian, 17 =Latin American, 18 = Norwegian, 19 =

179


Portuguese, 20 = Spanish, 21 = Swedish, 22 =Swiss French, 23 = Swiss German, 24 = U.S.International, 25 = Hungarian (Old), 26 =Belgian (period), 27 = Arabic, 28 = Belarusian,29 = Bulgarian, 30 = Bulgarian (Latin), 31 =Croatian, 32 = Czech (Old), 33 = Czech(Qwerty), 34 = Estonian, 35 = Greek, 36 =Hebrew, 37 = Hungarian, 38 = Irish, 39 =Latvian, 40 = Latvian (Latin), 41 = Polish(Old), 42 = Romanian, 43 = Russian (old), 44= Slovak, 45 = Slovak (Qwerty), 46 = Turkish(F type), 47 = Turkish (Q type), 48 = Spanish(Mexico), 49 = U.S. Fazekas, 50 = U.S.Chubon, 51 = Slovenian, 52=Japanese, 53 =Chinese, 54 = Korean, 55 = French (Belgian),56 = French (Luxembourg), 57 = German(Austrian), 58 = German (Leichtenstein), 59 =German (Luxembourg), 60 = Spanish(Argentina), 61 = Spanish (Bolivia), 62 =Spanish (Chile), 63 = Spanish (Columbia), 64= Spanish (Costa Rica), 65 = Spanish

180


(Dominican Republic), 66 = Spanish(Ecuador), 67 = Dutch (Belgian), 68 = Dutch(Netherlands), 69 = Italian (Switzerland), 70 =Norwegian (Bokmal), 71 = Portuguese(Brazilian), 72 = Spanish (Guatemala), 73 =Spanish (El Salvador), 74 = Spanish(Honduras), 75 = Spanish (Modern Sort), 76 =Spanish (Nicaragua), 77 = Spanish (Panama),78 = Spanish (Paraguay), 79 = Spanish (Peru),80 = Spanish (Puerto Rico), 81 = Spanish(Uruguay), 82 = Spanish (Venezuela), 83 =English (Australian), 84 = English (NewZealand), 85 = English (Jamaica), 86 = English(United Kingdom), 87 = Chinese (Cangjie), 88= Canadian Multilingual, 89 = Polish, 90 =Polish Programmer, 91 = Thai, 92 = U.S.Plum, 93 = Russian (Cyrillic), 94 = Danish(ABC), 95 = U.S. (Numpad Enter), 96 =Czech, 97 = Belgian (period), 101-197 are the104 key layouts matching the above, 200 = 104British (1st alternate), 201 = 104 British (2nd

181


alternate), 202 = 104 Hebrew (Alt.), 203 = 104Chinese (Zhuyin) (Alt.), 204 = 104 Arabic(Alt.)

- Save the file

Step 3) Change the Font / Character Set

- My-T-Pen Setup | Configuration | Fonts

- See above for character set numbers

Step 4) Verify Windows Keyboard Layout &Regional Settings

Step 5) Close My-T-Pen Setup, run My-T-Pen

182


Build-A-Macro

Click on the Build-A-Macro Button.

My-T-Pen lets you create your own Macros towork within Windows and DOS in a Window.

183


In My-T-Pen, a Macro is a sequence ofkeystrokes or actions tied to a button. TheMacro is initiated by selecting the button.

A virtually unlimited number of user-definedpanels can be created. Each panel can groupkeys that support actions such as: Applicationmacros, Commands, Keystroke sequences,names, addresses, pre-defined paragraphs,letters, and even launch Programs.

Click on the Select Macro Panel Pull-downbox to choose an existing panel.

Click on Add A Panel to add a new panel.

Click on Delete Panel to delete the currentpanel.

Click on Document Panel to createdocumentation for the selected panel.

Click on Document All Panels to createdocumentation for all Macro Panels.

184


The selected Macro Panel is displayed on theright. Click on the top button to modifyfeatures & properties of the Macro Panel, andclick on any button to create / edit the Macrotriggered by that button. The Main MacroPanel cannot be deleted, however all of its keysmay be changed (except the panel (top) key).

Advanced Notes: The panels includedhave been setup with various options tohelp illustrate the functions available. Theymay be changed or deleted as you desire.When running My-T-Pen, clicking the toppanel of the Main Macro panel will openMy-T-Pen Setup and go directly toBuild-A-Macro. This is useful for fastmacro panel / button changes. MacroPanels may be nested up to ten levels.Clicking on the top button of a nestedpanel will return to the previous panel,which is a shortcut for advanced users. Ingeneral, it is better to use a button to

185


indicate the panel to open.

Limitations

There is an upper limit of 2000 charactersmaintained by the Build-A-Macro section ofMy-T-Pen. This amount was arbitrarilyselected as enough keystrokes to do just aboutany kind of task. Note that one character canresult in as many as 10 keystrokes beingrequired to generate the character via theselected active keyboard layout in Windows.Therefore it is possible that a large amount oftext may overflow the 32000 bytes reserved forthese macros (i.e. 3 bytes per keystroke x 10keystrokes x 1000 characters). If these limitsare reached during macro operation, thefollowing issues may be relevant:

186


• Not all characters may be generated from thesaved Macro

• The Shift, Alt, and Ctrl keys may be in anundefined state.

• Any additional keystrokes or macros maynot operate properly until the Shift, Alt &Ctrl keys are synchronized to the system.

• Only characters not represented by the activekeyboard layout require may push theselimits - either limit the macro character sizeto under 500 characters, or select a moreappropriate keyboard layout for thecharacters required.

Steps to create a new Macro panel and insert anew Macro.

Click on Add a Panel.

In the new dialog box, add a 5 characteridentifier, for example Word.

187


In the Macro Panel Description, enter someinformation for your own use, for exampleWord for Windows.


On the right side of the dialog box, a blankMacro panel will appear.

Click on the first button (top left corner).

A new dialog box opens. Here you define yourMacro Button.

First, enter a key label, for example Open.

Under Key Description [Quick Help], enterwhat you would like to appear in the quickhelp bar on top of My-T-Pen.

Under This Key will... select which option youwould like the button to perform.

In this case, you want to launch an application.

Click on Launch an Application.

188


If you do not know the correct path for yourapplication, find the applications executablefile by using the browse button.

Click on the OK Button.

Verify your action.

Steps to create a keystroke Macro.

• Press on the next empty button.

• Under key label, enter "PreVu".

• Under description, enter "Shows a PrintPreview".

• Click on Activate Keystroke Macro.

• Click on Zoom.

Here you will create your keystroke Macro.

• Use the up-and-down arrows to select theappropriate keystrokes.

189


• In this case, double-click on Alt-Down toinsert the keystroke (i.e. pressing the Altbutton down).

• Now, double-click on the letter F.

• Now, release the Alt button bydouble-clicking on Alt-Up.

• Finally, double-click on the letter v.

• This Macro will bring up the Print Previewwhile running MS Word!

• Click on the OK Button.

• Verify your action.

Information on AdvancedMacro Editing

When working with Macro Panels, there are

190


various advanced options available to managethe panels, including documenting every detailof the panel (or panels) as a text file.

Add-A-Macro Dialog Box

Macro Panel ID

Enter a five letter identifier for your new MacroPanel.

This identifier will appear on the top button oryour new Macro Panel.

191


Macro Panel Description

Enter a description for your new panel. Thisdescription will appear in the Quick Help barwhen activated.

Click on the OK Button to save the currentoptions.

Click on the CANCEL button to Close the &cancel the Add operation.

Once you have added a panel, it will beautomatically selected for editing.

192


Delete-A-Macro Dialog Box

Delete this Macro Panel?

The Macro panel named in the box belowMacro Panel ID will be deleted.

193


WarningUse with extremecaution. Once the panelis deleted, it cannot berecovered! Press theOK Button to Delete theSelected Macro Panel. Ifyou do not want todelete your panel, pressthe CANCEL button.

Note: You cannot delete the Main MacroPanel.

Document Macro Dialog

194


Box

The documentation will correspond to theselected Macro Panel.

Post to Clipboard

Click on this button to Post the PanelDocumentation onto the Windows Clipboard.You may then paste the textual informationinto any word processor, or other applicationthat uses text.

Save to File

This will open the File Save Dialog which willallow you to save the textual PanelDocumentation to a file & save the information

195


to disk.

Press the CANCEL button to Close the Dialog& cancel the documentation operation.

Document All MacrosDialog BoxThe documentation contains All Paneldocumentation for All Macro Panels.

Post to Clipboard

Click on this button to Post the All PanelDocumentation onto the Windows Clipboard.You may then paste the textual information

196


into any word processor, or other applicationthat uses text.

Save to File

This will open the File Save Dialog which willallow you to save All the textual PanelDocumentation to a file & save the informationto disk.

Press the CANCEL button to Close the Dialog& cancel the documentation operation.

Documentation File SaveDialog BoxYou may simply enter the name of the filename you wish to save in the File Name box onthe left, or select the file name from an existingfile in your system. Once you have entered orselected the name, click on the OK Button to

197


save the file. Press the CANCEL button toClose the Dialog & cancel the File Saveoperation.

Macro Key Dialog Box

Key Identifiers

Enter a key label. This label will appear on thekey in the Macro Panel. Enter a key

198


description. The key description will appear inthe Quick Help bar.

This key will...

Activate Keystroke Macro

Click on this Radio-Button if you want tocreate a Macro consisting of keystrokes. Usethe edit box below (Keystroke Macro) to enteryour Macro, or press Zoom to use the MacroEditor. You may use any Windows supportedANSI characters.

Note: As keys are entered, characters aretreated as both the press and releaseevents. Case is preserved, and Caps Lockis assumed OFF when playing back themacro. Therefore, using lowercasecharacters is preferred. If a Keystrokemacro is initiated with the Caps Lock on,then the Macro WILL be affected and theend-result may not be as originally

199


intended!

Open Macro Panel

Click on this Radio-Button if you want to openanother panel. Enter the Macro name in theedit box below (Macro Panel), or press Selectto select an existing Macro Panel.

Launch Application

Click on this Radio-Button if you want toassign an application to your Macro button.Enter the application name and path in the editbox below (Application), or press Browse toselect an application. You may also enter aWorking Directory, which will be the currentdirectory used by the Application once it islaunched. Short file names are used formaximum compatibility.

User Notes / Details200


You may enter helpful information, notes, ordetails regarding the settings for this key. Thisis used only for reference and will appear onthe Panel Documentation.

Cut, Copy, Paste, Undo

These shortcut keys may be used to manipulatethe text. This may help you enter information& interact with other Windows applications.

Copy Key, Paste Key, Clear Key

These shortcut keys may be used to manipulate& operate within My-T-Pen Setup / Macro KeyEditing. For example, you could Copy Keyinformation from an existing panel to be pastedinto another Macro Panel.


Click on the CANCEL button to Close theDialog & cancel any changes.

201


Macro Panel Dialog Box

When you click on the top button of a MacroPanel in My-T-Pen Setup, you may edit thePanel settings for the current Macro Panel.

Panel Label

Enter a panel label. This label will appear onthe top key in the Macro Panel.

Enter a panel description. The panel

202


description will appear in the Quick Help bar,if it is open.

This panel will...

Open

Click on this Radio-Button if you want to openthis Macro Panel. This means no additionalaction will occur when the panel is opened.

Open and launch Application

Click on this Radio-Button if you want toassign an application to this Macro Panel.Enter the application name and path in the editbox below (Application), or press Browse toselect an application. You may also enter aWorking Directory that will become thecurrent directory when the Application islaunched. When accessed, the panel will open& then automatically launch the application.

Open When Window Active

203


Click on this Radio-Button if you want yourMacro Panel to be open as soon as theapplication is opened. Enter the applicationname in the edit box below Window Name, orpress Select to choose from currently activewindows. You MUST take the Window namefrom the caption bar of your application. ItMUST appear exactly as on the caption bar.For example, the caption bar title for this helpfile is "Macro Panel Dialog Box". The nameentered should not have information includinga current file name, or open document. Youmay also shorten the name to provideadditional functionality. For example, if youenter the name as "Word", the Macro Panelwill automatically enter when the MicrosoftWord, WordPad, or WordPerfect is active.

Note: Because of the system memoryrequired for this operation and constantmonitoring, it will affect the system speed!

204


User Notes / Details

You may enter helpful information, notes, ordetails regarding the settings for this panel.This is only used for reference and to appearon the Panel Documentation.

Cut, Copy, Paste, Undo

These shortcut keys may be used to manipulatethe text. This may help you enter information& interact with other Windows applications.

Copy Panel, Paste Panel, Clear Panel

These shortcut keys may be used to manipulate& operate within My-T-Pen Setup / PanelEditing. For example, you could Copy Panelinformation from an existing panel to be pastedinto a newly created panel.


205


Click on the CANCEL button to Close theDialog & cancel any changes.

Macro Zoom Dialog Box

Key Label

Key label will show which button is currentlyedited.

Key Description

206


Enter a detailed description (will appear onQuick Help).

In order to create a keystroke Macro followthese steps:

There are six vertical selection lists in thebottom left corner of the dialog box. Select &double-click to add to the Keystroke Macro.

• Use the up-and-down arrows to select theappropriate keystrokes, then double-click toenter into the Keystroke Macro.

• For example, double-click on Alt-Down tosimulate pressing the Alt button down.

• Now, double-click on the letter F.

• Now, release the Alt button bydouble-clicking on Alt-Up.

• Finally, double-click on the letter v.

207


• This Macro [Alt-Down]f[Alt-Up]v willbring up the Print Preview while runningMS Word!

You may edit the Keystroke Macro directly inthe Edit window. You may wish to refer to theAdvanced User Notes for options & detailsregarding the keystroke macros.

Reserved words in brackets [ ] will onlyfunction properly when typed exactly! Theymay be used to indicate combinationkeystrokes. For example, to execute Ctrl-S itmust appear as [Ctrl-Down]s[Ctrl-Up]. Thisallows you to execute more than one characterwith the combination key depressed.

NOTE: For proper operation, you must haveEVERY keystroke required! (Don’t forget[Enter]) If the macro does not operate asdesired, review & verify that each keystrokeand the sequence of keystrokes is accurate.Also make sure that the correct Application is

208


Active when the Macro is initiated.

There are seven buttons with standard editingoptions:

CUT - Cuts the highlighted portion of a Macro.

COPY - Copies the highlighted portion of aMacro.

PASTE - Pastes the highlighted portion of aMacro (must be preceded by a CUT or COPY).

DELETE - Deletes the highlighted portion of aMacro. (UNDO will not recover!)

UNDO - Undoes the previous operation (like aCUT OR DELETE).

SELECT ALL - Selects the whole Macro.

OPTIONS - Changes to a different set of sevenediting buttons.

There are seven buttons with advanced editingoptions (Useful if you are pasting in text from

209


other applications):

CLEAR ALL - Clears the editing Window,even if nothing is highlighted. (Erases theentire macro).

CR - Changes carriage returns to [Enter].(ANSI character 13)

CRLF - Changes carriage return-line feed to[Enter}. (ANSI characters 13 10)

TAB - Changes tab to [Tab]. (ANSI character9)

STRIP - Strips all ANSI characters. (Removesall non-ANSI characters from text)

ALL - Does all of the above (CRLF, TAB,STRIP)

EDITING - Returns to the previous sevenbuttons.

The Open and Save buttons are available asconveniences for developers using the

210


MACROBAT and other IMG utilities. Thesewill use the Zoom Edit screen as an the Editingarea - Open will open, read, and place thecontents of a previously Saved Macro into theZoom Edit area. The KMF (Keyboard MacroFile) format is used.

The special selections [Time], [Date], and[Pause] can be used as follows: [Time] and[Date] insert the current system time asformatted via the System Information panel(formatted as set in the Windows RegionalSettings).

[Pause] inserts an "empty" keystroke in thesequence of keystrokes. This is a special optionalong with other specialty macros otherwiseundocumented.


Click on the CANCEL button to Close the

211


Dialog & cancel any changes.

Macro Select Dialog Box

Use the up-and-down arrows or your Mouse toselect one of the existing Macro panels.

Press Enter, or click on OK Button.

Click on the CANCEL button to Close theDialog & cancel any selection.

212


Active Window Dialog Box

This list shows all of the current activewindows running on your system. You mayselect the Window Name from the list. Youmay wish to modify the name to remove anyopen documents, or other information that maychange. My-T-Pen must have an exact match torecognize the need to automatically open theMacro Panel.

Once you have found the name double click onit or highlight your selection & click on the OKButton. Press the CANCEL button to Close the

213


Dialog & cancel the Select operation.

Browse Programs Dialog Box

This opens the My-T-Pen Browse that allowsyou to select from available programs on yoursystem. Short file names are used formaximum compatibility. Once you have foundthe name of the program to run double click onit or highlight your selection & click on theOpen Button Press the Cancel button to Closethe Dialog & cancel the Browse operation.

Configure your Mouse

214


Buttons

Click on the Mouse Buttons Button

Important: The term Mouse is used

215


generically for any pointing device thatmoves the cursor (mouse pointer) withinWindows. For Pen and Touchscreendrivers, often only 1 button is available(Left Button): In all cases, the Left Buttonshould be selected as the Action button.

My-T-Pen lets you define functions for all yourMouse buttons (2 or 3 button Mice). This canmake you work more efficiently by eliminatingfrequently used tasks and key combinations.

Select Mouse Button to use on My-T-PenHere you define which button on your Mouseis going to be used as a point-and-click button.This button will be the execution button.

Select Type of Mouse

If you have a two-button Mouse, click on2-Button Mouse. If you have a three-buttonMouse, click on 3-Button Mouse.

216


Note: If you have a three button Mouse,be sure that you are loading the correctdriver. If you are loading a two-buttonMouse driver with a three-button Mouse,you will not be able to use the middlebutton. Go to Windows Control Panel |Mouse to install a different Mouse driver.

Mouse Button Action Pull-down Boxes Inorder to assign a different function to theMy-T-Pen Mouse buttons, do the followingsteps:

1. Click on the down-arrow of the 1stPull-down box.

2. Use the scroll-bar to scroll up and downwithin the Pull-down box.

3. Select a function by clicking on its name.

4. Press the OK Button.217


5. Repeat the steps 1-4 on the 2nd Pull-downbox.


7. If you do not want to change the currentMouse buttons setup, press the CANCELbutton.

This functionality is only available while yourMouse pointer is over My-T-Pen.

Some of these actions are:

1. Ignore the button press (no reaction at all)

2. Move My-T-Pen around the screen (clickand drag)

3. Look Thru My-T-Pen (while holding thebutton down you will be able to see thescreen behind My-T-Pen)

4. Open the My-T-Pen Menu

5. Minimize My-T-Pen218


6. Choose from a list of single orcombination keystrokes, such as [Enter],[F1], [Alt-F4], etc.

Select the Cursor and Icon

Click on the Cursors & Icons Button

219


My-T-Pen enables you to select differentCursors and different Icons for use withMy-T-Pen.

Cursors

There are 12 Cursors available; 4 right-handed,4 left handed Cursors, and 4 specialty Cursors.They are on the right side, titled "Cursors". Inorder to select a Cursor, do the following steps:

1. Click on one of the 12 cursor pictures; itwill be framed by a black rectangle.

2. Press the OK Button.220


3. If you do not want to change the currentlayout, press the CANCEL button.

Note: For Touchscreen & Pen basedsystems, the "Blank" or "Invisible" cursorshould be used if other applications do notshow a cursor when in use. Otherwise,select the most appropriate cursor fromthose available.

Icons

There are 3 Icons available. They are on theleft side titled "Icons". In order to select anIcon, do the following steps:

1. Click on one of the 3 Icon pictures; it willbe framed by a black rectangle.

2. Press the OK.Button.

221


3. If you do not want to change the currentlayout, press the CANCEL button.

Note: The Icon is only used for theMinimize to Icon option in Configuration.

Exit My-T-Pen

Click on the Exit Button

222


This will exit My-T-Pen Setup and Close theMy-T-Pen Setup Window.

223

Chapter 6. My-T-PenLogon Utilities

My-T-Pen Logon UtilitiesOverview

The My-T-Pen Logon Utilities enable completeoperation from a pointing device, allowingsecure logons to network & workstations viathe on-screen keyboard interface. Because offundamental differences in operation andsecurity between the Windows 2000/XP andWindows Vista platforms, please refer to theappropriate sections when referencing theLogon Utilities. For support on Windows95/98/Me & Windows NT, please refer toversion 1.77 or earlier.

224

Chapter 6. My-T-Pen Logon Utilities

Important Notes

• The proper configuration andimplementation of this utility requires a userwith Administrator rights

• Proper licensing is required or the Logonmodule will revert to a demonstration andeventually disable itself

• All configuration should be done via theMy-T-Pen Logon Utilities programaccessible from the Program Menu forMy-T-Pen

• In Windows Vista, Microsoft completelychanged the approach used for Logon, andno longer supports the GINA interface usedfor 2000 / XP. Refer to the My-T-Pen LogonUtilities for Windows Vista below.

225


My-T-Pen Logon Utilities for2000 / XP

The My-T-Pen Logon Utilities for Windows2000 / XP have been provided to enable theimplementation of Pen and Touchscreensystems without the need for a physicalkeyboard. Because the default name/passwordlogon options for Windows 2000 / XP requireda Ctrl-Alt-Delete keystroke combination, Penand Touch systems still had to resort to aphysical keyboard if a secure logon wasrequired. Now with the My-T-Pen KeyboardLogon Utility, a secure logon can beaccomplished without the need of a physicalkeyboard.

In addition, the Automatic Logon option hasalso been incorporated as a convenience withinthis utility, allowing a fixed user/passwordcombination to start up Windows 2000 / XP

226


without any user interaction required.

There are 2 options available - the originalLogon Utilities for Windows NT, andMy-T-Soft 2 (for Windows 2000 and WindowsXP)

To address changes in Windows 2000 & XP,and to allow customized layouts of the logonkeyboard, the My-T-Soft 2 approach enablesthe use of a My-T-Soft 2 keyboard during thesecure logon sequence. The keyboard can bemodified with IMG’s "Build-A-Board".Advanced notes below refer only to theIMGLOGON.DLL approach - when using theIMGGINA2.DLL (My-T-Soft 2 option), theinterface, user shell creation, and all logoncapabilities are handled by the defaultMSGINA.DLL (Microsoft GINA) (or otherselected GINA DLL).

There are various features available within theLogon Utilties:

227


• Display Domain/User option for LockedWorkstation (Security feature)

• Remember Domain/User for Terminals(Security feature)

• Do not display key-down press (Securityfeature)

• Key-Press hover (dwell) (Accessibilityfeature)

• Disable Screen Saver Action (when notlogged in) (Display feature)

• Options to select display dialog or override(Display features)

• 3D or Plain keys (Display feature)

• Software interface to create a SAS (SecureAttention Sequence) (i.e. emulate theCtrl-Alt-Del) (Developer feature)

To reference configuration & setup for the 2000/ XP Logon options, see Configure Secure

228


Logon Utility or Configure Automatic Logon.

Configure Secure LogonUtility (Windows 2000/XP)

• Open My-T-Pen Logon Utilities from StartMenu | (All) Programs | My-T-Pen

• Select Setup / Configure Logon Utility

When Enable Keyboard Logon is checked"On" then the standard 2000 / XP logon isdisabled, and 2 options are available:

• Large Keyboard Dialog (Windows NT)

• My-T-Soft 2 Keyboard (Windows 2000 andlater)

When Enable Onscreen Keyboard Logon ischecked "Off" then the standard 2000 / XP

229


logon is used, and the My-T-Pen Logon Utilityis disabled.

Important: This section is split into 2areas based on which logon option isused. The recommended My-T-Soft 2option is listed first. For Windows Vista -see My-T-Pen Logon Utilites for WindowsVista

Important: The Large Keyboard Dialog(Windows NT) secure logon approach willstill operate in Windows 2000 / XP, butsupport for newer facilities such as ActiveDirectory, Group Policies, etc. may not bemanaged properly. Only the My-T-Soft 2option is supported and recommended forWindows 2000 / XP. If the Large KeyboardDialog is enabled, the Opening Logonscreen will simply have a Logon button,which can be pressed with any Pen,

230


Touch, or pointing device, and theKeyboard will be displayed on the logondialog along with the User Name,Password, and Domain fields.

My-T-Soft 2 Keyboard

231


(Windows 2000 and later)

There are 3 sections available

• Remove Ctrl-Alt-Del logon, use OnscreenKeyboard for data entry

• Logon Options

• Display Options

232


Remove Ctrl-Alt-Del logon, use OnscreenKeyboard for data entry

If My-T-Soft 2 Keyboard (Windows 2000 andlater) is selected, the default logon options areused, but the My-T-Soft (version 2) keyboard isdisplayed within the secure logon screens.Support for Ctrl-Alt-Del is offered with aone-touch button (shown as "Ctrl-Alt-Del" or"Logon"), and a full alphabetic keyboard isdisplayed. The keyboard layout may bemodified with IMG’s "Build-A-Board." Seebelow for options specific to the My-T-Soft 2Keyboard.

My-T-Soft 2 Keyboard options

There are 2 approaches available whenMy-T-Soft 2 is selected for displaying thekeyboard layout (i.e. what the user sees).My-T-Soft 2 is the next generation of thepopular My-T-Pen keyboards, and has a moreflexible approach to designing and operating

233


keyboard layouts. To address customers whowant customized and specialized layouts,My-T-Soft 2 can read Build-A-Board layoutsalong with Original KBF files (layouts forMy-T-Mouse, My-T-Touch, My-T-Pen,My-T-Soft and OnScreen).

There are 3 generic Build-A-Board layoutsprovided - Small Keyboard, MediumKeyboard, and Large Keyboard. Smallworks well for pen system and Large is betterfor touchscreens & fingers, but the actualresolution of the display will determine thebest choice.

There are also 2 options available for dealingwith Original layouts (NOTE: These layoutsonly display the alphabetic portion of thekeyboard). Select Default 101, Currentlanguage to use a preset standard 101keyboard configuration with the currentlyselected language/layout in

234


My-T-Soft/My-T-Touch/My-T-Pen. If you needa different size, you have the option ofselecting Copy of Current Layout to copy thecurrent saved layout. This current saved layoutis the KEYBOARD.KBF in the installationdirectory. To update the layout, runMy-T-Pen/My-T-Touch/My-T-Soft, select adifferent size, then open the menu(middle-button of tool bar), and select CurrentSettings | Save Current Settings. Run theLogon Utilities, and select Copy of CurrentLayout, then click OK (this will copy theKEYBOARD.KBF into the LOGON folder).

Technical Notes

The My-T-Soft 2 option for the Logon portionof Windows 2000 / XP uses MTS2.EXE, aspecial build of My-T-Soft 2 for this usage.The layout displayed by My-T-Soft 2 is theKEYBOARD.KBF file in the LOGON folderunder the installation directory. The above

235


options in the Logon Utilities handle thismanipulation for you. If you useBuild-A-Board to create your own layout, youwill want to copy your "built" layout into theLOGON folder, AFTER selecting theMy-T-Soft 2 option in the Logon Utilities.Note that if you re-run the Logon Utilities, andclick OK on the Setup/Configuration screen,your "built" layout will be copied over! Forreference, or if you want to take over thepre-built layouts, this lists the file names andtheir associated selection in the LogonUtilities:

Small Keyboard =LOGON\KEYBOARD.SML =>LOGON\KEYBOARD.KBF

Medium Keyboard =LOGON\KEYBOARD.MED =>LOGON\KEYBOARD.KBF

Large Keyboard =236


LOGON\KEYBOARD.LRG =>LOGON\KEYBOARD.KBF

Default 101 = LOGON\KEYBOARD.ORG =>LOGON\KEYBOARD.KBF

Copy of Current Layout = KEYBOARD.KBF=> LOGON\KEYBOARD.KBF

Note: ConfigPath changes - The Settingof ConfigPath in the Initialization file canchange where the Copy of Current Layoutuses when copying the "current" layout.This is based on the ConfigPath settingand the current user. In general, thedefault, and any ConfigPath setting otherthan ConfigPath=0 will result in copyingthe current user’s layout and INI into theInstallation Folder. This will also have aresult of creating a new "default" layout &configuration (e.g. KEYBOARD.KBF andINI file), which will consequently be usedfor any new users running the My-T-Soft

237


software on the desktop (assuming theydon’t already have a currentconfiguration). In other words, if the Copyof Current Layout is selected, from then onthe Logon layout AND the defaultMy-T-Pen layout will be this Current Layoutwhen ConfigPath is set to anything but 0.For further details on ConfigPath, see theInitialization File Documentation.

The Small Keyboard layout project(Build-A-Board 2.10) is included asKEYBOARD.ZIP in the LOGON folder. Thelarger layouts were simply resized & cleanedup with a larger font selected.

Older KBF/KMF support

My-T-Soft 2 can read & operate older (i.e.pre-version 2.00) layouts, and this approach isused for the "Original Layout" selections. Thisoption is included for 2 main reasons. 1) Easier

238


way to select different sizes, and 2) Matchselected keyboard layout in both Logon andDesktop operation. For example, if you have aDutch layout on your desktop, when one ofthese options is selected, the same layout (i.e.KMF) will be used for the Logon keyboard.

Note: There are some limitations with theMy-T-Soft 2 handling of older layouts:

The Shift-AltGr states require selectingShift, then AltGr.

Caps-Lock display always uses the Shiftlabel, and some keys may show anincorrect label vs. the character generatedby the keystroke.

The default font will not handle non-ANSIlayouts correctly.

Positioning

239


If you do not have Build-A-Board, and wish tochange the opening position of theSmall/Medium/Large Build-A-Board layouts,there is a basic utility calledKBFLOGON.EXE in the LOGON folder. Youcan access this by clicking on UpdateOpening Position (Build-A-Board Layouts).By running this utility, you can change theopening X / Y position of the current selectedBuild-A-Board layout to match your screenorientation & resolution.

Original layouts are treated differently, and arecentered horizontally and position at thebottom of the screen. The KBFLOGON.EXEwill not affect this positioning, and should notbe used for these layouts.

240


Logon Options

These are standard Windows 2000 / XP Logonoptions, included here as a convenience.

Note: The Logon Options differ betweenthe Large Keyboard Dialog and theMy-T-Soft 2 Keyboard

You may change the Default Domain Name.In general, this is the domain name from thelast successful logon. It is highly recommendedthat a proper and existing domain is used.

The Enable Shutdown without Logoncontrols the availability of the Shutdown buttonat the Name/password dialog. When Enabled,any user (whether authorized for logon or not)may Shutdown the system. To prevent thisopportunity, clear this checkbox.

241


The Do not Display Last User Name atLogon can change the default action of theLogon Name/Password dialog. By default, thename of the last successfully logged on user isdisplayed. By checking this option "On", theUser name will be cleared when presented tothe user, requiring the user to enter their logonname. Note that this setting (if On) willoverride the Auto Logon option.

The Replace Tablet PC Keyboard is onlyavailable when installed on Windows XPTablet PC Edition. When this option isenabled, the default keyboard will be hiddenwhen the My-T-Pen keyboard is displayed.When customized keyboard layouts are desiredor required, the My-T-Pen keyboards offergreater flexibility.

The Interface with default MicrosoftMSGINA.DLL is the preferred default option.For issues with Active Directory, Domain

242


Caching, Domain authentication, etc., thedefault logon interface provides the bestsupport for these advanced features.

For the following 2 options, please read theInterface Notes below

For Novell networks, the Interface withNovell NWGINA.DLL option provides anapproach to display the My-T-Pen keyboardsduring the Novell client logon screens. Whenusing their GINA as the authentication/logonscreen, you may select this option to enable theMy-T-Pen interface to the NWGINA.DLL

The Interface with: option enables the Editfield where any third-party GINA DLL filemay be entered. If the DLL is located in theWindows system area, entering just the nameof the DLL will operate correctly. If the file islocated in another folder, you must specifiy thefull path & file name. This must be a valid,Windows compatible GINA DLL.

243


Interface Notes: The 2 non-MSGINA.DLLoptions affect the system in a profoundway, and these options are only offered asa convenience for some customers whoare fully versed in all the intricacies ofWindows security & GINAs. It is importantto understand that these options mayaffect your ability to logon to your system.These options should only be enabled ona fully backed up & restorable system, andit is recommended it be tested on anon-critical system before using in anyessential systems.

The following outlines the interfaceimplementation:

When the 2 non-MSGINA.DLL options areselected, the registry entry GinaDLL inHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE/Software/Microsoft/WindowsNT/CurrentVersion/WinLogon is created. For

244


the NWGINA.DLL, the entry is set toNWGINA.DLL. For the Interface with: the textentered in the Edit field is saved in this registryvalue. The IMGGINA2.DLL looks at thisregistry entry at initialization. If the entryexists and has some text in it, then this is usedto "LoadLibrary" and check for properinterface functions to WinLogon & the GINA.If the GINA specified has all the appropriateinterface functions, the IMGGINA2.DLL willcontinue to load and provide the interface tothe specified DLL, and display the My-T-Penkeyboard during the logon screens.

The following items may be useful tocustomers testing these interfaces:

• By removing the GinaDLL value inHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE/Software/Microsoft/WindowsNT/CurrentVersion/WinLogon you revertback to the default MSGINA.DLL

245


• You should be an Administrator(Administrator Rights required)

• You may be able to get at the registry byusing F8 during startup, and run in SafeMode (command prompt / regedit, etc.)

• You may be able to get at the local machine’sregistry by using REGEDT32 from adomain controller or other windows server.

Display Options


The Legal Notice appears immediately beforethe Name/Password Logon dialog.

Enter a Legal Notice Caption - this is theCaption of the message box that appears as theLegal Notice regarding logon / system use.

Enter a Legal Notice Text - this is the text ofthe message box that appears as the Legal

246


Notice regarding logon / system use.

Large Keyboard Dialog

There are 3 sections available

• Remove Ctrl-Alt-Del logon, use OnscreenKeyboard for data entry

247


• Logon Options

• Display Options


When the Large Keyboard Dialog (WindowsNT) is selected, the Ctrl-Alt-Delete iscontrolled by the "One-touch" Logon. TheOpening Logon screen will simply have aLogon button, which can be pressed with anyPen, Touch, or pointing device, and theKeyboard will be displayed on the logon dialogalong with the User Name, Password, andDomain fields.

Important: The Large Keyboard Dialog(Windows NT) secure logon approach willstill operate in Windows 2000 / XP, butsupport for newer facilities such as ActiveDirectory, Group Policies, etc. may not bemanaged properly. Only the My-T-Soft 2

248


option is supported and recommended forWindows 2000 / XP. If the Large KeyboardDialog option is enabled, the OpeningLogon screen will simply have a Logonbutton, which can be pressed with anyPen, Touch, or pointing device, and theKeyboard will be displayed on the logondialog along with the User Name,Password, and Domain fields.

The Display Logo at Opening Logon Screenmay be checked "On" to display a companylogo, or clear (checked Off) to remove the logodisplay. By default, the logo is the IMG Logo -contact Innovation Management Group, Inc.for private label options.

Low-Resolution keys (not checked for 3Dkeys) enables low-resolution display whenchecked "On" - for systems that display 256colors or less, this provides a better visual

249


display.

When No Key-Down display is checked "On"the visual appearance of the key going down isdisabled. This is a security feature that removesthe visual feedback during operation as theuser enters the password.

Check Screen Height (not width) to chooseDialog "On" to use the screen height instead ofthe screen width to determine which dialog todisplay. For certain client software, sometimesthe screen height & width do not match thestandard VGA resolutions. This provides analternative to using the screen width & may bemore effective on some systems.

When Force Dialog Size is checked "On" theautomatic sensing of the screen resolution isdisabled, and the dialog displayed is selectedfrom the list regardless of screen resolution.This overrides the Screen Height (not width) tochoose Dialog option.

250


Logon Options


You may change the Default Domain Name.In general, this is the domain name from thelast successful logon. It is highly recommendedthat a proper and existing domain is used.

Remember Last Logged On User may bechecked "On" to track the last logon Domain /User Name for use when the Logon Dialog isshown again (after log off or restart). Thisautomatically fills in the User Name by savingthe last successfully logged on user and placingit in the user name field when the LogonDialog is initialized.

Remember Names (Terminal Serv. Only)may be checked "On" to track the last logonDomain / User Name at a particular clientworkstation. This is tied to the client (network)

251


name of the workstation, and the logon dialogwill display both the name and domain of theuser who last attempted a logon. Note that thisis done when "Ok" is pressed - theauthentication occurs after these values aresaved. This option is only enabled when runfrom a 2000 / XP server with TerminalServices available.

The Enable Shutdown without Logoncontrols the availability of the Shutdown buttonat the Name/password dialog. When Enabled,any user (whether authorized for logon or not)may Shutdown the system. To prevent thisopportunity, clear this checkbox.

The Do not Display Last User Name atLogon can change the default action of theLogon Name/Password dialog. By default, thename of the last successfully logged on user isdisplayed. By checking this option "On", theUser name will be cleared when presented to

252


the user, requiring the user to enter their logonname. Note that this setting (if On) willoverride the Auto Logon option. For TerminalServer usage, this option should be set on if theRemember Names option is clear.

Touch Logon to Begin First Display Delay(ms) can be used to set a user-defined timeperiod which delays the display of the "TouchLogon to Begin" dialog prior the touchscreendriver service being loaded. Since the speed atwhich 2000/XP loads is system dependent andcan vary widely and some touchscreen driversload as a service (e.g. ELO), it is possible forthe logon button to appear prior to being ableto "press" the button. Since this can annoy orconfuse users, this option was added to delaythe display of the button, allowing a sufficientdelay to ensure the touchscreen driver serviceis started. The setting is in milliseconds, so1000 means a 1 second delay, 55000 means a

253


55 second delay.

The Allow Drop-Down Domain List optionwhen checked "On" changes the Edit Text boxfor domain name within the logon dialog to adrop-down list showing all available domains.

The Enable Key-Press Hover (Dwell) featurewhen checked "On" creates a timer to select agenerate a down/up left-button press

The Advanced button will open someadvanced logon configuration options forspecial cases, such as network resources thatrequire different name/password combinations,and secure operator desktops. For additionalLogon Options available with the Advancedbutton, see Advanced Logon ConfigurationOptions.

Display Options


254


The Legal Notice appears immediately beforethe Name/Password Logon dialog.

Enter a Legal Notice Caption - this is theCaption of the message box that appears as theLegal Notice regarding logon / system use.

Enter a Legal Notice Text - this is the text ofthe message box that appears as the LegalNotice regarding logon / system use.

Display Domain/User in LockedWorkstation Dialog can be checked "On" toindicate at a Locked workstation which usercan unlock the workstation. If this is "Off"there is no indication displayed.

Disable Screen Saver Action may be checked"On" to disable the screen movement of the"Touch logon to begin " Dialog when idle forseveral minutes.

Notes:

255


• You must have Administrator Rights toupdate the system with any changes.

• The text buffer used for the legal caption &legal notice is 4096 characters

• In theHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE/Software/InnovationManagement Group/My-T-Soft/Logonsection, there is an override for the displayof "User Name:" at the logon dialog. Add anew "String Value" as "UserNameLabel"and enter the desired display text (e.g. "UserID:", "User #", "ID", etc.) - There is not asimilar override for Password or Domain.

• In theHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE/Software/InnovationManagement Group/My-T-Soft/Logonsection, there is an additional Hover optionto modify the delay used with the dwelloption. Add a new "String Value" as"HoverTenths" and enter a value (the default

256


is "10", or 10 tenths of a second, so thedefault dwell is 1 second). To create a longerdwell, enter a number greater than 10, for aquicker dwell, enter a number less than 10.

• In theHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE/Software/InnovationManagement Group/My-T-Soft/Logonsection, there is an additional option for theAutomatic Logon when using the KeyboardLogon. You may delay the Automatic Logonperiod for a few seconds to override thedefault action - select Cancel to stop theAuto Logon and bring up the normal logondialog. Add a new "String Value" as"DelayAutoLogon" and enter a value as adecimal number (e.g. "8000"). A non-zerovalue will display an OK/Cancel dialog forthe delay period (milliseconds - 8000 isabout 8 seconds). After the delay periodexpires, an Enter keystroke will be produced

257


to select the default OK. To bypass theautomatic logon, select Cancel prior to theend of the delay. To disable this bypass,remove the registry entry or set to 0. Thisdelay also uses the "HoverTenths" asdescribed above.

Advanced LogonConfiguration Options(Windows 2000/XP)

258


The Advanced Logon Options provides variousapproaches to address different situationscreated when using the Logon Utilities. Ingeneral, these should not be needed. If used,the following documents importantinformation regarding the settings if "EnableAdvanced Logon Options" is checked On.

These are 2 common reasons why theseAdvanced Options may be desired:

• There is a secondary password (or username/password) dialog that appears AFTERthe Keyboard Logon has successfully loggedon the user (e.g. a password for a LinuxServer with a mapped drive in NT 4.0)

• There is a Secure Operator Desktop used toseparate the regular user desktop from thedesktop to operate special software (e.g.DeltaV Process Automation systems).

259


When Enabled, the "Launch Keyboard duringUser Shell Activation" is automaticallyselected, regardless of any previous settings.

IMPORTANT NOTE: These are Advancedsettings, and some of the documentationreferences advanced Windows 2000/XParchitecture concepts & implementation. Ifyou are unfamiliar with the terms & detailslisted here, then you should contact yoursystem administrator before enablingthese options. The term "desktop" refersto user-input screens available in the2000/XP systems - the 3 commondesktops are WinLogon (where the"Ctrl-Alt-Del" to logon is presented, or theTouch Logon to Begin is presented whenthe Keyboard Logon is in use (also Lockedworkstation)), Screen-Saver (the screensaver display), and Default (or the normaluser desktop).

260


There are 4 areas enabled when the EnableAdvanced Logon Options is set on:

Launch Program - The Launch Programexecutable will usually be MYTPEN.EXE,MYTPEN.EXE, or MYTTOUCH.EXE. Fordisplay smoothness, the -NoSplash option canbe included (e.g. MYTPEN.EXE -NoSplash).The Drive/Path combination is includedautomatically, and it is derived from the samelocation as IMGLOGON.DLL - therefore, theMYTPEN.EXE must be in the same locationas IMGLOGON.DLL (this is the defaultinstallation setup). However, you cannotoverride the drive/path location, and specify adifferent location for the Launch Program.

The Launch Keyboard Prior to Logon (NotRecommended) option is included to provideaccess to the keyboard software in theWinLogon desktop. Since the Keyboard logonalready provides the necessary keyboard

261


functions, there is no special need to run the"regular" My-T-Pen / My-T-Touch / My-T-Penkeyboard executable. There are several reasonswhy this is not recommended: (1) Thiseffectively locks out the executable fromrunning in the regular (default) user desktop.(2) It provides no additional functionality. (3)After logon, the touchscreen/pen useressentially has no way to return to WinLogondesktop. The only reason why this option isavailable is to address the possibility wherekeyboard input is required in the WinLogondesktop. Currently we are not aware of anysituation that has not already been addressedby the Keyboard logon.

The Launch Keyboard during User ShellActivation option runs the Launch Programduring the User Shell activation after asuccessful logon of theuser-name/password/domain combination.

262


This guarantees that the keyboard executable isavailable during any additional passwordprompts (or other text input situations) createdby programs being loaded during this phase,but prior to the full user desktop display (&StartUp programs being executed). This is themost common situation where these AdvancedLogon Configuration Options are required.

The Launch Keyboard on SpecifiedDesktops option provides the ability to havethe keyboard executable available onalternative desktops. While this is not acommon approach, it can occur when secureoperator modes are required. To Enable thisaction, this option must be On, and theappropriate Desktop names must be listed. Inorder to make this option as flexible aspossible, additional configurations can belisted, so different desktops can have differentconfigurations (i.e. the "secure" desktop can

263


have the keyboard executable in an "Operator"configuration with keyboard only, while the"administrator" desktop can have a moreflexible configuration).

The following highlights importantinformation about this option

• There MUST be a desktop name listed whenthis option is On, otherwise there will be noway to run the Keyboard executable.

• This is a special operational mode, and"normal" operation should not be expectedwhen this option is enabled. For example, itthe "Default" desktop is not listed, and thedesktop is switched from the "Default", thenswitched back to the "Default", the keyboardwill be closed and will need to be launchedagain.

• There is no utility to ascertain different

264


desktop names - the Win32 API provides anEnumDesktops function that can be usedwith a Window Station, but it is highlyrecommended that the software vendor thatcreates the different desktops be contacted toobtain technical details on the desktop name,when the desktop is used, user rights withinthe desktop, and any additional informationthat may affect programs running within thenon-standard desktop.

• There is limited error-checking within theentered Desktop names, and it is highlyrecommended that the rules listed below areused.

Entering Desktop name(s) & optionalConfiguration Files name

• There MUST be a desktop name listed

• If there are multiple desktops, use a

265


semi-colon ( ; ) to separate - there is noupper limit, but no more than 5 arerecommended.

• If you wish special configurations within aparticular desktop, it is recommended thatEACH desktop listed contain its ownconfiguration

• The configuration is separated from thedesktop name with a comma ( , ) - thedesktop name and configuration cannotcontain commas or semi-colons!

• There should be no extra spaces within thistext entry for desktops, configurations, anddelimiters (commas & semi-colons).

• When the configuration is used, there MUSTbe 2 files for each configuration - an INI file,and a KBF file. These files must be in thesame folder as the keyboard executable /IMGLOGON.DLL. For example, if Config1

266


is the configuration name, then there must bea CONFIG1.KBF and a CONFIG1.INIlocated in the same folder as the keyboardexecutable.

Method for creating Configuration Files(My-T-Pen used as an example)

Configure the My-T-Pen keyboard executableas desired using My-T-Pen Setup, or thecontrol panel on My-T-Pen. Once the desiredsize, panels, and screen position are set up,select the Menu (middle button on Tool bar),and select Settings | Save Settings, thenPosition | Save Position. Now close My-T-Pen.(Note: Developer Kit utilities may also be used- see Developer’s Kit for more details) UsingWindows Explorer or a command prompt,from the My-T-Pen installation folder (default\Program Files\MYTPEN), copy theKEYBOARD.KBF file to CONFIG1.KBF andcopy the MYTPEN.INI file to CONFIG1.INI.

267


(for My-T-Touch use MYTTOUCH.INI, forMy-T-Pen use MYTPEN.INI). Repeat foradditional configurations, being sure to use adifferent name (e.g. CONFIG2, CONFIG3,etc.)

Operation Notes

When this option is in use, there are someoperational issues to be aware of. Thekeyboard executable can be running in only 1desktop at a time, so when the desktop isswitched, the keyboard must first be closedwithin the previous desktop, and then restartedin the newly displayed desktop. This is thereason for the "-NoSplash" option within the"Launch Program" (to prevent opening splashscreen), and this also will cause a slight delayafter the desktop switch prior to display of thekeyboard (Note: this is still the case even ifdifferent configurations are not in use).

Implementation Notes (Advanced)268


When "Launch Keyboard on SpecifiedDesktops" is enabled, a separate thread (Win32process thread of execution) is used to monitorfor different desktops & marshal the keyboardexecutable to ensure it is only running in onedesktop. While on the same desktop, no furtherprocessing occurs. When the desktop isswitched, a sequence is started to close thekeyboard executable, verify the keyboardexecutable is closed, then launch theappropriate configuration for the desktop(s)listed in the Desktop name(s) & optionalConfiguration files name. If there is noconfiguration, then the "Launch Program" isexecuted via CreateProcessAsUser in thecontext of the logged on user. If there is aconfiguration, the configuration name isconcatenated with .KBF and copied overKEYBOARD.KBF, and concatenated with .INIand copied over the INI file name the same asthe Launch Program EXE name. Switching to

269


a desktop name that is NOT listed, will resultin the keyboard executable being closed.Reverting back to a desktop that is listed willstart the launch sequence over.

The "Screen-Saver" desktop is NOT available(it is "locked" out internally), and the"WinLogon" desktop will not allow the EXE torun in the context of the logged on user.

The following registry keys are used in[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\InnovationManagement Group\My-T-Soft\Logon] forthese Advanced Options:

ExtraLogonLogon - 1 indicates the "LaunchKeyboard Prior to Logon" is in useExtraLogonShell - 1 indicates the "LaunchKeyboard during User Shell activation" is inuse ExtraLogonDesktop - 1 indicates the"Launch Keyboard on Specified Desktops" isin use ExtraLogonExe - this holds the text for"Launch Program" ExtraLogonDesktops - this

270


holds the text for "Desktop name(s) & optionsConfiguration files name"

If "Enable Advanced Logon Options" isdisabled, ExtraLogonLogon, ExtraLogonShell,and ExtraLogonDesktop will be 0.

The ExtraLogonDesktops can be changeddynamically, and does not require restart of thesystem (although the desktop will need to bechanged to force a list read). However,changing from Enabled to disabled, orselecting a different Advanced Logon optiondoes require a system restart.

Advanced Notes for LogonUtilities (Large KeyboardDialog - Windows 2000/XP)The My-T-Pen Logon Utilities provide the

271


basic functionality of the standard Windows2000 / XP logon. Because its underlyingdesign is different, the following sectionoutlines exactly how the implementation wasdesigned, providing advanced users and systemadministrators information that may allow adifferent approach or setup to resolve anyincompatibilities.

• There are 4 resolutions supported - 640 x480, 800 x 600, 1024 x 768, and 1280 x1024. The resolution is queried via theWindows API GetSystemMetrics, and thelogic uses the reported screen width againstthe above widths - if it is larger, then thenext size up is used. Once past 1280, the1280 x 1024 dialog display will be used.

• The Legal Notification Dialog box issupported, and is exactly the same as thestandard logon Legal Notification Message

272


Box.

• The Do not Display Last Username featureis supported.

• The Auto Logon feature can be used with orwithout the My-T-Pen Logon Utility. Notethat the User’s shell is created via theMy-T-Pen Logon Utility if it is Enabled - seenotes below regarding the User shell.

• Auto Logon: (1.70 update) The ShiftOverride is supported by the My-T-PenLogon Utility, and so is theIgnoreShiftOverride option. This allows formaintenance support, etc. on dedicatedsystems. Note a physical keyboard isrequired, because the physical state of a shiftkey is required to stop the Auto Logon. Forsituations where bypassing the auto logon isnecessary, see the DelayAutoLogon optionin Configure Secure Logon .

273


• The Allow Unauthenticated Shutdown issupported.

• The USERINIT options are supported, andany additional entries are processed ifproperly delimited (comma expected).

• The Logged on security options aresupported. (1.70 update) There is now asoftware interface available to trigger aSecure Attention Sequence (SAS) event.There is a utility CTALTDEL.EXE (withsource code) that essentially emulates aCtrl-Alt-Del physical event. The call is to afunction with the IMGLOGON.DLL calledGenerateNotify.

User Shell Activation

This is the most critical aspect of the My-T-PenLogon Utility, and extreme care and detailedtesting steps were taken to ensure compatibilitywith existing systems. There are 6 main areas

274


that the Logon Utility addresses, with notes &details listed.

1. Logon User

2. Environment

3. Activate User Profile

4. USERINIT

5. Logon Scripts

6. Network Logon

Logon User

The Windows API LogonUser is used toestablish a valid user under the Domain, Name& Password. If successful, the returned usersecurity token is used to create the User’s Shell.

Environment

To emulate the standard Windows logon, 3Environment variables are added:

275


HOMEDRIVE

HOMEPATH

LOGONSERVER

The HOMEDRIVE entry is established as the 2character drive returned from theGetSystemDirectory - Note: a system directoryas the root may cause this entry to be invalid.

The HOMEPATH is attempted as\USERS\DEFAULT, then \USERS, then \(root) as per specification.

The LOGONSERVER is obtained from theLookupAccountName Windows API.

Activate User Profile

The User Profile is loaded via Windows APIcalls.

USERINIT

The USERINIT entries are established via the

276


CreateProcessAsUser Windows API call withthe established Environment. The entry istokenized via delimiters, and each entry isprocessed.

Logon Script processing

The script entry is obtained via the WindowsAPI, and is processed as tokens withCreateProcessAsUser. TheGetSystemDirectory is appended with*\REPL\IMPORT\SCRIPTS\" to find thescript. If the script entry contains a ’.’character, then it is processed directly.Otherwise, a FindFirstFile is used with a *.*"to identify a file name to process.

Network Logon

The logon script provided via MprLogonScriptsupported by WinLogon is processed viatokens using the CreateProcessAsUser API.

277


Configure Automatic Logon


• Select Setup Automatic Logon

There are 3 options available

1. Enable Auto Logon

2. Default Logon Name

3. Default Password

278


The Name and Password fields are disabledunless the Enable Auto Logon is checked On.

Check Enable Auto Logon On to enable theautomatic logon of the Default User / DefaultPassword combination. You must enter a validUser Name along with the proper Password toensure proper operation of the AutomaticLogon.

Notes:

• If the Default User Name has a blankPassword, this option will only work once -the next time you turn on the system, theName / Password Logon screen will appear.A Password must be entered to ensureproper operation of the Automatic Logon.

• There are a few options for the AutomaticLogon when the Keyboard Logon isenabled. See Configure Secure Logon .

279



My-T-Pen Logon Utilities forWindows Vista

The My-T-Pen Logon Utilities for WindowsVista have been provided to bring flexibility tothe implementation of Pen and Touchscreensystems without requiring a physical keyboard.By using the My-T-Pen Logon Utilities, thefollowing benefits can be realized:

• Consistency in the user interface

• Flexibility for different screen resolutionsand user interfaces

280


• Secure Logon operation without the need fora physical keyboard

• Control of user input options may provideadditional security (e.g. limiting keyboardlayout in conjunction with other logonauthentication tools)

In addition, the Automatic Logon option hasalso been incorporated as a convenience withinthis utility, allowing a fixed user/passwordcombination to start up Windows Vista withoutany user interaction required.

Important Notes

• The proper configuration andimplementation of this utility requires a userwith Administrator rights

• Proper licensing is required or the Logonmodule will revert to a demonstration andeventually disable itself

281


• All configuration should be done via theMy-T-Pen Logon Utilities programaccessible from the Program Menu forMy-T-Pen

My-T-Soft 2 KeyboardThere is 1 option available - the My-T-Soft 2Keyboard Logon

The My-T-Soft 2 software used which allowscustomized layouts of the logon keyboard, anthe My-T-Soft 2 approach enables the use of aMy-T-Soft 2 keyboard during the secure logonsequence. The keyboard can be modified withIMG’s "Build-A-Board".

282


There is 1 section available

• Use Onscreen Keyboard at Logon Screens


When Enable Onscreen Keyboard Logon ischecked "On", the default logon options areused, but the My-T-Soft (version 2) keyboard isdisplayed within the secure logon screens. Thekeyboard layout may be modified with IMG’s"Build-A-Board." See below for optionsspecific to the My-T-Soft 2 Keyboard.

My-T-Soft 2 Keyboard options

283


There are 2 approaches available whenMy-T-Soft 2 is selected for displaying thekeyboard layout (i.e. what the user sees).My-T-Soft 2 is the next generation of thepopular My-T-Pen keyboards, and has a moreflexible approach to designing and operatingkeyboard layouts. To address customers whowant customized and specialized layouts,My-T-Soft 2 can read Build-A-Board layoutsalong with Original KBF files (layouts forMy-T-Mouse, My-T-Touch, My-T-Pen,My-T-Soft and OnScreen).

There are 3 generic Build-A-Board layoutsprovided - Small Keyboard, MediumKeyboard, and Large Keyboard. Smallworks well for pen system and Large is betterfor touchscreens & fingers, but the actualresolution of the display will determine thebest choice.

There are also 2 options available for dealing284


with Original layouts (NOTE: These layoutsonly display the alphabetic portion of thekeyboard). Select Default 101, Currentlanguage to use a preset standard 101keyboard configuration with the currentlyselected language/layout inMy-T-Soft/My-T-Touch/My-T-Pen. If you needa different size, you have the option ofselecting Copy of Current Layout to copy thecurrent saved layout. This current saved layoutis the KEYBOARD.KBF in the installationdirectory. To update the layout, runMy-T-Pen/My-T-Touch/My-T-Soft, select adifferent size, then open the menu(middle-button of tool bar), and select CurrentSettings | Save Current Settings. Run theLogon Utilities, and select Copy of CurrentLayout, then click OK (this will copy theKEYBOARD.KBF into the LOGON folder).

Technical Notes

285


The My-T-Soft 2 option for the Logon portionof Windows Vista uses MTS2.EXE, a specialbuild of My-T-Soft 2 for this usage. The layoutdisplayed by My-T-Soft 2 is theKEYBOARD.KBF file in the LOGON folderunder the installation directory. The aboveoptions in the Logon Utilities handle thismanipulation for you. If you useBuild-A-Board to create your own layout, youwill want to copy your "built" layout into theLOGON folder, AFTER selecting theMy-T-Soft 2 option in the Logon Utilities.Note that if you re-run the Logon Utilities, andclick OK on the Setup/Configuration screen,your "built" layout will be copied over! Forreference, or if you want to take over thepre-built layouts, this lists the file names andtheir associated selection in the LogonUtilities:

Small Keyboard =

286


LOGON\KEYBOARD.SML =>LOGON\KEYBOARD.KBF

Medium Keyboard =LOGON\KEYBOARD.MED =>LOGON\KEYBOARD.KBF

Large Keyboard =LOGON\KEYBOARD.LRG =>LOGON\KEYBOARD.KBF

Default 101 = LOGON\KEYBOARD.ORG =>LOGON\KEYBOARD.KBF

Copy of Current Layout = KEYBOARD.KBF=> LOGON\KEYBOARD.KBF

Note: ConfigPath changes - The Settingof ConfigPath in the Initialization file canchange where the Copy of Current Layoutuses when copying the "current" layout.This is based on the ConfigPath settingand the current user. In general, thedefault, and any ConfigPath setting other

287


than ConfigPath=0 will result in copyingthe current user’s layout and INI into theInstallation Folder. This will also have aresult of creating a new "default" layout &configuration (e.g. KEYBOARD.KBF andINI file), which will consequently be usedfor any new users running the My-T-Softsoftware on the desktop (assuming theydon’t already have a currentconfiguration). In other words, if the Copyof Current Layout is selected, from then onthe Logon layout AND the defaultMy-T-Pen layout will be this Current Layoutwhen ConfigPath is set to anything but 0.For further details on ConfigPath, see theInitialization File Documentation.

The Small Keyboard layout project(Build-A-Board 2.10) is included asKEYBOARD.ZIP in the LOGON folder. Thelarger layouts were simply resized & cleaned

288


up with a larger font selected.

Older KBF/KMF support

My-T-Soft 2 can read & operate older (i.e.pre-version 2.00) layouts, and this approach isused for the "Original Layout" selections. Thisoption is included for 2 main reasons. 1) Easierway to select different sizes, and 2) Matchselected keyboard layout in both Logon andDesktop operation. For example, if you have aDutch layout on your desktop, when one ofthese options is selected, the same layout (i.e.KMF) will be used for the Logon keyboard.

Note: There are some limitations with theMy-T-Soft 2 handling of older layouts:

The Shift-AltGr states require selectingShift, then AltGr.

Caps-Lock display always uses the Shiftlabel, and some keys may show an

289


incorrect label vs. the character generatedby the keystroke.

The default font will not handle non-ANSIlayouts correctly.

Positioning

If you do not have Build-A-Board, and wish tochange the opening position of theSmall/Medium/Large Build-A-Board layouts,there is a basic utility calledKBFLOGON.EXE in the LOGON folder. Youcan access this by clicking on UpdateOpening Position (Build-A-Board Layouts).

290


By running this utility, you can change theopening X / Y position of the current selectedBuild-A-Board layout to match your screenorientation & resolution.

Original layouts are treated differently, and arecentered horizontally and position at thebottom of the screen. The KBFLOGON.EXEwill not affect this positioning, and should notbe used for these layouts.

Configure AutomaticLogon for Windows Vista


• Select Setup Automatic Logon

291


There are 3 options available

1. Enable Auto Logon

2. Default Logon Name

3. Default Password

The Name and Password fields are disabledunless the Enable Auto Logon is checked On.

Check Enable Auto Logon On to enable theautomatic logon of the Default User / DefaultPassword combination. You must enter a validUser Name along with the proper Password toensure proper operation of the AutomaticLogon.

292


Notes:

• If the Default User Name has a blankPassword, this option will only work once -the next time you turn on the system, theName / Password Logon screen will appear.A Password must be entered to ensureproper operation of the Automatic Logon.

• There are a few options for the AutomaticLogon when the Keyboard Logon isenabled. See Configure Secure Logon .


293

Part III.My-T-PenTechnical

Documentation

Advanced UserNotes, TechnicalDocumentation,File Information,

and various Other

Information aboutMy-T-Pen.

Chapter 7 - Advanced User Notes detailsadditional product information, Final ReleaseNotes, Technical Notes, Developerinformation, product history, and CustomerSuggestions.

Chapter 8 - Files & File Notes & InstallationInformation lists all files, general information,location, along with usage details. AdditionalInstallation Information is also included here.

Chapter 9 - Operation Notes is a collectionof specific issues, advanced notes, andadditional documentation on Build-A-Macro,Command Line options, Sounds, andBuild-A-Board support.

Chapter 10 - Initialization File

Documentation provides comprehensivetechnical documentation on all theconfiguration settings available in theMYTPEN.INI file, along with other advanceduser notes.

Chapter 11 - Error Messages and Numberslists all internal errors, number references, andpossible solutions if these errors areexperienced.

Chapter 7. AdvancedUser Notes

Advanced User Notes &Information

The Advanced User Notes and TechnicalDocumentation covers a wide-range of topics& information. It is important to understandthat most users will simply type with thesoftware, so detailing all of the features,options, settings in the standard product helpwould overwhelm the majority of users.

Note: For up-to-date information, andother specific technical issues, it willalways be important to refer to the on-line

297

Chapter 7. Advanced User Notes

support database athttp://www.imgpresents.com/imgfaq.htm

If you have been referred to this section, orhave been unable to resolve your question(s) orproblems within this manual, on-line help, andtutorial, or are an advanced user familiar withWindows Initialization files (INI type files), theRegistry, and wish to learn all of the My-T-Penconfiguration Options, please read thefollowing chapters. For developers, integrators,or technicians, the following informationshould be read in its entirety - also refer to theDeveloper’s Kit for even more options & otheradvanced information.

Note: Some of the notes contained heredate back to the original development in1992. Certain information may be dated orno longer relevant, but is kept for historical

298


reasons and as a reference back to theactual implementation. This detail mayalso help answer questions about settingsand features, and why things have beendone in a particular manner.

Final Release NotesSpecific Application Notes & Releaseinformation are included in theAPPLICATION NOTES section below.

Quick Help is available only for the U.S.Standard 101 Keyboard.

Gaps in version numbers usually caused byOEM or non-public releases.

Version 1.30 - Product release 1/30/94

299


Version 1.31 - Changes for Trident 256-colordrivers in Display routines & Macro PanelUpdates. 3/31/94

Version 1.32 - Modification to keyboardinterface DLL for compatibility with Windows95 August 24, 1995 release. 8/30/95

Version 1.35 - The INSTALL.EXE has beenremoved, and SETUP.EXE has an installationoption. Several minor inconsistencies havebeen corrected. 3/5/1996

Version 1.40 - Enhanced Graphics, 3 new sizes,complete compatibility & enhancements forWindows 95, multi-language versions, newmacro panels & features, and a whole lot more.3/1/97

Version 1.41 - WordComplete, Action Panel,Basic & Advanced Modes, and a wide range offeatures based on beta-test feedback.

My-T-Soft AT 7/1/1997300


Version 1.42 - 1.44 - Various minor changes toaccommodate CrossScanner compatibility -OnScreen / My-T-Soft AT 9/1/1997

Version 1.45 - Dwell timer added. OnScreen /My-T-Soft AT finalized & released.

My-T-Soft AT 9/15/1997

Version 1.45 - Enhancements for operationwithin Windows NT/2000. Incorporation offeatures from My-T-Touch, My-T-Pen,My-T-Soft AT. All basic operation confirmed.10/1/97

Version 1.46 - Various minor modifications. NoSplash Option, better operation with Menus,flexibility added for non-type into windows.12/9/97

Version 1.47 - Addition of NoType capabilityto bypass other floating windows, settings forMicrosoft Office. 7/15/98

301


Version 1.49 - Complete change for lower levelinterface into Windows, various new features,released for integrators only. 4/9/1998

Version 1.50 - Numerous additions, Windows98 - My-T-Soft AT 9/1/1998

Version 1.50 - All features tested & verified,complete documentation update, all knownissues addressed, updated Developers Kit,addition on Logon Utilities. 11/1/1998

Version 1.52 - Maintenance release, match tocommercial products - My-T-Soft AT 5/2/1999

Version 1.53 - Maintenance release, match tocommercial products - My-T-Soft AT 9/1/1999

Version 1.60 - WinLogon options, e-commerceversion, 11/1/99

Version 1.61 - Maintenance release,AddFontResource removal, 2/1/2000

Version 1.67 - 3D Keys & infinite sizing,

302


Incorporation of Windows 95/98 software tocreate retail version that allows install forWindows 95/98/Me/NT/2000, softwaredistribution on CD, updates from 1.61 versionsof My-T-Touch/My-T-Pen. 7/16/2000

Version 1.70 - Integration & updates to Logonutilities for both 95/98/Me and NT/2000,integration with My-T-Soft TS (TerminalServer version), updated help, additionalkeyboard layouts Win 2000 specific features,modifications for non-mouse drivers.3/17/2001

Version 1.70 - OnScreen merged with 1.70code, addedWordList/TurnAwayScrlCrtl/Text-To-Speech.7/17/2001

Version 1.73 - OnScreen minor updates,changes to Text-To-Speech, integration withCrossScanner various maintenance updates,Terminal Server updates, etc. 3/17/2002

303


Version 1.75 - Various maintenance updates,new features to OnScreen, help updates,additional keyboards. 5/17/2002

Version 1.75a-1.75J - Several additionalsettings & customizations for OEMs.8/30/2002

Version 1.76 - Support for Build-A-Boardlayouts for both Windows Logon(IMGGINA2.DLL), and at run time(My-T-Soft TS), maintenance updates.11/17/2002

Version 1.77 - 104 key layouts, updates to 101layouts, additional Spanish/German/Frenchlayouts, Chinese/Japanese/Korean layouts,customer requests & maintenance updates.7/7/2003

Version 1.78 - Support for Windows Vista, userconfiguration files, synchronization withOnScreen release, Build-A-Board layout

304


selection, Download Manager (managedupdates), keyboard scanning, keyboard layoutupdates, numerous customer requests andmaintenance updates. 4/18/2007

Version 1.78 Release 2 - Updates to keyboardscanning, maintenance updates, integrationwith Developer’s Kit 1.78 Release 3. 3/5/2008

Version 1.78 Release 3 - My-T-Soft TS andMy-T-Mouse releases, maintenance updates.7/16/2009

Version 1.78 Release 4 - Updates to OnScreenfor scanning requests, Settings Import/Export,Windows 7 compatibility

Version 1.78 Release 4 - 11/24/2009

Important User NotesMy-T-Pen WAS NOT intended to emulate the

305


Windows keyboard interface in its entirety.Although My-T-Pen appears to operate just asthe keyboard does, due to its design, certainapplications may not function properly withMy-T-Pen. Special software considerationshave been made to make My-T-Pen as flexibleas possible, and the notes below offerinformation on configuration settings that maymake My-T-Pen work within your applications.Also below is a complete discussion ofsettings, options, and possible solutions to anyincompatibilities.

My-T-Pen WAS intended to make certainoperations easier because the user canconcentrate on the task at hand, not whichinput device is required at the moment.

My-T-Pen allows the user to keep their eyes onthe screen, so the flow of work on a computeris uninterrupted. In essence, My-T-Pen is just astandard Windows application that provides

306


special functionality.

Technical NotesMy-T-Pen is a standard Windows Applicationand does not require any special drivers, andshould work with all keyboard and mouseemulation drivers that are compatible with theones that ship with Microsoft Windows.

For other pointing devices, My-T-Pen calls anduses the GetAsyncKeyState & GetKeyStateAPI calls for certain actions of the mouse.These must be supported by the hardware &driver emulating the mouse. The 1.40 releaseaddresses some of these limitations, andMy-T-Pen operates properly withJoystick-To-Mouse, CrossScanner, MouseKeys, and other pointing methods that do notuse the actual mouse driver.

307


When working with Virtual Machines, certainpointing device functions operate differentlybecause of the way the mouse integratesthrough the virtual machine layer. Somefunctions may not operate correctly, or thevirtual machine may need to be full screen (orwindowed) to operate correctly. We are awareof issues with the Windows API ClipCursorand SetMousePos when using VMWare andParallels virtual machines. These limitationsthen affects the keyboard scanning featurewhen running My-T-Pen in Windows within avirtual machine.

Application NotesTHE FOLLOWING ARE SPECIFICAPPLICATIONS IN WHICH My-T-PenDOES

308


NOT NEED SPECIAL SETTINGS BUT INWHICH My-T-Pen REQUIRES

SPECIAL CONSIDERATION

Note: Because of the generalimprovement by Microsoft & otherWindows developers, this list has not beenupdated since the original releases. Itremains here as an appropriate place ifthere are any specific applications thatrequire additional notes when operatingwith My-T-Pen.

Dashboard for Windows

Publisher: Hewlett-Packard

Version: 2.0

Dashboard can cause some painting problemswhen My-T-Pen is

309


launched from a Layout due to the wayDashboard positions

opening windows. We suggest you setMy-T-Pen to open as a

Normal Window, and position Dashboard awayfrom the center of

the screen.

MS-DOS Window

Publisher: Microsoft

Version: Windows 3.0,3.1

My-T-Pen will not work with a Full ScreenDOS application.

My-T-Pen will work with a DOS application ina DOS Window.

There are a few items that should be notedwhen using My-T-Pen

310


with a DOS Window. You may want to use aPIF file for operating

a DOS Application in a DOS Window.

1. Keystroke Macros MUST BE ENTEREDIN LOWER CASE.

2. If the arrow or edit keys do not respondproperly, turn the Num Lock off.

Paintbrush, Solitaire, Reversi



The edit keys are used by these applications tomove the cursor.

Using the arrows, etc. on My-T-Pen will movethe Cursor onto the

Application, moving the cursor off My-T-Pen,resulting in a very

311


short usefulness of My-T-Pen.

PC Tools for Windows

Publisher: Central Point

Version: 1.x, 2.0

When My-T-Pen is minimized to a button, theMy-T-Pen button

display can obscure some of the PC Toolswindows. Set

CaptionWatch=1 in the MYTPEN.INI file toalleviate any

interference.

PIF Editor



If you have built an Application Short-Cut keywith the PIF

312


Editor, it will not respond in all cases to theShort-Cut if

typed on My-T-Pen.

Recorder



When working with My-T-Pen & Recorder -make sure that

My-T-Pen does not obscure any window youwill be working with

and you may NOT start a macro with akeyboard short-cut from

My-T-Pen.

Either start the macro from Recorder or try toremember where you

left your keyboard and use the keyboardshort-cut.

313


Windows Tutorial - (WINTUTOR.EXE)


Version: Windows 3.1

My-T-Pen hides behind the Windows Tutorialexcept in a few cases,

and these may be confusing to new users. Newusers should run the

tutorial without My-T-Pen, and learn theWindows Concepts before

using My-T-Pen.

Acrobat Reader (ACROREAD.EXE)

Publisher: Adobe

Version: All

When viewing documents as full screen,Acrobat will destroy the

Keyboard display on My-T-Pen. This is due toimproper windows

314


application operation within Acrobat. KeepMy-T-Pen minimized,

or do not use Acrobat in this fashion.

Windows Developers

Note: As a starting point, please refer tothe Install Developer’s Kit icon in theinstallation program group.

Developers Notes, downloadable files, samplecode, and other useful integration andprogramming information is available atInnovation Management Group, Inc.’s WebSite:http://www.imgpresents.com/imgdev.htm.(http://www.imgpresents.com/imgdev.htm)

315


Developers wishing more technicalinformation about My-T-Pen, messaginginformation, and details how applications caninterface with My-T-Pen should contactInnovation Management Group, Inc.

For Questions or other information you maycontact:

Innovation Management Group, Inc.Customer Service179 Niblick Road #454Paso Robles, CA 93446USA(800) 889-0987 (US & Canada)(818) 701-1579(818) 936-0200 (fax)<[email protected]>http://www.imgpresents.com

316


About this productMy-T-Pen was conceived in its simplest formby Kermit Komm in a brainstorming session ata company called Future Technologies. Theoriginal name "My-T-Mouse" was acontraction of "My Typing Mouse", and theoriginal product was designed as a mouseutility to enable a mouse to type and performany operation within the GUI (Graphical UserInterface) without the need for a physicalkeyboard (this aspect of the design has becomethe underlying theme for the acceptance of theproducts and their technology in themarketplace).

Note: My-T-Mouse was originallyintroduced to the world at Fall COMDEX1993 (when COMDEX, i.e. the ComputerDealers Exposition, was the premier tradeshow for everything happening in the

317


computer industry - My-T-Mouse wasfeatured as one of the highlights of theshow in a program called "ComputerChronicles" (a well known series that ranfrom 1981 through 2002). You can find thisarchived video [Computer Chronicles FallCOMDEX 1993] at the Internet Archive(http://www.archive.org)).

Legal note: The My-T-Mouse name (andits resultant phonetic pronunciation)created a trademark dispute raised byViacom (with its cartoon character havinga similar sounding name), eventuallywinding up before the Trademark Trials &Appeals board and setting a citableprecedent, with Viacom’s opposition to theMy-T-Mouse® trademark being dismissed.

318


When introduced in 1993, the concept of anon-screen keyboard was new and far from themainstream, and in the beginning years mucheducation was required to explain "why"anyone would want or use an on-screenkeyboard. Over the years, with the introductionof handheld devices, the growth of touchscreenbased systems, and the maturation ofpen-based systems, the concept of an on-screenkeyboard has become commonplace, and inmany situations, expected as an alternate inputmechanism.

Since the original product was named"My-T-Mouse", much effort was expended inexplaining that the product would work withtouchscreens or pen based systems (or, in fact,any pointing device that could act like amouse), so "My-T-Pen" and "My-T-Touch"were created to address the needs of themarketplace. In order to encompass the now

319


growing family of on-screen keyboards, thename "My-T-Soft" (i.e. My Typing Software)was created and eventually used as theencompassing trademark of the entireMy-T-Soft® family of on-screen keyboards andutilities. There is also a version enhanced forpeople with specialized needs was originallynamed My-T-Soft AT (or My-T-Soft withAssistive Technology), and eventually renamedOnScreen to differentiate its capabilities withthe more commercially focused versions.

Conceived during the original development ofMy-T-Mouse, the concept of Build-A-Boardhas been under constant refinement anddevelopment during the entire lifetime ofMy-T-Mouse and its derivatives. At some pointin the future, Build-A-Board’s capabilities willbe expanded to enable not only completelycustomizable layouts, but to meet or exceed allof the capabilities of the original products and

320


its derivatives.

Many of the enhancements and utilities camefrom all involved and My-T-Pen users.

In the 16 years as a commercial product, manyindividuals have been involved at variouslevels, and thanks & acknowledgements go toeveryone so involved.

Note: The following acknowledgementsare for the original release in 1993.

Production:

Product Concept, Screen Presentation &Usability: Irwin Handelman

Logo & Graphic Artwork & Fonts: MarcHandelman

Development:

321


Windows Interface & Keyboard Emulation:Kermit Komm

Keyboard Display & Display Interface: GeorgeMerritt

My-T-Pen Setup & Graphic Artwork & HelpFiles: Darrel Niemann

Manual & Help Information: Lorrie Greene

Customer SuggestionsWe appreciate and welcome suggestions fromour users for features that you would like to seein future versions of My-T-Pen. Please feel freeto send us any comments you may have thatwould make our product more useful to you.All suggestions and ideas become the propertyof Innovation Management Group, Inc.

Send to:322


Innovation Management Group, Inc.Customer Service179 Niblick Road #454Paso Robles, CA 93446USA

Or contact us directly:

(800) 889-0987 (US & Canada)(818) 701-1579(818) 936-0200 (fax)<[email protected]>http://www.imgpresents.com

Date:_____________________

Name:__________________________________________

Address:________________________________________

City:_____________________State:_______Zip:_______

My-T-Pen Comments and Suggestions:

______________________________________________________323


______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________

Version 1.78 Release 4

11/24/2009

Copyright © 1993-2009 by InnovationManagement Group, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.


324

Chapter 8. Files & FileNotes & InstallationInformation

This section outlines details about each file,minimum file requirements, and referenceinformation on the product installation.

My-T-Pen Files & File Notes& Installation Information

MY-T-SOFT FILES & FILE NOTES

Files located in the My-T-Pen InstallationDirectory:

The following files are REQUIRED for proper

325

Chapter 8. Files & File Notes & Installation Information

operation of

My-T-Pen: (Version specific files indicated)

* - indicates the minimum files required forfunctional operation of My-T-Pen

** - the Font file is not absolutely necessary,depending on size & Font settings,

however for basic operation with minimal fileconfiguration, it is recommended that it remain.

- MYTPEN.EXE* - My-T-Pen executable

- MTPSETUP.EXE (???SETUP.EXE, Versionspecific) - My-T-Pen Setup executable

- MTPTUTOR.EXE (???TUTOR.EXE,Version specific) - My-T-Pen Tutorial &Calculator Tape Executable Tutorial &Calculator Tape cannot run at the same time.

- MYTLIB.DLL* - My-T-Pen Dynamic LinkLibrary

326


- MYTLIB32.DLL* - My-T-Pen DynamicLink Library

- IMGVERS.DLL* - IMG Dynamic LinkLibrary

- IMGLM.EXE (2000/XP/WS2003)(*Required for Terminal Server licensing)

- BWCC32.DLL* - Borland International Inc.’sDynamic Link Library

- CW3215.DLL* - Windows 32 supportDynamic Link Library

- IMGLOGON.DLL - (2000/XP) (*Requiredfor 2000/XP Logon) - IMG Logon DynamicLink Library In the 1.76 & later releases, theIMGLOGON.DLL is installed fromPKG00003.ZIP and extracted during installprior to Program Group creation.

- IMGLOGON.EXE - IMG LogonConfiguration Utility (also used by

327


???SETUP.EXE)

- IMGGINA2.DLL - (2000/XP) (*Required for2000/XP Logon, My-T-Pen 2 Keyboard layout)- IMG Logon DLL In the 1.76 & later releases,the IMGGINA2.DLL is installed fromPKG00003.ZIP and extracted during installprior to Program Group creation.

IMGGINA2.003 - (2000/XP) For support inWindows XP & Windows Server 2003, the fileIMGGINA2.003 is used. This overwritesIMGGINA2.DLL at install when installed onWindows XP or Windows Server 2003.

- IMGVistaLogon.DLL - (Vista) (*Requiredfor Vista Logon, My-T-Pen 2 Keyboard layout)(this is analogous to the IMGGINA2.DLL for2000/XP), but provides the interface in Vista toallow the logon keyboard.

The following files are used byIMGGINA2.DLL / IMGVistaLogon.DLL, and

328


only are used when My-T-Pen 2 is enabled asthe logon option for 2000/XP

- MTS2.EXE - (My-T-Soft 2 executable todisplay LOGON\KEYBOARD.KBF)

- MTSLIB.DLL - Support for MTS2.EXE /MYTSOFT2.EXE

- BABDLL.DLL - Support for MTS2.EXE /MYTSOFT.EXE, Build-A-Board commonfunctions

- STOCK.DLL - Support for MTS2.EXE /MYTSOFT2.EXE, Resources for 3D keys

- LOGON\KEYBOARD.KBF - the KeyboardLayout for Logon (Created in Build-A-Board)

- LOGON\MACROBAT.EXE - Macro Batchprocessor for MTS2.EXE

- LOGON\KEYBRD01.KMF - DefaultKeyboard Macro File for MTS2.EXE

329


- LOGON\MAC00000.KMF - Default Macrosfor MTS.EXE

- LOGON\KEYBOARD.SML - Small layout(Build-A-Board layout)

- LOGON\KEYBOARD.MED - Mediumlayout (Build-A-Board layout)

- LOGON\KEYBOARD.LRG - Large layout(Build-A-Board layout)

- LOGON\KEYBOARD.ORG - Default layout(Original layout)

- LOGON\KEYBOARD.ZIP - Build-A-Boardlayout Project for Small keyboard

Note: The actual layouts are differentbetween 2000 / XP and Vista

- LOGON\KBFLOGON.EXE - Utility tochange opening position for

330


Small/Medium/Large Build-A-Board layoutsIn the 1.76 & later releases, these support filesfor IMGGINA2.DLL are installed fromPKG00003.ZIP & extracted during install priorto Program Group creation.

- PNLWATCH.EXE / PWLIB.DLL - Utility &Support library to handle Tablet PC interfacefor Windows XP. In the 1.77 & later releases,these support files are installed fromPKG00003.ZIP & extracted during install priorto Program Group creation.

- MYTSOFT2.EXE - Executable forBuild-A-Board created keyboard layouts

- MACROBAT.EXE - Macro Batch Processorfor MYTSOFT2.EXE In the 1.76 & laterreleases, MYTSOFT2.EXE,MACROBAT.EXE, and Support DLLs areinstalled from PKG00004.ZIP & extractedduring install prior to Program Group creation.

331


(1.76 add-on - IMGSOUND & default Wavefile)

- IMGSOUND.EXE - Executable process usedto play sounds

Note: In the Assistive Technology version,IMGSOUND.EXE is always run, even ifthere are no sound options turned on. Itcan be renamed or removed to prevent itfrom launching if sounds are not requiredand you do not want this process to be runbecause of memory or security reasons.Also see the NoAnnounce setting in theInitialization File Documentation. InCommercial versions, IMGSOUND.EXE isonly run when Sound=1.

- SOUNDS\KEYCLICK.WAV - Wave file fordefault KeyClick sounds (Sounds=1) In the1.76 & later releases, IMGSOUND.EXE, and

332


SOUNDS\KEYCLICK.WAV are installedfrom PKG00005.ZIP & extracted during installprior to Program Group creation.

- HELP\*.html, HELP\IMAGES\*.png -My-T-Pen Help (PKG00008.ZIP)

- MTSOPEN.EXE - My-T-Pen Welcome

- SEETHRU.EXE (2000/XP - Transparency)Standalone window with dialog to controltransparency of keyboard

- KEYBOARD.KBF* - My-T-Pen KeyboardConfiguration & Description File

- *.KBF - other KBF files (pre-built sampleBuild-A-Board layouts included as examples)

- KEYBRD01.KMF - Base macro file,preserves original naming convention, used byboth MTS & MTS2. 1.77 note - significantname change KEYBRD?? changed toKYBD???? to accommodate 104 layouts &

333


future layout additions

- KYBD0001.KMF - KYBD????.KMF(*.KMF File specified in INI file (Keyboard=))- My-T-Pen Keyboard Layout & Macro File forindividual Keyboards In the 1.76 & laterreleases, the KYBD0002.KMF -KYBD????.KMF files are installed asPKG00001.ZIP and extracted during installprior to Program Group creation.

- MAC00000.KMF - MAC00???.KMF(*Appropriate files IF Macro panel in use) -My-T-Pen Macro Panel Files In the 1.76 &later releases, the MAC00001.KMF -MAC?????.KMF files are installed asPKG00002.ZIP and extracted during installprior to Program Group creation.

- MYTPEN.INI* - My-T-Pen Initialization File

- LICENSE.EXE* - IMG License Manager

- LICENSE2.EXE* - IMG License verification334


only (read-only access)

- LICENSE.LIC* - IMG License File

- LICENSE.ORG - Original IMG License File

- LICENSE.TXT - IMG End User LicenseAgreement

- README.TXT - Product Installation text file

- MANIFEST.TXT - Reference File from Build

- IMGUTIL.EXE - used for installation anduninstallation of software

Support Files

- MYTSTORY.TXT - Tutorial Text file(PKG00006.ZIP)

- KEYBOARD.ORG - OriginalKEYBOARD.KBF file for recovery

- MYTPEN.ORG - Original MYTPEN.INI filefor recovery

335


Developer Utilities: (Installed in InstallationDirectory)

- DEVKTDOC\DEVKIT.CHM - My-T-PenUtilities & Information (PKG00006.ZIP)

- CTALTDEL.EXE - Dev Kit utility to restartWindows, used as an example for KeyLaunches - (pre 1.70 RESTRTWN.EXE, fromNTRSTART.EXE)

- DVKTINST.EXE - tool for quick installationof Developer’s Kit

- ZIP32.DLL - Zip library for compressingexports / Word Lists

- UNZIP32S.DLL - Unzip library, required forinstallation of Dev Kit with DVKTINST.EXE

- WORDLIST.EXE - Word List Assistant, readin files, save Word List files, install new WordLists, Requires ZIP32.DLL, UNZIP32S.DLL.This is also the utility that handles the

336


Export/Import menu options, but only providesthe Word List Assistant in the OnScreenreleases.

- DKT??????.ZIP - latest release of DevelopersKit (If included with distribution files) UseDevKit Installer (DVKTINST.EXE), orWinZip or use PKUNZIP with the -d option topreserve directory (folder) structure.Recommended to Unzip in Installationdirectory for easier file management. The latestDeveloper’s Kit may be downloaded using theIMG Download Manager.

Note: The font and the files established in\Program Files\Common Files\InnovationManagement Group are not un-installedwhen My-T-Pen is un-installed. Theseremain in case future IMG products areinstalled. Refer to the IMG SystemManager for further information (ifavailable).

337


- MYTMOUSE.FON** - My-T-Pen KeyboardFont File for smaller sizes

- ADDFONT.EXE - Utility to Add font postinstallation, e.g. "Addfont add"

Located in the Windows System Directory (orWindows Fonts folder):

- MANAGER\ESTABLISH.EXE - this is apost installation utility that establishes orupdates the IMG Download Manager and IMGLicense Manager files as outlined below.

Located in \Program Files\CommonFiles\Innovation ManagementGroup\Download Manager directory:

- IMGCLEAN.EXE - used to completeuninstall of software, required for ControlPanel Add/Remove Programs

- IMGDLM.EXE - The IMG Download338


Manager - Installed byMANAGER\ESTABLISH.EXE

- IMGNET.DLL - The IMG DownloadManager Library - Installed byMANAGER\ESTABLISH.EXE

Located in \Program Files\CommonFiles\Innovation ManagementGroup\License Manager directory:

- LICENSE.DLL - library used by the IMGLicense Manager and IMG Download Manager

Files created during use:

- MYTPEN.BAK - My-T-Pen previousInitialization File (in configuration location foruser’s MYTPEN.INI file - see ConfigPath entryin Initialization File Documentation

OnScreen Add-Ons

- KEYBOARD.KB1* - Keyboard Layout forAction panel configuration

339


- A.TXT - Z.TXT,-.TXT, etc. - Word List files

- IMGSOUND.EXE* - Used for Key-ClickSounds and Text-To-Speech

- SCRLCTRL.EXE - Used for Screen Controlof larger than screen keyboard configurations

- TTSAPP.EXE - Speak and Setup forText-To-Speech, required to change voiceswhen using Text-To-Speech

- TURNAWAY.EXE - Head Mouse users Appto cover screen until Exit is clicked.

OnScreen Folders (The Developer’s Kit createsnumerous sub-folders - see Dev Kit docs)

SOUNDS - OnScreen Voice & Key-Clickreplacements

WORDLISTS - OnScreen Word Lists - savedand international

OnScreen with CrossScanner Add-Ons(CrossScanner folder)

340


- XSCAN.EXE - CrossScanner

- XSCAN_S.EXE - CrossScanner Setup

- XSCANSRV.EXE - CrossScanner Support

- KEYBOARD.KMF - CrossScanner Support

- MYTCLIB.DLL - CrossScanner Support

- XTOGGLE.EXE - CrossScanner Support -Separate executable for controllingCrossScanner

- XSCAN.INI - My-T-Pen Support -Configuration File for USB Device operation

- MANIFEST.TXT - My-T-Pen Support -Reference File from Build

- HELP\*.html, HELP\IMAGES\*.png -My-T-Pen Help

CrossScanner 4.00 additional files

- XADMIN.EXE - My-T-Pen Support -Administrative setup for

341


CrossScannerLogon.DLL

- CrossScannerLogon.dll - My-T-Pen Support -Logon Interface DLL for Windows Vista

- MTS2.EXE - My-T-Soft Executable -Keyboard for Logon Interface

- MTSLIB.DLL - Support for My-T-SoftExecutable

- BABDLL.DLL - Support for My-T-SoftExecutable

- STOCK.DLL - Support for My-T-SoftExecutable

- LOGON\KEYBOARD.KBF - the KeyboardLayout for Logon (Created in Build-A-Board)

- LOGON\MACROBAT.EXE - Macro Batchprocessor for MTS2.EXE

- LOGON\KEYBRD01.KMF - DefaultKeyboard Macro File for MTS2.EXE

342


- LOGON\MAC00000.KMF - Default Macrosfor MTS.EXE

- LOGON\KEYBOARD.SML - Small layout(Build-A-Board layout)

- LOGON\KEYBOARD.MED - Mediumlayout (Build-A-Board layout)

- LOGON\KEYBOARD.LRG - Large layout(Build-A-Board layout)

- LOGON\KEYBOARD.ORG - Default layout(Original layout)

- LOGON\KEYBOARD.ZIP - Build-A-Boardlayout Project for Small keyboard

- LOGON\KBFLOGON.EXE - MTS2.EXEUtility

Note that as files are removed, the possibilitiesfor errors or operational limitations increases.Also note that a large portion of theMYTLIB.DLL are bitmaps that may not be in

343


use for particular fixed size configurations -contact IMG if a small footprint installation isrequired.

Note: The following notes indicate variousoptions for some of these files. There mayalso be additional information in AdvancedUser Notes, Operation Notes, and theInitialization File Documentation..

My-T-Pen Setup options: The???SETUP.EXE program can take a fewcommand line options. The command line"BUILD" is used when the top buttonMACRO is pressed on the Main Macropanel in My-T-Pen to automatically openSetup with the Build-A-Macro dialog.There also is a "HELPCMD" option todisplay the internal help request prior tousing the HelpInterface function from

344


IMGVERS.DLL. This is currently used asthe lookup from the MYTPEN.INI file toopen the appropriate help file from theHELP folder. The lookup table approachwas required because Microsoft hasconstantly changed preferred help formatsthrough various versions of Windows. Helpis currently available in HTML files so thesame help files can be used in the productand be made available on the productwebsite.

Installation InformationCD/DVD may contain:

SETUP.EXE - Installation Assistant todetermine platform / install files

AUTORUN.INF - AutoRun for AutoPlayCD/DVD

345


RELEASE.TXT - Release information

Located on the My-T-Pen Distribution media:

Compressed Files of the My-T-Pen InstallationFiles and:

README.TXT - For the Experienced User

LICENSE.TXT - My-T-Pen LicenseAgreement

SETUP.EXE - Setup Utility to InstallMy-T-Pen onto your Hard Drive

The IMG installer can support these options:

/? Displays a message box with info aboutoptions

/Q (Quiet install) runs a quiet install (nodialogs/user interaction)

/I (Install) runs a quiet install (no dialogs/userinteraction)

346


/U runs a quiet un-install (no dialogs/userinteraction)

/Q and /I are handled the same (customerrequested /Q)

OnScreen Add-ons

WordLists Folder - contains available WordLists

Speech Folder - Microsoft SpeechComponents, Text-To-Speech

The following information is for those userswho are curious and want to know, or wish toUninstall My-T-Pen & do not have the originaldistribution media.

There are 2 approaches to Setup, an IMGinstaller and the Windows Installer (MSI). Thereason 2 installers are available is for flexibilityand support purposes. Installing any product isa relatively easy process, but can become

347


complicated as more & more features andcapabilities are included. In any complicatedsequential process, it is inevitable that somesequence or step is not handled properly. Byusing a second approach, a verifiablecomparison based mechanism is created wherea definitive end-result of files & settings can beattained, ensuring the integrity of theinstallation steps.

Post Installation information:IMGUTIL.EXE performs various postinstallation tasks. For reference, if theinstallation media has LICENSE.LIC in thesame folder as SETUP.EXE, or in the\LICENSE folder, IMGUTIL will copy thisinto the installation folder (this is useful forevaluation and other types of licensing). Ifthe installation media has aDK??????.ZIP file in the same folder asSETUP.EXE, or in the \DEVKIT folder, itwill be copied to the installation folder.

348


For reference information, you can refer tothe INSTALL.XML used by the IMGSETUP.EXE for all post installationoperations. In Windows Installer (MSI)installs, these same actions occur.

SETUP.EXE will sense if My-T-Pen isInstalled or not. If My-T-Pen is not installed,then Install must be checked to Install theMy-T-Pen software. If My-T-Pen is alreadyinstalled, you may Un-Install by selecting theUn-Install option and selecting OK throughoutthe following screens.

The following outlines relevant informationabout the MSI (Microsoft Installer)packages, and command line options tomsiexec to manage installation with thesefiles

The MSI files are essentially databases of

349


information used by the Windows Installer toinstall the files and setup a system. Theexecutable to use is "msiexec.exe" and anyappropriate command line switches. In general,if you double click on an MSI file, Windowslaunches msiexec with the /i install option (e.g."msiexec /i prodver_target.msi").

For some basic, frequently asked for options,here are a few that can be used with thestandard IMG MSI install files (these switchesare not case sensitive):

In these examples, the msi file should bereplaced with the msi file you want to operateon

msiexec /i mts178_2000xp.msi (This installsMy-T-Soft 1.78 (using the user interface))

msiexec /i /qn mts178_2000xp.msi (Thissilently installs My-T-Soft 1.78 (with NO userinterface))

350


msiexec /x /qn mts178_2000xp.msi (Thissilently un-installs My-T-Soft 1.78 (with NOuser interface))

msiexec /a mts178_2000xp.msi /qnTARGETDIR="C:\Documents andSettings\Full User\Desktop\Test" (This silentlyinstalls My-T-Soft 1.78 (with NO userinterface) to a different target directory (fortesting, etc.))

Further notes on command line switches:

/a = Administrative install - allows use ofTARGETDIR override

/i = standard install

/x = standard un-install

/q? = user interface options

/qn = Displays no user interface.

/qb = Displays a basic user interface.

351


/qr = Displays a reduced user interface with amodal dialog box displayed at the end of theinstallation.

/qf = Displays the full user interface with amodal dialog box displayed at the end.

/qn+ = Displays no user interface, except for amodal dialog box displayed at the end.

/qb+ = Displays a basic user interface with amodal dialog box displayed at the end.

/qb- = Displays a basic user interface with nomodal dialog boxes.

For further info on msiexec.exe, refer toMicrosoft’s documentation.

Deployment InformationThis section outlines relevant information ifMy-T-Pen is going to be imaged via hard disk

352


replication, incorporated into a differentinstallation package, or handled externallyfrom the publically provided installationapproaches. Please refer to the other sections inthis chapter to have a basic level ofunderstanding regarding the files and issuesinvolved in the installation of My-T-Pen

This is a quick summary of the 3 stepstypically used to prepare a master image -for more details and reference information,see below

1. Install the software. It is recommendedyou do not run the software until after theduplication.

2. Copy in custom configuration (ifnecessary). If configured on a separatesystem, refer to My-T-Pen Setup | Filemenu | Show Config File Location forlocation of configuration files.

353


3. Copy in company/site/deployment license(if applicable) - replace LICENSE.LIC inInstallation folder.

There are 3 main areas that need to bemanaged: Deployment, Default Configuration,and Licensing

Deployment

The goal of this step is to ensure that all therequired files are on the target system. Forpractical purposes, these are simply all the filesand folders in the Installation folder, e.g.\Program Files\MYTPEN. Often, the defaultinstallation method can be used, with postinstallation management of configuration andlicense details handled after the installation.

When Imaging, the basic approach is to installthe software onto the master system, thenperform any updates to configuration andlicense files, and then DO NOT RUN the

354


software (as settings and files can be modifiedby running the software).

For actual installation (i.e. including thesoftware with an existing application), it is bestto wrap the files into the existing applicationinstallation approach. Refer to the Zip files inthe extended download area, as these are theinstallation files without any installationadd-ons - these are just the program files thatneed to be installed on a system in acompressed, single file zip format. Often it iseasiest to have a test system where normalinstallation / testing can take place, and refer tothe information here, the post installation fileson the test system, and also theMANIFEST.TXT text file (a post-buildsnapshot of the product files) in the installationfolder for file details.

Doing folder comparisons, or simply testing onthe target system (after imaging/installation), is

355


the preferred approach to ensure the softwarehas been deployed correctly.

Default Configuration

The configuration is contained in theKEYBOARD.KBF / MYTPEN.INI files (andthe MAC*.KMF files if the macro panels areused). Typically making sure the desired(correctly configured) files are the files in theinstallation folder is all that is necessary tobring a new/different default configurationwhen the software is run.

The simplest steps to create the desiredconfiguration files are to configure the softwareas desired, then use the menu to Save CurrentSettings, and also Save Position. To test,re-start the software and verify theconfiguration is correct. Then obtain theKEYBOARD.KBF / MYTPEN.INI file (referto the ConfigPath setting / or use Setup | Filemenu | Show Config File Location), and use

356


these on your master image or as part of theinstallation files.

After duplication, when a new user runs thesoftware, they will receive a copy of thesedefault configuration files from the InstallationFolder. They will then have their own personalcopy which can be configured as they desire.This is the default setting of the software(ConfigPath=1). Note there are differentapproaches that could be taken with theseconfiguration files based on the ConfigPathsetting and permissions - for example, a fixedconfiguration for all users that cannot bemodified.

Note: If secure logon is required, theLogon Utilities require a registry entry inthe WinLogon group, which is notmanaged by installation or via theconfiguration files. This option requiresproper configuration via the Logon Utilities.

357


Licensing

If using the default (retail) license scheme, youjust need to ensure that the file LICENSE.LICin the installation folder is the same asLICENSE.ORG (the as shipped license file). Ifusing any other type of license, refer to notesand instructions that were provided to you. Inmost cases, this means that you will have beenprovided a custom LICENSE.LIC file, and thismust be the file installed as LICENSE.LIC.

358

Chapter 9. OperationNotes

My-T-Pen Operation andRelease Notes

These notes document some of the knownlimitations with My-T-Pen as of this release,and other anecdotal information.

EGA UsersThe My-T-Pen Tutorial will not run in EGA,although the rest of My-T-Pen will. EGA userswill probably prefer different settings for the

359

Chapter 9. Operation Notes

default colors, since the light gray is a ditheredgray on the EGA display.

Year 2038 LimitationsIn versions 1.78 and later, any invalid date istreated as a 0 result and time and dates will notbe displayed in the System Information panelproperly when run past the year 2037. Allimportant functionality of My-T-Pen is notaffected by the date, and beyond the improperdisplay on the System Information panel, thereare no other limitations associated with anydate issue. Note that versions 1.77 and earlierwill not run when the system date is greaterthan the year 2037 (due to an invalid/nullpointer returned by the time system call).Search the internet for the "Year 2038"problem for further information. Future

360


versions will update to a more capable systemtime call well before the year 2037.

Windows Menus

1. The My-T-Pen Menu does not have anykeyboard short-cuts - My-T-Pen wasdesigned to operate entirely from apointing device.

2. For Keyboard users who want to closeMy-T-Pen, make sure the Cursor is notover the My-T-Pen display, then UseAlt-Tab to select the My-T-Pen window,and use Alt-Space to bring up theMy-T-Pen Menu for My-T-Pen, then arrowdown to select Close.

3. Keyboard Users can Minimize My-T-Pen

361


by doing the above & selecting aMinimize option.

4. If a Any Windows Menu is up in anapplication, the following limitationsaffect My-T-Pen: You Cannot MoveMy-T-Pen, or if you do, the Menu willclose. Assignments to Middle & Rightbuttons will not work! Cannot movethrough System Menu Bar Highlight ifthere are no Pop-up menus.

Keyboard NotesThe Print Screen key only captures the ActiveApplication. Maximize the Active application,then use the Print Screen Key to capture a fullscreen of the display.

The Pause Key properly generates the

362


keystrokes, and sends them to the activeapplication - the application must respond tothese keystrokes for any action or pause tooccur.

The Ctrl-Break, Ctrl-Alt-Del, and Sys-RqCombinations are not supported. However, byassigning executables to the appropriate key,certain emulations can occur. As an example,the default install includes a sample ofemulating the Ctrl-Alt-Del sequence to restartWindows.

The Alt-Tab combination works properly, but ifused from My-T-Pen the user will find thatonly the "top" 2 windows cycle. This is causedby the way Windows re-sorts windows in theWindow Manager list. The "quick-switch /select" window is not visible when the Alt-Tabcombination is generated by My-T-Pen. Sometricks can be used by creating macros withAlt-Tab-Tab, or Alt-Tab-Tab-Tab, since these

363


will select windows deeper down the list. Forexample, Alt-Tab-Tab from a macro panel willcycle through the top 3 windows in the list.

Using the Shift-F10 combo to bring upproperty & context menus operates correctly,but additional keyboard functionality is notavailable when these menus are open.

DOS Windows must operate within the "tty"class within windows, and if you have troubleusing the arrow or edit keys in a DOS Window,try turning the Num-Lock off.

Some combo boxes and password entry dialogsdo not accept keystrokes and appear to losefocus. This is because of internal operation ofthe Windows operating system and certainsecurity measures enforced to prevent"software" from comprimising the security ofpasswords, etc. Contact IMG for additionaloptions available to resolve any mission criticalrequirements.

364


KMF layouts, Windows Regional Settings,Windows Keyboard Layouts, etc. At firstglance, it would seem that a keyboard is prettystraightforward, and in most cases, it is.However, differences in physical keyboards &physical keyboard layouts, changes to thecomputer keyboard over time & differentmanufacturer approaches, along withinternational/cultural requirements, has turnedkeyboard handling into quite a complicatedaffair. In order to isolate differences betweendifferent versions of Windows, expectations ofoperation, and other issues, each supportedlayout is contained in a KMF (KeyboardMacro File). In general, these are intended tobe used in the region & with the appropriateversion of Windows.

While people do not complain that theirphysical keyboard does not change to matchthe symbols generated, when using a virtual

365


keyboard, this type of operation is expected.The key labels are also contained within theKMF file, and My-T-Pen will display the keylabels for what is generated from theappropriate Windows Keyboard Layout. If youare experiencing inconsistencies between whatis displayed and what is typed, then it isprobably related to the selected Windowskeyboard layout (see Control Panel |Keyboard). This is handled differently indifferent versions of Windows (not onlyplatforms, but international releases).

KMFs & KBFs & Build-A-Board

The original design used a KBF (KeyBoardFile) to track the physical appearance (keys,panels, size, etc.) (i.e. imagine a blankkeyboard), and a KMF (Keyboard Macro File)to track key labels & key operation. This workswell when a pure physical keyboard emulationapproach is used, since each KMF will result in

366


the display of different labels, but the relativeappearance of the shape & size & keyrelationships remains the same. For example, ifyou place physical keyboards from differentcountries next to each other, they will lookpretty much the same except for the key labels.

When Build-A-Board was designed, acompletely different approach was used,wherein each layout file would containeverything necessary in a single file, the KBF(KeyBoard File). So KBF files greater than2.00 not only contain keys, panels, & sizeinformation, but also key labels & keyoperation information.

Build-A-Macro NotesThe following double-characters are reservedin Build-A-Macro:

367


@@ - Signifies an Alt keystroke to follow

e.g. @@f = [Alt-Down]f[Alt-Up]

~~ - Signifies a Ctrl keystroke to follow

^^ - Signifies a Shift keystroke to follow

$$ - used internally for internal macro uses

%% - used to specify a virtual key, or akeyboard scan code

You may not use these character combinationsin your macros, unless you use them asoutlined. For example, you may quickly createa macro for File, New ([Alt]-F, N) by entering"@@fn" and clicking OK. However, using theReserved words in brackets is the preferredmethod.

The %% sequence has 3 options, and must beformed properly to be interpreted as an specialentry. 4 characters must follow the 2 percentsigns, spaces are not allowed. When this is

368


used, it generates both the Down and Upkeyboard messages, (press & release), similarto the entry of a specific character.

The following general form is:

%%cnnn

where c is a character signifying Keystroke orScancode or Virtual Key Code - The only validcharacters are k or s or v (case does not matter)

The nnn must be 3 decimal digits (valuesbetween 000 and 999 are valid). Note that thereare only 200+ keys on the panels and 255Virtual keys - higher numbers may causememory access errors!

The keystroke (k) numbers refer to the internalnumbering of the keyboard - see below for atable of the standard 101 keyboard.

For example, to generate a F10 keystroke, youmay use "%%k010" in the Build-A-Macro

369


portion. In most cases, using the actualcharacter will generate the appropriate scancodes internally, and this is only provided as anenhancement to provide more functionality incertain environments. Documented deficienciesinclude lack of support for the keys on theNumeric keypad panel. Additionally, by usingthe scancodes, macros can generate"keystrokes" for keys that are not present onthe physical keyboard. Because of thehardware oriented nature of the actualscancode generated by the physical keyboard,and its interpretation by the system hardwareand Windows, the scope of these issuesrequires that they be referenced in appropriatesystem manuals, and/or documentation onindustry standards.

The Virtual Key (v) passes the Windows basedVirtual key code directly through My-T-Pen.How an application interprets the virtual key

370


code is dependent on regional, language,keyboard layout, and possibly other issues.

Quick Reference:

%%knnn, e.g. %%k010 - uses the currentlyselected KMF (My-T-Pen layout) and looks upthe virtual key / scan code information for thiskey, sends down/up keystrokes

%%snnn, e.g. %%s112 - sends the scancode,but processed internally. In most cases this willbe the same virtual key code as specified, but itmay be modified.

%%vnnn, e.g. %%v112 - sends the WindowsVirtual Key (refer to Microsoft documentation)unmodified (note decimal notation, hex is notsupported).

Key# Description

0 Escape Key

1 F1

371


2 F2

3 F3

4 F4

5 F5

6 F6

7 F7

8 F8

9 F9

10 F10

11 F11

12 F12

13 Select key

14 1/!

15 2/@

16 3/#

372


17 4/$

18 5/%

19 6/^

20 7/&

21 8/*

22 9/(

23 0/)

24 -/_

25 =/+

26 Back space

27 Tab

28 Q

29 W

30 E

31 R

373


32 T

33 Y

34 U

35 I

36 O

37 P

38 [/{

39 ]/}

40 Caps Lock

41 A

42 S

43 D

44 F

45 G

46 H

374


47 J

48 K

49 L

50 ;/:

51 ’/"

52 Enter Key

53 Enter Key - make both waves 52.WAV &53.WAV

54 Shift / Left Shift

55 Z

56 X

57 C

58 V

59 B

60 N

375


61 M

62 ,/<

63 ./>

64 //?

65 Shift / Right Shift

66 \/|

67 Control / Left Control

68 Alt / Left Alt

69 Space Bar

70 Alt / Right Alt / Alt-Gr


These are on the edit panel

72 Print Screen

73 Scroll Lock

74 Pause

376


75 Insert

76 Home

77 Page Up

78 Delete

79 End

80 Page Down

81 Up Arrow

82 Left Arrow

83 Down Arrow

84 Right Arrow

These are on the Numeric keypad panel

85 CL indicator / not processed as key

86 NL indicator / not processed as key

87 SL indicator / not processed as key

88 Num Lock

377


89 /

90 *

91 -

92 7

93 8

94 9

95 +

96 4

97 5

98 6

99 1

100 2

101 3

102 Enter / =

103 0

378


104 decimal point

MemoryMy-T-Pen uses Windows Global Memory forvarious things. My-T-Pen will operate faster ifGlobal memory is physical system memory,and not swapped to disk as virtual memory.Although My-T-Pen will run in 2 MB systems,operating at 4 MB, 8 MB, or higher isrecommended.

It is normal for the My-T-Pen SystemInformation Mem:????K display to drop as youtype on My-T-Pen, or move over the My-T-Pendisplay. You may also note System Resourceschange as My-T-Pen is used.

379


Command Line OptionsPrior to Version 1.76, the only command lineoption was the ability to specify the NoSplashsetting - see NoSplash in the Iniitialization filedescription. [Path]\MYTPEN.EXE -NoSplashIn the implementation, the - (dash) is actuallythe trigger, and the notes specify NoSplashonly as a description so maintainers canunderstand what the command line means - itis not required, and in fact, can be anything aslong as there is a - (dash).

Important: In the 1.78 release, theConfigPath setting determines the defaultlocation for the user’s configuration file.These notes apply to this location. Forexample, if you are specifying a differentlayout, it must reside in the user’s specificpath, if ConfigPath=1 (default) is set in theInitialization file. See ConfigPath setting inthe Initialization file for further details on

380


location You may also reference theconfiguration files location from the Filemenu in My-T-Pen Setup

In the 1.76 release, in addition to the-NoSplash code, there is support for a /k=[file]and/or a /i=[file]. These provide an override tothe default KEYBOARD.KBF (/k) andMYTPEN.INI (/i).

There should be no spaces in the command lineentry, except to separate multiple entries.

(e.g. C:\ProgramFiles\MYTPEN\MYTPEN.EXE /k=mykbf.kbf/i=mykbf.ini -NoSplash)

The [file] specified must reside in the currentconfiguration folder, as specified by theConfigPath setting in the Initialization File(except in Terminal Server version).

381


The code checks for both upper & lowercase k(K) and i (I). The trigger is the = (equal) sign,and the code looks to the previous character forthe k or i, and the following characters up untila space or end of line for the [file].

The /k option updates the KEYBOARD.KBFfile with the specified [file]. There is no errorchecking to guarantee the file exists, or that itis a valid KBF file, so care should be usedwhen implementing these options. The [file]specified with the /k option MUST be a copyof a previously saved configuration (i.e. copyKEYBOARD.KBF to MYKBF.KBF). ABuild-A-Board 2.10 generated KBF file mayalso be used.

The /i option references the given [file] forconfiguration information, instead of thedefault MYTPEN.INI, allowing differentsettings to be used.

The implementation of the 2 options is382


internally different (because of internaldesign). The /k option for My-T-Pen actuallycopies the specified [file] toKEYBOARD.KBF, then continues on asnormal. The /i option internally references thespecified [file], leaving the defaultMYTPEN.INI file intact.

In order to ensure proper operation, certainsettings (panels, colors, etc.) are written to theINI file when the /k option is used. This is doneto ensure a match between the layoutinformation, and the details in the INI file.When the /k override in the command line isused, the following occurs:

• The specified [file] is copied toKEYBOARD.KBF

• If only the /k option is used, overlappingfeatures from the specified configuration[file] are written to the MYTPEN.INI.

383


• if both /k and /i options are used, the INIsettings will be used. Therefore, a "matched"pair should be used whenever both optionsare specified.

• If the /k is used, any other "launch" shouldprobably also require the /k option to ensurethe desired layout appears.

A "matched" pair means saving both Settingsand Position, then closing My-T-Pen. Copy theKEYBOARD.KBF to MYNEW.CFG, andMYTPEN.INI To MYNEW.INI.

In the Terminal Server version, the file mustreside in the current user’s folder

In the 1.77 release, an X/Y coordinate can alsobe used, e.g X:200 Y:300 (e.g. C:\ProgramFiles\MYTPEN\MYTPEN.EXE -NoSplashx:200 y:300)

The implementation looks for either the :(colon) character, or the = (equal sign), and

384


looks at both upper or lower case x (X), y (Y).So X=200 and Y=300 will also be recognized.Negative numbers can be used. There shouldbe no spaces in the command line except toseparate options.

In the 1.78 Release 2, a percent sign charactercan be used to position the X/Y coordinatesbased on the relative position specified (percentof total screen resolution), rather than a fixedlocation, e.g. x:34% y:70%.

The implementation requires the % characterto immediately follow the numeric value. Validvalues for X/Y must be in the range 0-100 -negative numbers or numbers over a 100 willrevert to acceptable values. The calculationincludes the size of the keyboard window, andwill keep the entire window visible, so it is adynamic calculation based on the specifiedpercent, the screen resolution, and the currentsize of the window. Some examples:

385


[C:\Program Files\MYTPEN\MYTPEN.EXEx:20% y:75%], or [C:\ProgramFiles\MYTPEN\MYTPEN.EXE -NoSplashx=75% y=50%].

Troubleshooting / Diagnosing Startup

In the 1.78 Release 2, "STARTDEBUG" can beused as the command line to display to thescreen key code points during the initializationof the software. During the program startup,there is a direct to display "Reached CodeMarker ID" code indication. As the codeprogress and reaches key points in the startupsequence, a code marker (e.g. 1003) is reached,and using a direct to display debugging feature,the code marker is directly displayed on the leftside of the system display. If there is an erroror other problem starting, the last code markerdisplay will help indicate where the codestopped, and what it was doing.

The following is the list of the codes and what386


has happened up to that point:

• 1001 In WinMain code, no system callsmade yet

• 1002 After check for Window alreadyexisting (Previous Instance)

• 1003 After Class Registered with system(Register Class) Pre Window Creation

• 1004 After Window created

• 1005 Free System Timer verified, internalvariables initialized

• 1006 DLL’s attached

• 1007 Macro file verified / loaded, Read fromINI

• 1008 If Win Logon, IMGSERV.EXElaunched (95/98/Me) - post launch (Codeafter OpenFirst=1 drop-out)

• 1009 Several system calls completed387


• 1010 After Keyboard Layout read in /prepare for paint

• 1011 System Timer set - last spot beforepaint

• 1012 After paint, pre System hooks(95/98/M3/NT)

• 1013 After System hooks set (95/98/M3/NT)

• 1014 Final call to DLL’s, last spot beforemessage loop

• 1015 After message loop, before all internalcleanup

There are also several "critical error" spots thatcan be tested easily (refer to ConfigPath settingto ensure you are working with correct filelocation!)

1) Rename MAC00000.KMF to somethingelse (KM, BAK, etc.)

388


Run My-T-Pen - it will stop after 1006 andreturn false in WinMain

2) Rename MYTPEN.INI to something else(IN, HLD, etc.)


3) Rename KEYBOARD.KBF to somethingelse (KB, HLD, etc.)


Build-A-Board SupportThe 1.76 and newer versions now support KBFfiles (KeyBoard Files) from IMG’sBuild-A-Board 2.10 or later.

389


The following notes some of the issues on howthis is implemented.

The KEYBOARD.KBF file is the KeyboardLayout file, and it determines which programwill be used to display & operate the layout.For KBF files built by Build-A-Board,MYTSOFT2.EXE will be used. For the defaultKEYBOARD.KBF, MYTPEN.EXE will beused. When MYTSOFT2.EXE is used, theMYTPEN.INI file is not referenced at all.These are the key issues to be aware of whensetting up which keyboard layout / programeach user will be presented:

There is no specific way to retrieve the layoutsbuilt by Build-A-Board into the My-T-Penfolder. Build-A-Board should be installed on adevelopment workstation or stand-alonesystem. Once the required layout(s) are built,these may be copied from the \ProgramFiles\Build-A-Board\Target\[Project] folder,

390


where [Project] is the name of theBuild-A-Board Project for the specificlayout(s).

Note that the shortcut can be used to launch aspecific layout specified via the command line,

e.g. C:\ProgramFiles\MYTPEN\MYTPEN.EXE/k=NUMERIC.KBF, or

C:\Program Files\MYTPEN\MYTPEN.EXE/k=KEYBOARD.NUM.

The specified file MUST be in same folder asthe EXE.

When MYTPEN.EXE is run, if theKEYBOARD.KBF file (or specified file via thecommand line /k=[Keyboard Layout]) is forMYTSOFT2.EXE, MYTPEN.EXE willterminate, and launch MYTSOFT2.EXE.

The license for MYTSOFT2.EXE is the same

391


as for My-T-Pen.

Refer to the Administrator Notes in the IMGLicense Manager for differences in theTerminal Server version.

My-T-Pen Button DisplayMy-T-Pen uses only three graphical icons onits buttons, the rest consist only of text. Twoimportant points must be made about this:

1. It was our intention to make My-T-Peneasy to use for all levels of computer users.Due to the sizing concerns of My-T-Pen,and the inherent problems of shrinking andgrowing graphical images, dealing onlywith text was the most reasonable solution.

2. Even though a picture may be worth a

392


thousand words, in most cases forMy-T-Pen, one will do. Also, to finalizeour point, just sit in front of an unfamiliarapplication with a graphical button bar,and quickly discern what each button does.

Hopefully, with Quick Help and the buttonname, a new user to My-T-Pen can learn thefunction of each button quickly.

Finally, since the user can build Panels,imagine the amount of extra effort required tobuild a graphical icon for each macro...

Stay tuned for Build-A-Board!

My-T-Pen Setup |Configuration | Special

To properly operate the Special Settings

393


accessible at the My-T-Pen Special HandlingScreen, you must read the details about theInitialization file below. Primarily this screenand its options are intended for advanced userswho are already familiar enough withWindows and its concepts. The settingsavailable here allow for the customization ofMy-T-Pen without the need to edit theMyTSpcl???? settings in the Initialization file.

To Add a new Window Name to the list, typethe new name, and press Enter. Then select theMy-T-Pen action on the right.

To Delete an existing Window Name, Press theDelete Key and the Press Enter.

You may return to the default settings forMyTSpcl by pressing

the Return to Default button.

You may edit the Initialization file by clickingon the "Edit" button.

394


You may return to the Installation defaults byclicking on the Return to Installation Defaultsbutton. (This will copy the MYTPEN.ORG filefrom the My-T-Pen Installation Directory tothe Windows Directory.) If you do this, wesuggest you exit My-T-Pen and restart.

Windows NotesTablet PC (Windows Vista)

The Tablet PC Input Panel interface used inWindows XP is not available in WindowsVista. My-T-Pen can be used in conjunctionwith the various Tablet PC Input Panel optionsavailable within Windows Vista.

Fast User Switching (Windows XP)

Upon a switch from or to a user session, thesoftware reacts to the

395


WM_WTSSESSION_CHANGE message byverifying the software is not minimized, andrestoring setup from the saved configuration.See the SessionChangeEnabled setting in theInitialization file.

Korean Windows, default IME (WindowsXP)

The IME creates a VK_PROCESSKEY /WM_KEYUP message when the pointingdevice does a ?BUTTONUP event, causingproblems with the building of characters fromthe Korean layout.

Sounds (Advanced Notes)External Wave File Integration

Version Specific Notes: If Sounds=1 orSounds=2 is set in the commercial

396


versions (i.e. non-Assistive Technologyversion), the following details files andnaming requirements.

For foreign or custom keyboards and otheruses, My-T-Pen allows the user to replace thepre-recorded voice descriptions of the keys.

To add your own wave file, simply record thedescription required, and then place the wavefile into the installation directory in the Soundsfolder (directory) (Default C:\ProgramFiles\MYTPEN\SOUNDS) according to thefollowing convention:

Each numbered key description should have awave file

associated with the naming convention - Key 0,the Escape

key, would be "0.WAV" - Key 1, the F1 key,

397


would be "1.WAV"

and so on up to "100.WAV", etc.

In other words, if there is a "0.WAV" file in theSounds folder, and

Voices is the selected Sounds option, then the"0.WAV" file

will be played whenever the Escape key ispressed on My-T-Pen.

If the Sound option is Key-Click and there is a"KEYCLICK.WAV" in

the Sounds folder, then this wave will beplayed whenever a key on

My-T-Pen is pressed.

Key# Description

0 Escape Key

1 F1

2 F2398


3 F3

4 F4

5 F5

6 F6

7 F7

8 F8

9 F9

10 F10

11 F11

12 F12

13 Select key

14 1/!

15 2/@

16 3/#

17 4/$

399


18 5/%

19 6/^

20 7/&

21 8/*

22 9/(

23 0/)

24 -/_

25 =/+

26 Back space

27 Tab

28 Q

29 W

30 E

31 R

32 T

400


33 Y

34 U

35 I

36 O

37 P

38 [/{

39 ]/}

40 Caps Lock

41 A

42 S

43 D

44 F

45 G

46 H

47 J

401


48 K

49 L

50 ;/:

51 ’/"

52 Enter Key

53 Enter Key - make both waves 52.WAV &53.WAV

54 Shift / Left Shift

55 Z

56 X

57 C

58 V

59 B

60 N

61 M

402


62 ,/<

63 ./>

64 //?

65 Shift / Right Shift

66 \/|


68 Alt / Left Alt

69 Space Bar

70 Alt / Right Alt / Alt-Gr


These are on the edit panel

72 Print Screen

73 Scroll Lock

74 Pause

75 Insert

403


76 Home

77 Page Up

78 Delete

79 End

80 Page Down

81 Up Arrow

82 Left Arrow

83 Down Arrow

84 Right Arrow

These are on the Numeric keypad panel

85 CL indicator / not processed as key

86 NL indicator / not processed as key

87 SL indicator / not processed as key

88 Num Lock

89 /

404


90 *

91 -

92 7

93 8

94 9

95 +

96 4

97 5

98 6

99 1

100 2

101 3

102 Enter / =

103 0

104 decimal point

405

Chapter 10. InitializationFile Documentation(MYTPEN.INI)

My-T-Pen uses MYTPEN.INI to maintainvarious options and configuration settings.Depending on the version of Windows andsettings, there may be one file per user or ashared file for all users.

My-T-Pen Initialization FileDocumentation(MYTPEN.INI)

Listed below are settings and information for

406

Chapter 10. Initialization File Documentation(MYTPEN.INI)

specific applications that require specialactions by My-T-Pen, along with theConfiguration settings for My-T-Pen. TheBrackets [ ] denote the area in theMYTPEN.INI file, or the application namewhere special consideration is required. Anylines starting with a semi-colon ( e.g. ; ) arecomments and detailed information not foundin the MYTPEN.INI file.

IMPORTANT NOTE: This documentationstretches back over 16 years, covers 4major releases of Windows families, andover a dozen specific Windows versions.Due to changes in the operatingenvironment, certain settings andconfiguration options have becomeobsolete. In most cases, these remaindocumented and notated as obsolete. Forcustomer support (and the sometimesextremely specific customer needs), themultitude of options & flexibility has

407


become a crucial aspect of this software.Because of this, every last capabilityneeds to be documented somewhere, andthis chapter is used for that purpose.

All Settings are the default Settings ofMy-T-Pen.

[Configuration]

The following is the default configuration forMy-T-Pen at Install.

(Added in 1.78)

ConfigPath=1

This setting determines where theconfiguration files will be located.ConfigPath=0 means the configuration fileswill be in the installation folder - there are noper user configuration files with this setting anduser permissions must allow read-write access

408


to at least the KEYBOARD.KBF andMYTPEN.INI, or users must run with a fixed(read-only) configuration. When ConfigPath=1or ConfigPath=2, each user will have their ownconfiguration files. If ConfigPath=3, these arein shared among all users in a public location.

Note that the MYTPEN.INI file in theinstallation folder determines the location ofnew users’ configuration files, and if anadministrator changes this after My-T-Pen hasalready been used by other users, their existingindividual configuration files will NOT betransferred to the new location. What willhappen is the software will be unable to findconfiguration files for the current user in thecurrent specified path, and a copy of thecurrent configuration files will be used as astarting point for this new location.

This is a breakdown by Operating System ofthe specific locations used - [User] indicates

409


the actual user logged onto the system, and[ProductDir] indicates the Product’s directoryname, e.g. the MYTPEN folder.

ConfigPath Locations

ConfigPath: 0Windows 2000/XP: \ProgramFiles\[ProductDir]Windows Vista: \Program Files\[ProductDir]

ConfigPath: 1Windows 2000/XP: C:\Documents andSettings\[User]\Application Data\InnovationManagement Group\[ProductDir]Windows Vista:C:\Users\[User]\AppData\Roaming\InnovationManagement Group\[ProductDir]

ConfigPath: 2Windows 2000/XP: C:\Documents andSettings\[User]\Local Settings\Application

410


Data\Innovation ManagementGroup\[ProductDir]Windows Vista:C:\Users\[User]\AppData\Local\InnovationManagement Group\[ProductDir]

ConfigPath: 3Windows 2000/XP: C:\Documents andSettings\All Users\ApplicationData\Innovation ManagementGroup\[ProductDir]Windows Vista: C:\ProgramData\InnovationManagement Group\[ProductDir]

Contention=1

The Contention setting is the global oroverriding setting - This must be set to 1 forthe individual application settings to berecognized by My-T-Pen - if you wishMy-T-Pen to remain over all applications, setContention=0 - you will need to be careful incertain applications as noted in the individual

411


application settings below. This is referred to"React to Dialogs..." in My-T-Pen Setup,additional details can be found in the Help forthe Operation Options dialog.

(Obsolete since 1.70)

InterfaceApproach=1

My-T-Pen has several internal strategies tointerface with other windows in the Windowsenvironment. It is believed that the strategyindicated by InterfaceApproach=1 is the bestfor all windows applications. This is obsoletefor all 32-bit versions. This is left for referencepurposes & a reminder that the software stillhas internal options regarding the interfaceapproach.

OpenFirst=1

OpenAbout=0

OpenFirst is set at installation to automatically

412


open with the My-T-Pen splash screen and godirectly into the My-T-Pen Welcome. This isset to 0 once My-T-Pen runs the first time. It isnot used again. If OpenAbout=1, My-T-Penwill Open with the My-T-Pen Splash Screeninstead of the quick My-T-Pen logo. Itprimarily is a left over from the developmentstages of the opening logo, but was left in forthose user’s who don’t mind or prefer thelonger opening.

OpenCentered=0

If OpenCentered=1, then the My-T-Penwindow will be centered and placed in thelower portion of the screen (based on thecurrent resolution). This overrides the positionsetting saved in the KBF file. Also, this will setOpenCentered=0, making this a one-time usesetting. When set, the internal logic centershorizontally based on the System metrics(GetSystemMetrics API) for FullScreen X, and

413


lower part of the screen based on FullScreen Y(single monitor). This can be useful forexternally controlling opening position byoverriding the KBF positioning, for testing, orfor first-open / display situations.

NoSplash=0

If NoSplash=0, then the splash (openingintroduction) screens are used at Startup ofMy-T-Pen. If NoSplash=1, then the introscreens are not used, and My-T-Pen opens aspreviously configured. This option can beinitiated at run-time / via a shortcut by addingthe -NoSplash option to the command line.(e.g. "C:\ProgramFiles\MYTPEN\MYTPEN.EXE -NoSplash")

TypeMatic=1

StartDelay=500

KeyDelay=20

414


The TypeMatic settings are for automatictyping when you hold down a key onMy-T-Pen. Set TypeMatic=1 if you wish thistype of action, or set TypeMatic=0 if you wishto disable automatic typing. The StartDelayand KeyDelay are only meaningful ifTypeMatic=1. StartDelay is the delay inmilliseconds a key must be held down beforethe TypeMatic action begins. The default is 500milliseconds or 1/2 a second. The KeyDelay isthe delay between successive keystrokes sent.The KeyDelay setting is also in milliseconds.Note that the enable/disable key optionsoverride the typematic setting. Note also thatTypeMatic is available in My-T-Pen Setup |Configuration | Operation Options.

Cursor=2100

This is the current cursor that My-T-Pen useswhile over the My-T-Pen Keyboard display.Valid settings are as follows:

415


Small Right Hand is 2000

Small Left Hand is 2020

Small Right Hand with Int’l "Shift" symbol =2040

Small Left Hand with Int’l "Shift" symbol =2060

Large Right Hand is 2100

Large Left Hand is 2120

Large Right Hand with Int’l "Shift" symbol =2140

Large Left Hand with Int’l "Shift" symbol =2160

Standard Arrow = 2600

CrossHairs = 2620

Dot = 2640

Invisible / clear = 2660

416


TrapDialAKeyCursor=1

Note - the name is a hold-over from theDial-A-Key option. In My-T-Pen, this is thesetting that indicates whether the cursor will bedisplayed over the Magnifier panel. IfTrapDialAKeyCursor=1, the cursor will bedisplayed over the magnified image. IfTrapDialAKeyCursor=0, the cursor will not beshown.

Icon=3100

This is the My-T-Pen Icon to that My-T-Penwill use when My-T-Pen minimizes to an icon.Valid Settings are: Fixed Icons, My-T-Penlogos, Keyboard images, etc. 3000, 3001,3002, 3003, 3004, 3005, 3006, 3007 My-T-PenText Icons (diff’t colors) 3050, 3051, 3052,3053, 3054, 3055, 3056 Animating icons 3100,3104, 3108

(Obsolete)

417


IconAnimate=0

NOTE: This is a holdover from the originalWindows 3.0 release. For all Windows versionsbeyond 1995, this should be 0. The Iconsettings are for which Icon My-T-Pen displaysupon minimizing to an icon, and if the iconshould animate. NOTE: Some icons are notmeant to animate, so if IconAnimate=1 theonly animation action will be to flash theborder. The IconAnimate setting is used to tellMy-T-Pen to animate the icon if it is ananimating icon and IconAnimate=1. SetIconAnimate=0 to disable icon animation.

(Obsolete)

IconOnTop=1

NOTE: This is a holdover from the originalWindows 3.0 release. For all Windows versionsbeyond 1995, this is not used. If IconOnTop=1,the Icon will remain as a topmost window, so

418


the icon will always be visible. IfIconOnTop=0, the My-T-Pen icon will be anormal window, and will fall behind otherwindows.

MinimizeToButton=1

If MinimizeToButton=1, My-T-Pen willminimize to a button (title bar button) insteadof an Icon, and ignore other Icon settings. IfMinimizeToButton=0, My-T-Pen willminimize to an Icon (Taskbar button). IfMinimizeToButton=2, then the Tray Icon willbe used. If MinimizeToButton=3, thenMy-T-Pen will minimize to a movable/sizablewindow.

CaptionWatch=0

ButtonOffsetX=0

ButtonOffsetY=0

These are special settings for the Minimize to

419


Button option. Since there may be otherwindows that use the top left portion of thecaption bar, the following settings may helpalleviate any conflicts:

In Windows 95 & greater, the right side of thecaption bar is used - negative values may beused to adjust towards the left. IfCaptionWatch=1, My-T-Pen will sense if thereis a Window other than the window that ownsthe caption bar in the area that the My-T-Penbutton will be placed. My-T-Pen will thenmove to the right of the Window that is alreadyin the caption bar. If the above does not workfor your application, you may add in buttonoffsets to move the top-left position of thebutton - these will be added to the originalposition of the button and the My-T-Pen buttonwill then be placed at the offset.

(Added in 1.76)

ButtonOverrideW=0420


ButtonOverrideH=0

By default, the button sizes to the height of thecaption bar (title bar) using the GDI callStretchBlt. A customer requested the ability tomodify the width of the button for touchscreenusers, so these settings have been added toallow full customization of the displayedbutton (when minimize to the button state isselected). For both ButtonOverrideW (width),and ButtonOverrideH (height), if set to 0, thenthe default calculations occur (e.g. fixed width,size height to caption bar). If ButtonOverrideWis non-zero, then the entered size (in pixels) isused for the width. If ButtonOverrideH isnon-zero, then the entered size (in pixels) isused for the height. DO NOT USE negativevalues - your button will not appear! (Select analternative minimize option to get at My-T-Penif this occurs). Because the Stretch Bitmap callis used to fill out the display, the button display

421


may be distorted, especially as you get furtherfrom the default size.

(Added in 1.78)

ButtonOverrideX=-20000

ButtonOverrideY=-20000

By default, the button positions itself on theactive window’s caption bar (title bar). Acustomer requested the ability to force theminimized button to always position itself inone place on the screen. When these values arepresent in the INI file (or any value greater than-20000), then the entered ButtonOverrideX and/ or ButtonOverrideY values will be used whenminimized to a button. For example, ifButtonOverrideX=754 andButtonOverrideY=0, then the button willalways position itself on the upper right (800 x600) of the screen, ignoring the active window.These settings are independent internally, but

422


in practical usage they need to specificy a fixedscreen position.

(Added in 1.78)

ButtonIgnoreWindowXY=0,0

If this entry exists in the INI file, then thisestablishes a lower limit (if both the x,y entriesare non-0), then these values will be used as acheck against the active window, and if thewindow’s size (X and Y) is less than the entriesspecified here, then the button will NOTposition on this window. This was requested bya customer to prevent the button from movingto small display windows. For example, ifButtonIgnoreWindowXY=100,100 than anywindow less than 100 x 100 will be ignoredwhen determining the active window. Note thatBOTH entries are used, so if a window is 200 x50, then it would not be ignored, since the Xvalue is not less than 100.

423


(Added in 1.78)

ButtonSingleMonitorLimit=0

If ButtonSingleMonitorLimit=1, then a call toGetSystemMetrics(SM_CMONITORS) iscalled and if the system has only 1 monitor,then the button will not be allowed to moveoff-screen (for example, if the active windowhas a title bar off screen, or the window iswider than the screen). TheButtonOffsetX/ButtonOffsetY entries are usedin the calculation, but the screen will still limitthe location of the minimized button. IfButtonSingleMonitorLimit=2, then the singlescreen limit will be used, regardless of howmany monitors in the system.

BackgroundColor=6201

The BackgroundColor setting is the KeyboardBackground color that paints the backgroundof the Keyboard & Edit & Magnifier panels.

424


Valid settings are as follows:

6200 - 6215 Solid Colors

6216 - 6230 Various DitheredGrays/White/Black

Note: The dithered colors may paintimproperly on some My-T-Pen sizes.

SlideOption=1

If SlideOption=1 My-T-Pen panels will slideout & snap in.

If SlideOption=0 My-T-Pen panels will snapout & snap in.

Size=9

This is the My-T-Pen display size. Valid sizesare 1-12 if set manually.

Version 1.67 added infinite sizes - valuesgreater than 12 should not be handled here -use the SzUp & SzDn in the software to

425


change sizes larger than 12. The softwarehandles the transition from 1 to 9, 10 to 12, 12to 13, and 13 and larger differently. The sizingissues arise from maintaining the aspect ratio,visual aesthetics, and internal coding thatshould be reworked. At some point, it may be.As it exists, arbitrarily changing the sizes inincrements greater than 1 can cause problems,especially if crossing the transition from theoriginal sizes (i.e. 1-12) and larger sizes. It isrecommended that all sizing be handled withinthe normal operation of the software. Refer tothe Devevloper’s Kit utilities, such as Copyand Configure MTS, that can arbitrarily changethe size configuration of My-T-Pen on-the-flyfor sizing flexibility.

SizeMax=12 (example)

SizeMin=8 (example)

When these values are present, they determineboundaries where the user cannot change the

426


size below SizeMin or above SizeMax. Whenthe size is at the SizeMin, the SzDn key andmenu options to size down are disabled, andwhen the size is at the SizeMax, the SzUp andmenu options to size up are disabled. Thesecan be used together, or independently. Thesesettings were requested by a customer to keep aset range of sizes available to the user, but notlet the user stray too far from the preferredworking sizes.

Center=1

RestorePosition=0

The Center setting is used to automaticallycenter My-T-Pen on the screen if it isrepositioned due to an window conflict. SetCenter=1 if you wish to center My-T-Pen whenit is moved, or Set Center=0 if you wishMy-T-Pen stay in the same horizontal positionon the screen. If RestorePosition=1, My-T-Penwill remember the screen position it was at

427


when it was forced to move due to a windowconflict, and then restore that position when theconflicting window is no longer the activewindow. If RestorePosition=0, My-T-Pen willremain at its new position when forced to movedue to a window conflict. Note: Windowconlicts are set below in the Class Settings forwindow Classes & Actions. Note: Most usersfelt that it was less annoying for My-T-Pen toremain at its new position, than to constantlyjump back & forth.

TwoButtonMouse=1

If TwoButtonMouse=1, then My-T-Pen willignore the middle button, regardless of theMouseButtons settings below, and My-T-PenSetup will not allow the user to change themiddle button setting. If TwoButtonMouse=0My-T-Pen & My-T-Pen Setup will assumethere is a 3 button Mouse, and that the properdrivers are installed for use within Windows.

428


IMPORTANT: My-T-Pen will not work withthe middle button if the proper drivers are notinstalled. The default IBM PS/2, Microsoftdrivers do not support the middle button, andeven some drivers of 3 button mice do notsupport the middle button within Windows.Check with your mouse manufacturer to obtainthe proper drivers if you have a 3 button mouseand Windows does not recognize the middlebutton.

Keyboard=1

This is the Keyboard description file My-T-Penuses to define the 101 Key panel layout. The104 layouts start in the 100+ range, so adding100 to the 2-digit listing refers to the 104 keylayouts, e.g. 101 is the US Standard 104 keylayout. Over the 16 years & different Windowsversions, our support team would be notifiedthat a particular layout was not correct in acertain version of Windows. Since with any

429


particular release, multiple versions ofWindows are supported, and it was thoughtthat a keyboard layout would remainconsistent, changes to the layouts were deemedproblematic - for example, if it was changedfor Windows version X, this change wouldcause problems in older versions of Windows.So certain layouts are tagged "Old" to reflectthat it might be required for an older version ofWindows. The values 1-96, and 101-196, andany 200+ entries listed are valid, and arerelated as follows:

01 = U.S. Standard, 02 = U.S. DvorakStandard, 03 = U.S. Dvorak Left-Handed, 04 =U.S. Dvorak Right-Handed, 05 = U.S.My-T-Easy (ABC) Alphabetic Keyboard, 06 =Belgian (comma), 07 = British, 08 = CanadianMulti-lingual, 09 = Danish, 10 = Dutch, 11 =Finnish, 12 = French, 13 = French Canadian,14 = German, 15 = Icelandic, 16 = Italian, 17 =

430


Latin American, 18 = Norwegian, 19 =Portuguese, 20 = Spanish, 21 = Swedish, 22 =Swiss French, 23 = Swiss German, 24 = U.S.International, 25 = Hungarian (Old), 26 =Belgian (period), 27 = Arabic, 28 = Belarusian,29 = Bulgarian, 30 = Bulgarian (Latin), 31 =Croatian, 32 = Czech (Old), 33 = Czech(Qwerty), 34 = Estonian, 35 = Greek, 36 =Hebrew, 37 = Hungarian, 38 = Irish, 39 =Latvian, 40 = Latvian (Latin), 41 = Polish(Old), 42 = Romanian, 43 = Russian (old), 44= Slovak, 45 = Slovak (Qwerty), 46 = Turkish(F type), 47 = Turkish (Q type), 48 = Spanish(Mexico), 49 = U.S. Fazekas, 50 = U.S.Chubon, 51 = Slovenian, 52=Japanese, 53 =Chinese, 54 = Korean, 55 = French (Belgian),56 = French (Luxembourg), 57 = German(Austrian), 58 = German (Leichtenstein), 59 =German (Luxembourg), 60 = Spanish(Argentina), 61 = Spanish (Bolivia), 62 =Spanish (Chile), 63 = Spanish (Columbia), 64

431


= Spanish (Costa Rica), 65 = Spanish(Dominican Republic), 66 = Spanish(Ecuador), 67 = Dutch (Belgian), 68 = Dutch(Netherlands), 69 = Italian (Switzerland), 70 =Norwegian (Bokmal), 71 = Portuguese(Brazilian), 72 = Spanish (Guatemala), 73 =Spanish (El Salvador), 74 = Spanish(Honduras), 75 = Spanish (Modern Sort), 76 =Spanish (Nicaragua), 77 = Spanish (Panama),78 = Spanish (Paraguay), 79 = Spanish (Peru),80 = Spanish (Puerto Rico), 81 = Spanish(Uruguay), 82 = Spanish (Venezuela), 83 =English (Australian), 84 = English (NewZealand), 85 = English (Jamaica), 86 = English(United Kingdom), 87 = Chinese (Cangjie), 88= Canadian Multilingual, 89 = Polish, 90 =Polish Programmer, 91 = Thai, 92 = U.S.Plum, 93 = Russian (Cyrillic), 94 = Danish(ABC), 95 = U.S. (Numpad Enter), 96 =Czech, 97 = Belgian (period), 101-197 are the104 key layouts matching the above, 200 = 104

432


British (1st alternate), 201 = 104 British (2ndalternate), 202 = 104 Hebrew (Alt.), 203 = 104Chinese (Zhuyin) (Alt.), 204 = 104 Arabic(Alt.)

DriveTypesToCheck=1

DefaultDrive=C

CheckFloppies=0

These values are for the System Informationdisplay.

DriveTypesToCheck can take 4 values, whichhave the following meanings:

0 = Do not check Removable Drive Types, orNetwork Drives

1 = Do not check Removable Drive Types,Check Network Drives

2 = Check Removable Drive Types, but Do NotCheck Network Drives

433


3 = Check Both Removable & Network Drives

DefaultDrive is the drive letter of the defaultdrive that My-T-Pen displays in the SystemInformation Panel.

Valid letters are A through Z.

CheckFloppies=0 means that My-T-Pen willnot look at drive letters A or B. IfCheckFloppies=1, My-T-Pen will look atFloppy Drives A and B.

CheckMinMax=1

If CheckMinMax=1, My-T-Pen will check forthe existence of the Minimize Button &Maximize Button on the Caption Bar of theWindow before Minimizing or Maximizing thewindow when MIN or MAX is used on theWindows Controls Panels. SetCheckMinMax=0 to bypass this check. This isimportant for custom window displays that donot use the standard windows controls for

434


Minimize and Maximize.

ClassWatch=0

WindowWatch=0

KeyWatch=0

SetActiveWindowWatch=0

SkipTopMostAction=0

These settings can be used for debuggingcertain aspects of the operation withinWindows, or which specific key numberscorrespond to key operation on My-T-Pen

These settings are for individuals experiencedwith Windows Environment and windowclasses & names, and Windows programming,or at least its concepts.

The ClassWatch & WindowWatch settings arefor watching the Class Name & Window Nameof the active Window. These primarily are forfinding this information so that the Special

435


Settings & Class Settings can be modified forMy-T-Pen to work with other applicationWindows. If ClassWatch=1 My-T-Pen willdisplay on the upper portion of the display theClass Name of the active window. IfWindowWatch=1 My-T-Pen will display on theupper portion of the display the Window Nameof the active window. Once this informationhas been determined, the ClassWatch &WindowWatch should be set back to 0.

KeyWatch=1 will display the keys affected bythe enable/disable key option - this will displaythe number + 1000. Only the alpha and editpanel keys are displayed. This is useful ifbuilding a different keyboard mapping, andneed to identify which key number is which.

SetActiveWindowWatch=1 will display whichinternal call is being used to call theSetForegroundWindow API from My-T-Pen.This can determine which area of code is

436


responsible for this API call. For more detailson this, refer to Microsoft’s documentation onthe SetForegroundWindow API function, andthe changes that occurred in Windows 2000with regards to changing the keyboard focusand active (i.e. foreground) windowprogrammatically. This entry also serves adouble duty, and it displays a code identifyingthe internal call used to save data to theKEYBOARD.KBF file.

If SkipTopMostAction=1, this bypasses theinternal code that tries to bring My-T-Pen tothe topmost position during normal operation.In general, having an on-screen keyboard fallbehind other windows is not productive.However, there can be conflicts and issues ifmultiple windows are trying to maintain thetopmost position in the Windows internalwindow manager list. Also, it has been thegeneral consensus that menus in the system

437


remain above the on-screen keyboard. Duringoperation from a pen, touchscreen, or otherpointing device, selecting menu selections iseasier, more intuitive, and more effectivedirectly from the pointing device, rather thanindirectly from the on-screen keyboard. Youcan refer to the MenuClasses entry below forMenu interface options. For debuggingpurposes, or to see how My-T-Pen will operateby bypassing this window interface code, youcan set SkipTopMostAction=1.

SetupSaveSettings=0

(The next 2 are obsolete)

SetupAutoLoad=0

SetupAutoRun=0

These settings are for My-T-Pen Setup to trackwhether My-T-Pen has been configured forthese special settings. They are used as follows:

438


The SetupSaveSettings is used if My-T-Pen isrunning. If SetupSaveSettings=1, My-T-Penwill update its configuration file whenMy-T-Pen Setup is closed. This will ensure thatMy-T-Pen will open with the currentconfiguration. This is default set to 0 so theuser can become familiar with all of theMy-T-Pen configuration options beforedeciding which configuration My-T-Pen willopen with. If the user is confused as to whyMy-T-Pen does not open the way they left it,then this setting should be set to 1. NOTE: Thiswill only work for configuration changes madein My-T-Pen Setup. SetupAutoLoad &SetupAutoRun are used internally to trackwhether My-T-Pen has modified the WIN.INIfile "load" and "run" options.

The SetupAutoLoad and SetupAutoRun havebeen disabled since version 1.32 because ofuser confusion. Most users use the StartUp

439


group, or understand the Load and Run settingsin the WIN.INI. They remain because they maybe reworked and included in a future release.

EnableOperator=0

Password=5F626274

(OnScreen Note - The EnableOperator settingis used for the Basic & Advanced modes inOnScreen - the Password andSupervisor/Operator mode are not available inOnScreen)

The Supervisor/Operator mode has beenincluded, but it is default off. IfEnableOperator=1, then My-T-Pen opens inthe Operator mode. This disables theMy-T-Pen Tool button, and the My-T-PenMenu button, and requires a password to beentered before My-T-Pen Setup is opened. Thiseffectively limits the Operator to one (saved)configuration, but allows a supervisor to

440


modify or change the My-T-Pen configurationif necessary.

Note: The password is encrypted - the defaultentry above corresponds to "PASS". TheMy-T-Pen Control Panel should NOT beavailable for use by the Operator, as this wouldallow the operator to modify the My-T-Penconfiguration. Note that once the Setuppassword has been entered, My-T-Pen operatesin the supervisor mode. Close both Setup &My-T-Pen, then restart My-T-Pen to re-enablethe operator mode.

OperatorNoMin=0

(OnScreen note - this requires theSupervisor/Operator mode and therefore is notavailable in OnScreen)

The default Operator mode still allows theoperator to minimize My-T-Pen. To Disablethis option, set OperatorNoMin=1, and the

441


minimize button will no longer function,disabling all of the buttons on the Tool Bar.

ControlLogo=0

(OnScreen note: This is not supported)

When in operator mode, it is sometimesdesirable to remove the visual display of thebuttons on the Tool Bar. When ControlLogo=1,an optional Bitmap file will be loaded anddisplayed over the Tool Bar buttons. This is adeveloper enhancement, and the followingdetails assume a general understanding ofWindows:

Requirements for ControlLogo=1

In the installation or user directory specified byConfigPath, 12 bitmap files corresponding tothe 12 sizes of My-T-Pen need to be created:

NAME, WIDTH IN PIXELS, HEIGHT INPIXELS

442


LOGO01.BMP, 12, 46

LOGO02.BMP, 15, 58

LOGO03.BMP, 18, 70

LOGO04.BMP, 21, 82

LOGO05.BMP, 24, 94

LOGO06.BMP, 27, 106

LOGO07.BMP, 30, 118

LOGO08.BMP, 33, 130

LOGO09.BMP, 36, 142

LOGO10.BMP, 47, 190

LOGO11.BMP, 62, 250

LOGO12.BMP, 83, 322

These files could be created via PaintBrush, orany other tool that creates bitmaps. Only16-color bitmaps are recommended because ofmemory & speed issues, but higher resolutions

443


should operate satisfactorily. However, only16-color bitmaps are guaranteed to work. If nobitmap file is present for the current size, thenno buttons are displayed, and a blackbackground appears. Sample/template bitmapsmay be downloaded via IMG’s Web site athttp://www.imgpresents.com/imgdev.htm

Prior to the 1.78 release, the installation pathwas the only possible location. In the original1.78 release, this actually used the location ofthe user’s configuration, e.g. the path based onthe ConfigPath entry. In 1.78 Release 2, thefollowing logic is used: The location specifiedby the ConfigPath entry is used, and if the logobitmap file does not exist, the installationfolder is tried. This allows more flexibility, sothat different users can have different customlogos, or a machine level setting can be usedby placing the logo bitmaps in the installationfolder. This can also allow a specific user to

444


override the default logos.

Editor=NOTEPAD.EXE

ControlPanel=CONTROL.EXE

ControlPanelKeyboard=rundll32.exeshell32.dll,Control_RunDLL main.cpl @1,1

These are the default settings for My-T-PenSetup. Editor is the Executable used to modifythe MYTPEN.INI file accessed fromMy-T-Pen Setup, Configuration, Special.ControlPanel is the Windows Control Panelaccessed by My-T-Pen Setup, Keyboards.ControlPanelKeyboard is the WindowsKeyboard Layout Applet for selecting thecurrent keyboard layout that is in use. Thesemay be changed if relevant for the WindowsConfiguration in use.

InstallPath=C:\%PROGRAMFILESDIR%\MYTPEN

This is created at Installation time to signify

445


the chosen InstallPath. If you need to moveMy-T-Pen, we suggest you Un-Install, and thenre-install My-T-Pen to the new path.

ShowKeys=111111111111111111111111111111...

This setting indicates which keys are visiblefor the standard keyboard (Alpha) panel. TheEsc key is key 0 and the count increases fromleft to right, row by row. A 1 indicates that thekey is visible, and a 0 indicates that the keywill not be painted, and not accessible.

AllowFrameMove=1

This is for controlled applications, or wherethere may be extraneous movement caused bythe touchscreen driver. If AllowFrameMove=1then any non-key area will trigger the moveMy-T-Pen action via click & drag. IfAllowFrameMove=0, then it will not bepossible to move My-T-Pen via the selectedbutton click. My-T-Pen must be moved via a

446


secondary button selection (My-T-Pen Setup,Mouse Buttons) or by an external application.

VirtualPointer=1

If VirtualPointer=0, then the default action ofMy-T-Pen for button clicks and moves is inuse. This setting is best for standard systemhardware such as the mouse, trackball,touchscreen, or pen. Set VirtualPointer=1 ifsoftware control for the mouse cursor (pointer),or other devices are in use. If there are anyproblems experienced while moving theMy-T-Pen window using a click, drag, release,then VirtualPointer=1 may also be tried.

SingleKeyPerClick=0

This setting is used to distinguish the operationof My-T-Pen for clicks. The default action(SingleKeyPerClick=0) is to act exactly like aphysical mechanical spring key, where a downclick; drag off motion will generate a

447


keystrokes (i.e. once the finger is dragged offthe key, it will bounce up and this will generatea keystroke). If SingleKeyPerClick=1, thenonly the key that was pointed to during thedown click will be generated, even if the cursoris dragged onto adjacent keys or other parts ofthe My-T-Pen window. If the cursor is draggedoff of the My-T-Pen window while this settingis on, then the key-up event will occur, and thekeystroke will be generated. It is recommendedthat the Typematic setting be set off ifSingleKeyPerClick is set on to disable multiplekeystrokes of the same "down" key.

BorderNoHit=0

This setting is used to identify pixels aroundthe edge of the keys (top, left, bottom, right)that will not be used to identify a key press.Since the setting is in pixels, the actual valueswill differ between the 12 sizes available. Asetting of 6 for My-T-Pen size 8 will create a

448


noticeable border. Valid values are from 0 to100. Note that a pixel value larger than the 1/2the key size in pixels will result in an unusableconfiguration, and values larger than the keymay create software errors in internalcalculations.

ForceUnHook=0

The ForceUnHook option toggles an internalvariable that is used to track whether thesystem journal hooks should be set at all times,or only when the cursor is over a typing panel.The primary reason for this is to test / resolvepotential conflicts with other softwareapplications.

Note: Because of internal operation of thevariable, it is opposite to the displayed settingin Operation Options, e.g. ForceUnHook=0results from Track Pointing Device input at alltimes being set On (checked), andForceUnHook=1 results from Track Pointing

449


Device input at all times being set Off (cleared)

1.70 notes: This has taken on a strongermeaning with the 1.70 release. We have foundthat only a few non-mouse drivers trulyemulate the mouse driver functionality. In orderto support touchscreen, pen, and non-mousedrivers that do not put sufficient delays (and letother window processes run) between the moveand click events, the system hooks Always on(i..e. Track Pointining Device Input at alltimes) is required to handle focus issues in allpre-Win 2000 versions of Windows. In general,a mouse cannot generate a click until it ismoved into position (generatingWM_MOUSEMOVE messages over the targetwindow) - My-T-Pen uses these messages toset System hooks in preparation for thepossible WM_?BUTTONDOWN messages, toprevent the focus switching events. When atouchscreen, pen, or other non-mouse driver

450


moves & sends click events without a delay orrelease to other window processes running(part of the pseudo- multitasking required byproperly written windows programs),My-T-Pen cannot prepare for the focus shiftingevents. "Click on release" settings in the drivermay alleviate the undesirable results, orleaving these hooks Always on can also makefor more desirable operation. A great deal ofeffort was made to resolve the focus issueswithout the use of these system hooks, but onlythrough the use of these could seamlessoperation occur throughout all windowsapplications & input situations. If problemsarise where the system hooks settings causesMy-T-Pen to become unresponsive, settingTrack Pointing Device Input at all times offmay resolve this situation, and investigatingoptions within the pointing device driver(touchscreen, pen, etc.) may be helpful.

451


2 additional notes

1) Windows 2000 and above do not require theuse of system hooks, so this setting is notrelevant (and the situations described above donot apply)

2) Try My-T-Pen on the system with an actualmouse device - if the problems do not occur,please contact the device driver manufacturerand inform them that their pointing devicedriver does not emulate a mouse properly.

NoHooksEver=0

This is the setting called Alternate VirtualInterface in My-T-Pen Setup In Windows2000/XP, there is no need for the systemhooks, and this setting is automatically enabledwhen running in Windows 2000/XP. In testingwith older and assistive technology devices &software, it was found that some of theserequire this setting (95/98/Me/NT). If you

452


experience any typing difficulties & a generalnon-responsiveness from My-T-Pen, you maytry NoHooksEver=1 (Alternate VirtualInterface set On).

(This is obsolete)

RunAddFontResource=0

This was added to remove the call to theAddFontResource Windows API for Windows95 / 98. On certain systems, the delay inducedby Windows during this call caused problemsin other programs / Windows during startup.

Since it is not required if the software wasproperly installed, it was removed in version1.61. It still is called if run in Windows 3.1. SetRunAddFontResource=1 to force this callduring startup in Windows 95 / 98. Thissettings has no effect for Windows 3.1.

KeyboardUpdate=0

453


This setting is used as a flag when a keyboardlayout is modified in Setup to indicate that thecharacter set, AltGr status, and lowercasedisplay setting should be read from the KMFfile. It is managed automatically through Setup,but if keyboard layouts are modified manually,it may be wise to set this to 1 prior to runningMy-T-Pen.

KeyboardFontBase=MyTMouse

KeyboardFontMedium=MyTMouse

KeyboardFontLarge=Arial

KeyboardCharSetBase=22

KeyboardCharSetMedium=22

KeyboardCharSetLarge=0

Keyboard1SizeAdjBase=0

Keyboard1SizeAdjMedium=0

Keyboard1SizeAdjLarge=1

454


Sizes 1-6 are the Base sizes. For almost alluses, the MyTMouse font is the best choice.

Medium Sizes are 7-9.

Large Sizes are 10-12 and sizes greater than 12.

The Character Set for Base / Medium / Large(KeyboardCharSet...) settings allow changingthe character set used to reference the keyboardcharacters.

The following lists documented sets

ANSI_CHARSET = 0

DEFAULT_CHARSET = 1

SYMBOL_CHARSET = 2

MyTMouse = 22

MAC_CHARSET = 77

SHIFTJIS_CHARSET = 128

HANGEUL_CHARSET = 129

455


HANGUL_CHARSET = 129

JOHAB_CHARSET = 130

GB2312_CHARSET = 134

CHINESEBIG5_CHARSET = 136

GREEK_CHARSET = 161

TURKISH_CHARSET = 162

VIETNAMESE_CHARSET 163

HEBREW_CHARSET = 177

ARABIC_CHARSET = 178

BALTIC_CHARSET = 186

RUSSIAN_CHARSET = 204

THAI_CHARSET = 222

EASTEUROPE_CHARSET = 238

OEM_CHARSET = 255

456


In general, use 22 for MyTMouse and 0(ANSI) otherwise.

This affects the Windows GDI selection offonts, and can be useful if specific charactersare not being selected as desired from thecurrent KYBD????.KMF.

The Keyboard1SizeAdj... settings refers to theamount subtracted from the available area ofthe key (total pixels) used to display the fontcharacter. Even though it strongly affects keydisplays of 1 character (i.e. alphanumeric keyson the Keyboard (Alpha) panel), it does havesome effect on all buttons displayed. As thenumbers increase the calculated area availablefor the required display character(s) becomessmaller, forcing a smaller font to display.

LowerCaseDisplay=1

If LowerCaseDisplay=1, then the defaultkeyboard display will contain lower case

457


characters, only changing to upper case whenthe Shift or Caps Lock is engaged. IfLowerCaseDisplay=0, then Upper Casecharacters will always be used on the keyboarddisplay.

IgnoreSystemCapsLock=0

This setting was asked for by a customer usingthe TS version with Citrix. Apparently thereare some synchronization problems withindifferent client versions of Citrix, and the Capslock operation can be inconsistent. By default,My-T-Pen queries the system to establish theCaps Lock state - on a normal PC, this operatesas one would expect - the Caps Lock statestays in sync between the physical keyboardand My-T-Pen. By settingIgnoreSystemCapsLock=1, the portions ofcode that monitor the system Caps lock stateare bypassed. Note that when the Caps Lockkey is used on My-T-Pen, the appropriate

458


keystroke is sent, but the state (key display /Caps lock ligh on Num panel) withinMy-T-Pen will not reflect the change, becausethe system is not being queried, and theseupdates are bypassed. In order to address allpossible system situations based on the CapsLock state, additional options have been added.The following lists the 6 different settingsavailable for IgnoreSystemCapsLock:

• IgnoreSystemCapsLock=0 (Default)

• IgnoreSystemCapsLock=1 Does not repaintbased on System Caps Lock

• IgnoreSystemCapsLock=2 Paint Cappedkeys based on Internal Caps Lock state, butdo not change key action

• IgnoreSystemCapsLock=3 Paint Cappedkeys based on Internal Caps Lock state,change key action to shifted state if capped

459


(This emulates Caps Lock action if CapsLock is NEVER set on system)

• IgnoreSystemCapsLock=4 Paint Cappedkeys based on Internal Caps Lock state,change key action to shifted state if NOTcapped (This emulates Caps Lock action ifCaps Lock is ALWAYS set on system)

• IgnoreSystemCapsLock=5 Paint Cappedkeys based on Internal Caps Lock state,change key action to opposite of cappedstate (this would be used if the caps lockstate is always opposite the Internal Capslock state - however, this suggests the capslock works on the system, so you reallyshouldn’t be ignoring it)

CapsLockMode=0

If CapsLockMode=0, then the key will visuallylatch based on the Caps Lock mode, e.g. theCaps Lock will be shown as a key down for

460


Caps Lock On, key up for Caps Lock Off. IfCapsLockMode=1, then the Caps Lock keywill be treated as any other key, and not tied toCaps Lock State

UseOrgCutCopyPasteUndo=0

This setting is to accommodate the changefrom Common User Interface (Consistent UserInterface) (Consistent??) options for Cut CopyPaste & Undo. Most applications support bothversions, but for those that do not, or requirethe original keystrokes, this setting has beenprovided. Note that My-T-Pen uses the newerversion by default.

UseOrgCutCopyPasteUndo=0 means:

Cut = Ctrl-X

Copy = Ctrl-C

Paste = Ctrl-V

Undo = Ctrl-Z

461


UseOrgCutCopyPasteUndo=1 means:

Cut = Shift-Del

Copy = Ctrl-Ins

Paste = Shift-Ins

Undo = Alt-Backspace

DragMode=2

The DragMode setting was added to be moreconsistent with the Windows appearancesettings. The following are the settings & whatthey mean: DragMode=0, drag full windowcontents, ignore Windows settings;DragMode=1, drag with focus rectangle,ignore Windows settings; DragMode=2, useWindows settings to determine drag mode

HoldShiftCtrl=0

This was added as a test for a customer, andhas been left as an option. By default,My-T-Pen holds the shift & control state until

462


the key is actually sent. For example, with aShift-T - this results in a Shift-Down at theshift key press, then a T-down, T-up, Shift-upafter a T key press. (Same for the Ctrl key).With HoldShiftCtrl=1, the Shift-down is helduntil the T key press, resulting in a Shift-down,T-down, T-up, Shift-up when the T key isreleased. The Alt key is the System key inWindows, and it is not included within thisoption.

MenuOffset=200

This setting was added in 1.70 to addressWindows 98 & its multiple monitor support.This is updated internally as the popupMy-T-Pen menu is is used (offset is the widthof menu). Windows 98 incorrectly displays themenu off screen (does not adjust to ensure thatthe menu is visible on the screen). Therefore,there are some adjustments made prior to usingthe Windows API TrackPopupMenu when in

463


Windows 98. Issues: The LICENSE.EXEupdates the registry at: HKLM\Software\Innovation Management Group\Windows witha version # - this must be "98" to invoke thisaction (only a problem in Windows 98). Thewidth itself is adjusted when one of thesecondary popup menus is used (Size, Settings,Position).

If the Windows Display Properties |Appearance modifies the displayed width ofthe popup menu, one of these menus isrequired to be opened to force an update of theoffset value internally.

Transparency=0

This setting is for Windows 2000 and later.When set to 1, various options are enabled withMy-T-Pen to allow modifying the transparencyfor the displayed window. When enabled, theTransparencyLevel defines how "visible" thewindow is - a lower-limit of 20 has been set in

464


the SEETHRU.EXE (to prevent the user frommaking the keyboard completely invisible),and the level of 255 makes the windowcompletely opaque (the disabled state).

TransparencyLevel=75

This is the current level of visibility, where 0means invisible, and 255 means the window isopaque (same as if the Transparency were 0(disabled)). The little control program(SEETHRU.EXE) has a lower limit of 20, andthese settings are saved to this INI file whenMy-T-Pen gets the message from SEETHRU.You can make the window invisible by settingTransparency=1 and TransparencyLevel=0,and then do not run SEETHRU.EXE. See theDeveloper’s Kit for external control info.

(This is obsolete)

Begin WinLogon settings

The WinLogon settings & following support465


settings are for 95/98, and handled byIMGLOGON.EXE - My-T-Pen Logon UtilitiesThe following section runs throughAllowDomainEdit.

WinLogon=0

If WinLogon=1, then special code is used toproperly type into the windows logon screen(Network Client, Windows user logon, etc.).This is a patch to work prior to release of fully32-bit My-T-Pen. My-T-Pen should be run viaRunServices option in registry:HKLM\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\RunServices

(These are obsolete)

1.70 Notes

The ForcePassword????? Options only affectoperation during the use of the Map NetworkDrive dialog

ForcePasswordLower=0

466


ForcePasswordUpper=0

These two settings change the way charactersare sent to the windows logon / passworddialog. Set ForcePasswordLower=1 to forcelowercase characters to be sent, or setForcePasswordUpper=1 to force uppercasecharacters. ForcePasswordUpper will overridethe ForcePasswordLower setting.

ForcePasswordMixed=1

This setting overrides the upper & lower casesettings and allows mixed case & punctuationentry. Most networks only allow a limited setof password characters, but this setting wasadded for additional flexibility, and set as thedefault. The original specification from acustomer for this option was all Upper case,and other customers eventually required theseadditional options.

Version 1.70 Notes: DisableEnter changes, and

467


UserNameNotPassword and AllowDomainEditare not used.

DisableEnter=0

Version 1.70 modified this entry, managed bythe My-T-Pen Logon Utilities

This setting is used to resolve logon problemsresulting in a system hang. Typically othersoftware in the system is part of the problem,and using the logon option in as clean a systemas possible is recommended. If there areincomplete logons, or the system does notresume normal operation after logon, theDisableEnter setting can be used. In testing, itwas found that logon problems were related tothe system hooks being set. WhenDisableEnter=0, the Enter key operatesnormally. If DisableEnter=1, then the Enterkey does not process any reaction, forcing theuser to click OK on the logon dialog. Thedialogs affected are Enter Windows Password

468


and Enter Network Password. Note theForceUnHook setting should be set to 1.

(PRE 1.70 ONLY!)

DisableEnter=0

This setting is used to resolve logon problemsresulting in a system hang. Typically othersoftware in the system is part of the problem,and using the logon option in as clean a systemas possible is recommended. If there areincomplete logons, or the system does notresume normal operation after logon, theDisableEnter setting can be used. In testing, itwas found that logon problems were related tothe system hooks being set. WhenDisableEnter=0, the Enter key operatesnormally. If DisableEnter=1 orDisableEnter=2, the Enter key is disabled onthe My-T-Pen keyboard, AND during thelogon, system hooks are in use only while thecursor is over My-T-Pen (see VirtualPointer,

469


ForceUnHook settings). This forces the user toclick on the OK button on the Password dialog,and forces the system hooks to be disabledduring logon. If DisableEnter=1, then normaloperation resumes upon typing into anywindow after logon. If DisableEnter=2, thenthis forces operation similar to ForceUnHook -even after logon.

(PRE 1.70 ONLY!)

UserNameNotPassword=0

The default keyboard focus is on the passwordfield. To override this (without requiring theuser to use the Tab key), setUserNameNotPassword=1. This will force thedefault keyboard focus to be on the User Nameat logon. The default (if this entry is notpresent) is ;0.

(PRE 1.70 ONLY!)

AllowDomainEdit=0470


By original design (at the request of acustomer), the domain was not editable (therewas no way the user could edit the domainfield). To allow this field to be edited by theuser, set AllowDomainEdit=1.

End WinLogon settings

(OnScreen only)

WantATVersion=1

This setting should be 1 for OnScreenoperation - it is not available in non-ATversions (non Assistive Technology versions).This may be a future option, but as of the 1.73version, it should be set to 1 for OnScreen, butit is not used otherwise.

(OnScreen only)

SetupMode=0

This indicates whether setup is in the Basic orAdvanced mode. If SetupMode=0 then the

471


Basic mode is in use, and only the dialog andoptions available in Basic mode are displayed.If SetupMode=1 then Advanced mode is inuse, and all options and advanced dialogs aredisplayed.

(OnScreen only)

KeyboardFile=1

This is used in conjunction with theWordComplete & ActionPanel settings. This isan internal setting and should not be modifiedhere. If KeyboardFile=1, then theWordComplete / Action panel is in use. IfKeyboardFile=0, then only the Action panel isin use. This setting is used internally, andreflects the WordComplete and ActionPanelsettings. This setting indicates which panel willopen when the Tool button (Icon /Top buttonon Tool bar) is used.

(OnScreen only)

472


WordComplete=1

If WordComplete=1, then the WordCompletePanel is open. If WordComplete=0, then thepanel is closed. This is used by setup, andinternally by My-T-Pen to indicate the state ofthis panel. If WordComplete=1, thenActionPanel=1.

(OnScreen only)

IntlWordComplete=0

This was added as an option, but the settings inthe selected KBF override this setting forInternational Keyboards that have dead-keys,and Alt-Gr functionality. In 1.70, it has verylittle impact on operation, and should be left at0 unless instructed to change by IMG technicalsupport.

(OnScreen only)

Suffixes=1

473


This indicates whether the Suffix mode isenabled. If Suffixes=1, then the Suffix buttonon the WordComplete panel is enabled, andsuffixes are automatically displayed after aword Completion. If Suffixes=0 then Suffixesare disabled, and no automatic display occurs.

(OnScreen only)

ActionPanel=1

This indicates whether the Action Panel isavailable. By default, the Action Panel isincluded with display of the WordCompletePanel, and is automatically set to 1 if this is thecase. If WordComplete is not enabled, then theActionPanel setting indicates whether theActionPanel is available. In general, theinternal setting of KeyboardFile overrides thissetting. The ActionPanel and WordCompletesettings are used by Setup in User Options, andall configuration should be managed throughSetup, rather than directly manipulating these

474


settings.

(OnScreen only)

AutomaticU=1

If AutomaticU=1 then anytime a "Q" is used, a"U" is automatically added to the text. IfAutomaticU=0, then this option is disabled.

(OnScreen only)

AutoSpace=1

This indicates whether the Automatic spaces &Capitals is on. AutoSpace=1 indicates thatspaces after word completions and punctuationare automatically added. This also enables theAuto-Caps option that sets after a punctuationcharacter, enabling the first letter of a newsentence to be capitalized. If Auto-Capitals isengaged, any character will automatically turnoff the Caps lock. To disengage, use the CapsLock key.

475


(OnScreen only)

AutoSpaceDisable=1

This indicates whether the Automatic spaces &Capitals sub-option of "Disable for single lineinput" is on. AutoSpaceDisable=1 indicatesthat when My-T-Pen senses a single line input,the Automatic spaces & Capitals feature willbe disabled. When AutoSpaceDisable=0, thisspecial case for single-line input is notmonitored. When enabled, this featuresrequires a Windows event hook that monitorsthe system text caret (text input cursor). Thisonly monitors for single line system level"EDIT" class input windows.

(OnScreen only)

AutoCapI=1

This is used to enable internal coding thatforces a stand-alone character I to becapitalized automatically. This is intended

476


primarily for normal lowercase typing as an aidto users. This action can be disabled by settingAutoCapI=0.

(OnScreen only)

SecondSpace=1

This is used when Automatic spaces & Capitalsis on (AutoSpace=1) If SecondSpace=1, then 2spaces are added after a punctuation character(period, question mark, exclamation point,etc.). If SecondSpace=0, then only a singlespace is used after a punctuation character.

(OnScreen only)

AutoArrange=1

After different events, My-T-Pen willautomatically arrange the open windows forsmoother operation. For experienced orsophisticated users, this may be annoying. Bysetting AutoArrange=0, this default, automatic

477


operation is disabled. The Arrange button onthe My-T-Pen Action Panel will still arrangethe active window, by positioning the windowabove (or below) My-T-Pen, and filling theavailable space on the screen with theapplication window.

(OnScreen only)

AutoArrangeActive=0

This is only used if AutoArrange=1. WhenAutoArrangeActive=1, My-T-Pen will monitorthe active window (only when the mousecursor is over the My-T-Pen window) and if anew window becomes active, it willautomatically be arranged. This also has theeffect of automatically arranging the activewindow when the mouse cursor is positionedover My-T-Pen (which some users find helpful,and other users find annoying). Because of this,the setting is now separate and default off(AutoArrangeActive=0).

478


(OnScreen only)

AutoSaveMove=0

In 1.78 Release 2, OnScreen Setup has beenmodified to change the Operation Optionsoption to match the Save After Move entry inthe Options menu, and use the SaveAfterMoveINI entry (see below). The AutoSaveMoveoption still remains, and is implementedslightly differently than the SaveAfterMoveoption within the actual run-time software. Forpractical purposes, this setting is now obsolete.If it is used, then SaveAfterMove=0 should beset in the INI. Internally, the AutoSaveMovesaves the configuration and position as separatesteps, while the SaveAfterMove saves theentire KEYBOARD.KBF in a single pass.

My-T-Pen will ALWAYS open at the last savedposition. Originally designed to ALWAYS savethe current position after moving My-T-Pen,this has been added to address customers who

479


dislike this default action or where confused bythe fact that sometimes My-T-Pen did not openin their "saved" position. When On, My-T-Penwill execute a Menu | Position | Save Positioncommand when a move has been completed.Turn this option Off to prevent these saves aftermoving My-T-Pen.

(OnScreen only)

ActionPanelEnabled=31

Each button on the Action Panel may beEnabled or Disabled. This setting uses adecimal value that is using a binary code toindicate each key, where 1 is Enabled and 0 isDisabled.

These are the codes:

Back Key = 1, Size Key = 2, Select Key = 4,Move Key = 8 and Arrange Key = 16. Thesecodes are added together, and then saved as thedecimal value here. A value of 31 indicates all

480


buttons are Enabled.

For Example:

To Enable only the Back Key & Move Key youwould add 1 and 8 to result inActionPanelEnabled=9 When disabled the keywill be "grayed" and its action will not beavailable to the user.

(OnScreen only)

KeyboardEnabled=0

If KeyboardEnabled=1 then the PhysicalKeyboard is enabled for WordCompleteoperation. The WordComplete Panel MUST bedisplayed for proper operation. See Help, andUser Options for more details on using thePhysical Keyboard. If KeyboardEnabled=0then the Physical Keyboard is not used.

(OnScreen only)

EnableDwell=0481


If EnableDwell=1 then the Dwell KeypressTimer is enabled. This will engage the timerwhenever the pointer (mouse cursor) remainsat one position (over OnScreen). If the delayperiod expires, a click (Left or Right buttondown/up sequence based on the Mouse Buttonsetting) will be initiated. The pointer must bemoved again to reset/restart the timer. Todisable the dwell action, set EnableDwell=0.

(OnScreen only)

DwellTime=10

This is the length of the delay period used inEnableDwell=1. Each unit corresponds to atick of 50 milliseconds. The default is 10, or0.5 seconds (500 milliseconds). The validrange is from 1 to 100.

(OnScreen implementation only - see belowfor others)

Sound=0482


This can take on 3 settings. If Sound=0 then nosound is generated when buttons are usedwithin My-T-Pen. If Sound=1, then theKeyClick wave sound is played every time abutton is clicked. If Sound=2, then voices areused to describe each key (for the standard 101keyboard). See Sounds (Advanced Notes) for adescription of how to override the defaultsounds.

(Added in 1.76 for My-T-Pen, My-T-Soft,My-T-Soft TS, My-T-Touch)

(The implementation is different than inOnScreen (above) because default waveresources are NOT included within theexecutable - only external wave files will beused)

Sound=0

This can take on 3 settings. If Sound=0 then nosound is generated when buttons are used

483


within My-T-Pen. If Sound=1, then theKeyClick wave sound is played every time abutton is clicked (similar to OnScreen).However, the Keyclick wave is not included inthe resources, so only the override setting willwork, using the "KEYCLICK.WAV" file in theSounds folder. If you wish to use a differentsound, copy the wave file over the"KEYCLICK.WAV" file in the Sounds folder.If Sound=2, then key numbered files are usedto describe each key pressed, as long as there isa corresponding "numbered" entry in thesounds folder. Refer to Sounds (AdvancedNotes) for details on key numbers, and othernotes regarding this option. Also note thatthere is no user interface for this, it must bemodified in the INI file. See the NoAnnouncesetting below if Text-To-Speech services areenabled on the platform and the announcementtriggered when Sound=1.

484


(Added in 1.78)

NoAnnounce=1

When Sound=1, IMGSOUND.EXE is loaded,and if Text-To-Speech Services are available,IMGSOUND will announce this fact byspeaking "Text-To-Speech is available". In thecommercial products, this can be annoying,since the sound is primarily only uesd forkey-click audible feedback. SetNoAnnounce=1 to skip this announcement. IfNoAnnounce=0, then this "Text-To-Speech isavailable" announcement will be spoken.

(OnScreen only)

TopOffset=2

This is a setting used to help positionOnScreen without affecting the Taskbar. Thisallows the Taskbar to be placed on top of thescreen with the Auto-Hide option enabled, andlet the user have enough "space" to trigger the

485


Taskbar display.

(OnScreen only)

TTSAvailable=0

This is the main option to enable theText-To-Speech (TTS) functionality.TTSAvailable=1 is required to enable TTS inOnScreen, but also requires that theappropriate classes & supporting TTS softwareis installed on the system. Forcing this settingon a system without the appropriate TTSsoftware installed & configured properly willnot accomplish anything. The supportingprocess IMGSOUND.EXE is required tohandle the TTS requests within OnScreen.When TTSAvailable=1 is set in OnScreen, itenables the internal processing withinOnScreen to hand-off the speech request to theIMGSOUND process. The setting handles theSpeak Key Text under pointer processing. IfIMGSOUND cannot find, establish the

486


interface, and communicate with the TTSspeech components, the TTS option will notoperate. IMG has repackaged the requiredMicrosoft Speech Components inMSSPEECH.MSI (which requires theWindows Installer). The file & the supportWindows Installer for early versions ofWindows 98 and NT 4 can be found in theSpeech folder on the distribution media, or onthe IMG WebSite. Note that IMGSOUND willplay "Text to Speech is Available" whenOnScreen starts to indicate this capability. Ifthe all OnScreen TTS options are disabled, thiswill still occur at startup of OnScreen - todisable this action, remove the SpeechComponents - Start Menu | Settings | ControlPanel | Add/Remove programs, SpeechComponents. Note that for discrete pointingdevices (touchscreens, etc.) that do not hoverwell, this setting may not operate in a desirablefashion.

487


(OnScreen only)

TTSRepeat=0

This setting handles the option of repeating thesame key text for constantly when over a key.The TTSRepeat=1 will cause a constant streamof speech requests, based on the TTSDelay(see below). To disable the repeat function, setTTSRepeat=0.

(OnScreen only)

TTSDelay=20

This is the delay time (in 50 ms increments) -the default 20 corresponds to about 2 secondsbetween speech requests. Increase the settingto stretch out the delay between speechrequests, or decrease the number to make therepeats quicker. Note that not all speech eventsare of the same length, so modifying this maycause incoherent speech events. If you haverepeating speech events overlapping, increase

488


this setting - this may occur if you have a slowrate set for the voice. This setting is also affectshow long you must be over a specific keybefore the key will be spoken.

(OnScreen only)

TTSSpeakWord=0

This setting defines whether OnScreen willspeak the word upon selection in theWordComplete panel (Speak Word on Click).TTSSpeakWord=1 means the word will bespoken when clicked. TTSSpeakWord=0means no speech event will occur on selectionin the WordComplete panel.

(OnScreen only)

TTSSingleCharKey=0

When TTSAvailable=1 is set, this setting willdetermine how Text-To-Speech reacts when thekey to be spoken has just a single character.

489


TTSSingleCharKey=1 will speak the singlecharacter key, and 0 will disable singlecharacter key speech. For intermediate &advanced user, there is no need to hear the"normal" keys, and this can be used to disablespeech for the common keys.

(OnScreen only)

TTSWordsKey=0

When TTSAvailable=1 is set, this setting willdetermine how Text-To-Speech reacts when thekey to be spoken has a word. TTSWordsKey=1will speak the description (or the word) on thekey (any key with 2 or more characters).TTSWordsKey=0 will disable speech for keyswith 2 or more characters.

(OnScreen only - special meaning whenCrossScanner in use)

TTSWordComplete=0

490


When TTSAvailable=1 is set, this setting willdetermine how Text-To-Speech reacts whenover the WordComplete words. Since these aredynamic, this third subset of keys may beselected independently. SetTTSWordComplete=1 to speak theWordComplete words, setTTSWordComplete=0 to disable.CrossScanner: When enabled, andCrossScanner is running, CrossScanner willstep through the available words and speakthem (delay handled in CrossScanner withMenu Speed setting) The CrossScanner usermay select the word when it is highlighted. Thesequence may be restarted by clicking on thebuffer key in the WordComplete panel.

(OnScreen only)

ExpandAKey=0

This setting defines whether the "Zoom"window will appear If ExpandAKey=1, then a

491


separate window will appear to magnify thekey under the mouse pointer, ifExpandAKey=0, this option is disabled.

The size of the Windows is defined by thefactor (see ExpandAKeyFactor below). Internallogic is used to decide if the window is aboveor below the pointer. If part of the key isoff-screen, the key will not be displayed. Notethat for discrete pointing devices(touchscreens, etc.) that do not hover well, thissetting may not operate in a desirable fashion.

(OnScreen only)

ExpandAKeyFactor=3

This setting is handled automatically withinOnScreen Setup: Large is 3, Larger is 5, andLargest is 7. This setting can be modifieddirectly, but if you run setup, and select OK onthe Enhance dialog, the setting will beoverwritten. Valid values are 2-20, but anything

492


over 10 will probably be too large for actualuse. Larger windows (settings) will work betteron faster systems, faster video sub-systems.

(OnScreen only)

MouseOverHiLite=0

This setting indicates whether the key underthe pointer will be highlighted or not.MouseOverHiLite=1 will enable the highlight,MouseOverHiLite=0 will disable any highlightaction. This setting can be used separately or inconjunction with the ExpandAKey (Zoom).The internal operation uses the invert optionwithin the BitBlt API call, so different colorsettings will cause different highlight views.The WordComplete panel is handled separately(it was an add-on to the original design, sothere may be artifacts upon resize paints) -these will resolve themselves in normaloperation, or slide the pointer off the OnScreenwindow.

493


Note that for discrete pointing devices(touchscreens, etc.) that do not hover well, thissetting may not operate in a desirable fashion.

(OnScreen only)

ControlPanelToggleButtons=1

This setting indicates whether the control panel(Tool Button Opens & Closes Control panel)will display "latched" keys or not. WhenControlPanelToggleButtons=1 the buttons willdisplay as "latched" - visually down. TheToolTextIn and ToolTextOut colors will still beused (see below, [Colors]). For originaloperation, set ControlPanelToggleButtons=0.

Note: This setting is not available in OnScreenSetup, it is only available here.

(Versions later than 1.75, OnScreen)

EnableMouseScroll=1

When EnableMouseScroll=1, and OnScreen is

494


larger than the screen display, and a portion isnot displayed, by holding the mouse pointer atthe edge of the screen where OnScreen scrollsoff the display, the OnScreen window will bemoved back onto the display, in increments setby the ScrollMovePixels (see below). Inoperation, it is more intuitive than thedescription - by moving the mouse toward theportion of OnScreen you wish to access &holding at the display edge, OnScreen willscroll into view. To disable this action, setEnableMouseScroll=0

EnableScreenScroll=0

This setting has been added for CrossScanner& touchscreen users. Since the ability to holdthe mouse pointer at a particular location, e.g.the screen edge is difficult with variouspointing devices (see EnableMouseScrollabove), when EnableScreenScroll=1 (EnableScroll Window - OnScreen Setup | Appearance

495


| Size) a scroll Window will appear with aslider, and buttons to move the OnScreenwindow. Because this takes screen real-estate,and OnScreen may be moved by dragging, andnot all users operate OnScreen in aconfiguration that is larger than the displaysize, it is default off (EnableScreenScroll=0).

ScrollMovePixels=6

This is the amount of move that will occur forEnableMouseScroll / EnableScreenScrollsettings (see above). For quicker movement,increase the number. Because the purpose ofthis scroll is to access portions of OnScreen notvisible, smooth scrolling may not be ashigh-priority as speed of operation. Note thatas the number of pixels get larger, the choppierthe scroll onto the display will appear. Notethat speed of the system and video sub-systemwill affect the actual operation.

CenterOversize=1496


This setting handles the position of My-T-Penwhen sized, and the resultant size is wider thanthe screen width. If CenterOversize=1,My-T-Pen will be centered, leaving an equalportion off the left side of the screen & off theright side of the screen. If CenterOversize=0,then the left side of My-T-Pen will be alignedwith the left side of the screen display, leavingthe right-hand portion of My-T-Pen off thescreen. CrossScanner users may prefer settingCenterOversize=0.

(OnScreen with CrossScanner only)

CrossScanner=1

This is an internal setting set by CrossScannerto handle different interface settings requiredby CrossScanner (different from the standardinterface settings for My-T-Pen). Thecommunication between OnScreen andCrossScanner is handled automatically, andthis setting should not be modified manually.

497


The following section will be created to handlethe reset of OnScreen when CrossScanner isasleep or closed:

[CrossScanner]

MinimizeToButton=0

NoHooksEver=0

ForceUnHook=0

These settings track the original settings ofOnScreen and are handled dynamically byCrossScanner and OnScreen. They should notbe modified manually. If there are anyproblems with interface settings whenOnScreen is run independent of CrossScanner,use OnScreen Setup to re-configure

(OnScreen only)

LetterAssist=1

This setting controls the look-ahead and letterselection processing when using the

498


WordComplete panel. When LetterAssist=1,based on the currently typed letters and thelookup word list, only possible next letters willbe available to the user. When LetterAssist=0,no additional look-ahead processing will occur,and no modification to the keys available to theuser will be done.

(OnScreen only)

ShowAsGrayed=1

This setting is only available whenLetterAssist=1. When ShowAsGrayed=1,letters not possible (based on the current letterstyped and the current word list) will be shownas grayed out letters. When ShowAsGrayed=0,for any letter that is not possible (based on thecurrent letters typed and the current word list),the entire key will not be shown and will not beavailable to the user.

(OnScreen only)

499


AllowGrayedKey=1

This setting is only available whenLetterAssist=1 and ShowAsGrayed=1. WhenAllowedGrayedKey=1, the user will still beable to select and type with grayed out keys(those that will not build words based on thecurrent letters typed and the current word list).When AllowedGrayedKey=0, the grayed keyswill not be selectable.

(OnScreen only)

KeysOnlyAssist=0

The setting is referred to as WC-Assist, orWordComplete Assist. WhenKeysOnlyAssist=1, the top row of number keyson the keyboard panel turns into 2 sets of 1-5selection buttons when WordCompletecandidates are available (colored the same asthe WordCompletion candidate buttons). WhenKeysOnlyAssist=0, no action occurs.

500


(OnScreen only)

KeysOnlyAssistNumbers=0

This setting is only relevant whenKeysOnlyAssist=1, and this is only available inthe INI file. When KeysOnlyAssistNumbers=1, the function key row isreplaced by number keys (to replace thenumber keys overtaken by the WordCompletecandidate selection buttons) whenWordComplete candidates are available. Inmost typing situations, function keys are notused very often, and this provides number keysas an alternative to temporarily disabling theWC-Assist function to access the number keys.

(Added in 1.75a)

NumPadAlways=0

This is an option available only in the INI file,requested by a customer. By default, theNumeric keypad acts exactly like a physical

501


keyboard, and responds to the state of the NumLock setting. When NumPadAlways=1, theNumeric keypad (Num Panel), will always actas if the Num Lock is on & type numbers,ignoring the actual state of the Num Locktoggle / light / keyboard state. This wasrequested to ensure proper operation if the useraccidentally toggles the Num lock, or anotherapplication modified this keyboard state.

(Added in 1.75d)

Win2000ShutDown=1

During the shut down sequence in Windows2000, My-T-Pen is still enabled, and can causepainting problems if moved or configured. SetWin2000ShutDown=1 to disable My-T-Penduring this ShutDown dialog. If you wishMy-T-Pen to operate during the Shut Downsequence (or any similar dialog in Windows),set Win2000ShutDown=0. This problem is notseen in Windows XP. When

502


Win2000ShutDown enabled, My-T-Penmonitors for a Dialog as Topmost, withDS_FIXEDSYS, DS_CENTER styles. If thistype of dialog found, then special internalhandling occurs - If opened or minimized tobutton, moving and the window is disabled, forother minimized options

(Added in 1.75F)

DisplayChangeEnabled=1

This setting determines how My-T-Penresponds to the Display Change Windowmessage when the resolution is changed (e.g.rotation, changing color depths, or screenappearance). When DisplayChangeEnabled=1My-T-Pen will reposition in an analogousposition on the new display configuration.My-T-Pen will reposition itself on screen if anyportion was positioned off screen. IfDisplayChangeEnabled=2, then the attempt topreserve an analogous position will be

503


maintained - if using rotation software (portrait/ landscape), then this setting is notrecommended, as it could result in positioningMy-T-Pen off screen after a rotation.

(Added in 1.78)

SessionChangeEnabled=0

This setting determines how My-T-Penresponds to the Session Change Windowmessage when the session is changed (e.g. FastUser Switching). WhenSessionChangeEnabled=1, My-T-Pen willautomatically open from a minimized state (ifnecessary) and restore settings. With the userspecific settings (ConfigPath=1 orConfigPath=2), this is not relevant, but ifConfigPath=0 or ConfigPath=3, then thisoption could still be required, especially inWindows XP. When there are shared settings,one user can modify settings, and then asession change event can occur. To prevent

504


synchronization issues between the savedsettings and active configuration, when thesession change event occurs (and the SessionChange Message is sent), My-T-Pen willrestore settings from the current saved settings.

(Added in 1.76)

ReadOnlyOK=0

This setting was added for the Windows NTbased platforms to address some securityconcerns. If ReadOnlyOK=1, then files will beopened as Read Only, and Savingconfigurations / options, etc. from withMy-T-Pen will not occur. WhenReadOnlyOK=0, the KEYBOARD.KBF filewill be opened with Read/ Write access, andRead/Write access will be expected forMYTPEN.INI. In secure situations where userswill be granted Read / Read & Executepermissions, this setting allows operation ofMy-T-Pen in a Read Only mode. Note that

505


reconfiguring is possible during operation(unless the Operator Mode is enabled), butMy-T-Pen will always open with the "original"settings from KEYBOARD.KBF &MYTPEN.INI. 1.77 Note - to use this option,AllowReadOnlyOperation must be 0 There is aslight distinction between the 2 settings. IfAllowReadOnlyOperation=0 andReadOnlyOK=1, then the configuration fileswill always be opened in a read-only mode,and the configuration cannot be updated. IfAllowReadOnlyOperation=1 (ReadOnlyOKignored), then files will be opened asread/write UNLESS this fails because of userrights, then they will be opened as read-only.To prevent operation of My-T-Pen if user hasread-only rights, set both ReadOnlyOK=0, andAllowReadOnlyOperation=0

(Added in 1.77)

AllowReadOnlyOperation=1506


This setting is an override for the ReadOnlyOKsetting to address limited rights users inWindows NT based platforms. In 1.77 it isdefault On, bypassing the error message whenthe KEYBOARD.KBF & MYTPEN.INI filesare Read Only, and running My-T-Pen as ifReadOnlyOK was set on

(Added in 1.77)

ManualToolControl=0

The tool bar can be turned off in 1.77, and thissetting determines if there is any manualinterface available to toggle the tool bar. Theoriginal design of the software used the toolbar as the anchor & always visible element sothe user would be able to manipulate theconfiguration as desired. Developers requestedthat this panel be removed so the user haslimited options with the software when it istightly integrated into an application. In earlierversions, the operator mode / custom logo

507


options allowed some control over this panel.Refer to the Developer’s Kit for tools tomanipulate this panel programmatically. Thissetting allows manual control by the user whenenabled. When ManualToolControl=1, a3-click approach can be used to toggle the toolbar. By clicking 3 times (1-2-3) in the samespot (border or non-key areas only), the toolbar panel will close if opened, or open ifclosed. When ManualToolControl=0, thisaction is ignored. For touchscreens (& otherless accurate pointing devices), you may setManualToolControl to a larger value. If morethan 1, then the number indicates the numberpixels of "jitter" that will be allowed to countthe click as part of the 1-2-3 sequence. Forexample, ManualToolControl=5 enables the3-click tracking, and allows a +/- 5 pixel rangefrom the 1st click to count as the second &third clicks.

508


(Added in 1.77)

WindowsKeysGraphics=1

This setting controls whether the graphics aredisplayed on the Windows Key andApplications key on the 104-key layouts.When WindowsKeysGraphics=1, bitmapimages are overlaid onto the keys. For smallersizes, these may be unclear, since a StretchBltoperation is performed. SetWindowsKeysGraphics=0 to disable thisoption - the text label for the Windows key is"Wnds", and the Application key is "App"

(Added in 1.77)

WindowsKeyWndsLatch=1

This setting affects the operation of theWindows key on the 104 key layouts. WhenWindowsKeyWndsLatch=1, the key will latchin a down position, allowing it to modify thenext key typed. This is for Windows functions

509


such as Win-E or Win-F (Search for Files, etc.)- this is the default setting. IfWindowsKeyWndsLatch=0, the key will notlatch, and operate as a simple key, sending adown/up release on down/up press. By default,this will open the start menu. You will not beable to operate the Windows shortcut optionwith this setting, since the key will not latchdown. However, macros can still be used withthis setting at 0.

(Added in 1.77)

TabletPCEnabled=1

This setting affects operation within WindowsXP, Tablet PC edition. WhenTabletPCEnabled=1, Pnlwatch.exe will beexecuted, which monitors if the Tablet PCInput Panel. PanelWatch monitors the requestfor the Tablet PC Input Panel, and coordinatesdisplay of My-T-Pen. When enabled,Pnlwatch.exe is placed in the All Users Startup

510


Group as My-T-Pen Tablet PC Interface.PanelWatch can also be controlled manually.When run normally PanelWatch does not showa window or create any display for the user.When PNLWATCH.EXE is run directly (or theMy-T-Pen Tablet PC Interface is run from theStartUp Menu), PanelWatch will display anicon in the System Tray (notification area nextto the clock). So if PanelWatch is alreadyrunning, running it again will toggle thedisplay of a notification icon. When Enabledfrom the menu, the TabletPCEnabled=1 is setPanelWatch is run, and the StartUp icon iscreated in the All Users group (as long as userhas sufficient rights to create this shortcut file).When disabled, TabletPCEnabled=0 is set,PanelWatch is closed, and the StartUp groupicon is removed.

(Added in 1.77)

MenuForceForeground=0511


This is a setting that determines how theMy-T-Pen menu is handled in Windows2000/XP. In order to handle input focus issues,by default the opening the menu does not bringMy-T-Pen to the foreground as the inputwindow - this causes some interface issues(menu falls behind other windows, does notclear if click on other windows, etc.). Theseuser interface issues may be undesirable tosome users, and this option allows for userpreferences If MenuForceForeground=0, menuissues may result, but window with currentkeyboard input focus will remain - typing onMy-T-Pen will type into current foregroundwindow. If MenuForceForeground=1, menuissues will not occur, but My-T-Pen willbecome foreground window - user mustreselect typing window before typing onMy-T-Pen.

(Added in 1.78)

512


SaveAfterMove=0

SaveAfterChange=0

SaveAtClose=0

SaveAtEndSession=0

These settings are used to trigger an automaticsave of the current settings and position of thekeyboard window, after the appropriate event.SaveAfterMove=1, means that after anykeyboard window move, the settings andposition will be saved. If SaveAfterChange=1,then the settings and position will be savedafter any panel is opened or closed, or sized upor down. If SaveAtClose=1, then the settingsand position will be saved when the My-T-Penis closed. If SaveAtEndSession=1, and if theuser logs off or shuts down the system, then thesettings and position will be saved. Note thatSaveAtClose and/or SaveAtEndSessioneffectively override SaveAfterMove and

513


SaveAfterChange, since eventually My-T-Penwill be closed, or the user will shut down / logoff, and the current settings will be saved.Also, My-T-Pen can’t be restarted (to use thecurrent settings and position without beingclosed at some point.

(Added in 1.78)

TerminalServerConsoleEnable=0

This setting allows a non-server based productto run in the context of the server console. Ingeneral, only My-T-Soft TS should be used ona server where Terminal Services are available.However, there have been times when (forvarious reasons) customers run a server basedoperating system as a stand-alone machine.When TerminalServerConsoleEnable=1 for thenon-server based products, the normallicensing will enable these products to run on aserver, in the context of the server console (i.e.at the display monitor for the server, but NOT

514


as a remote terminal). By default, thenon-server products sense this operation, ask ifthis desired, and saveTerminalServerConsoleEnable=1automatically.

(Added in 1.78)

EnableScan=0

When EnableScan=1, keyboard scanning isenabled, and a transparent overlay is used toindicate the current scanning area withinMy-T-Pen. The following settings ONLY applywhen EnableScan=1. When EnableScan=0,keyboard scanning is disabled. Only inOnScreen does the user have access to thissetting from OnScreen Setup, but keyboardscanning is available for all 1.78 versions.

(Added in 1.78 R2)

ScanSound=1

515


This setting controls the sound for eachdiscrete scanning step. When ScanSound=0,there is no sound used. When ScanSound=1, a"scan" sound is used. When ScanSound=2,Text-To-Speech is used, announcing panels,rows/columns, and individual keys based onsettings for Text-To-Speech announcements forthe scan groupings (see below). ForScanSound=1, the wave file is"scan-sound.wav" in the SOUNDS folder.

(Added in 1.78 R2)

ScanEnableDisableSound=1

When ScanEnableDisableSound=1 is set, aspecial "Enabled" and "Disabled" sound(scan-enable.wav and scan-disable.wav in theSOUNDS folder) is played when scanning isenabled or disabled. This is helpful if Alt-X isused to toggle scanning (e.g. a trainer workingwith a user).

516


(Added in 1.78)

ScanColor=0

If ScanColor=0, an inverted color display ofthe current scan area is used within thescanning overlay If ScanColor=1 a blackoverlay is used during scanning, and ifScanColor=2, then a white overlay is used.Depending on the transparency setting,My-T-Pen colors, the display itself, and theuser, one color setting may be easier todistinguish over the other.

(Added in 1.78)

ScanTransparencyLevel=255

This setting can take on values between 1 and255. In the Scanning Settings dialog, this istranslated into percentage, where 100% is 255.Technically this is an "opaqueness" setting, aslarger numbers make the transparent overlaymore opaque. Low values may make the actual

517


overlay impossible to see, and high values willprevent seeing through the overlay, making itineffective. Suggested values range between 50and 150, with the default at 70 for black andwhite, and invert is at the fully opaque 255.

(Added in 1.78)

ScanTime=1200

This is a setting in milliseconds that defines theamount of time spent at each scan step. Thedefault of 1200 relates to a 1.2 second delaybetween each successive scan step. From theScanning Settings dialog, values can be setbetween 50 and 5000. Values below 500 arenot recommended. This setting is also used asthe Timeout After setting when Step Scan isselected as the right-click mode, but it is usedat three times the current setting, so a 1200setting results in a timeout waiting period of3600 milliseconds, or 3.6 seconds.

518


(Added in 1.78)

ScanRightClickMode=2

There are 8 different right-click settings:

• ScanRightClickMode=0 means that theright-click is not used at all. This should beset if the user cannot use, or does not haveaccess to a right-click event (second button).Note that even when set this way, aright-click can still result in a reset of thecursor clipping that is engaged during activescanning. Also note that if this is set to 0, itis critical that theScanReverseAfterNumScans be set to somevalue other than 0, otherwise the user willalways be forced to fully complete a scan, orbe forever stuck at a scan level with no wayto revert up a scan level.

• ScanRightClickMode=1 corresponds to a

519


full reset to the top level Panels scan, so aright-click during any scan level will resetand begin at a top level Panels scan.

• ScanRightClickMode=2 is the default, andacts as the reverse of the left-click, meaningthe current scan level goes up to the previouslevel. So a right-click during a Key scan willgo to the Panel scan. A right-click during aPanel scan goes to the Panels scan, and aright-click during a Panels scan will Stopscanning (while leaving the scanning overlayat the current panel). At this stopped level, aleft-click will re-engage scanning again.

• ScanRightClickMode=3 means that aright-click will stop scanning at the currentscan level, leaving the scan overlayuntouched. A left-click will re-engagescanning at the same level.

• For ScanRightClickMode=2 &ScanRightClickMode=3, when stopped

520


(paused), an additional right-click will movethe scan overlay off of My-T-Pen anddisplay "Left Click Here to Start Scanning",which will engage the scanning process.This allows a trainer or assistant to fullyaccess My-T-Pen and still be able to quicklyre-enable scanning.

• ScanRightClickMode=4 results in aright-click advancing the scan (rather thanthe timer advancing the scan). This step scanallows the right-click to advanced & moveforward the scan at the user’s speed, ratherthan a fixed timer rate. This also enablesseveral changes - instead of scan speedsetting, this value is used as a timeout afterrate (multiplied by 3), which will revert upone level if the timeout period expires. Also,the physical keyboard is monitored, andwhen both the Control key and Alt keys areheld down (e.g. [Ctrl]-[Alt]) on the physical

521


keyboard, this scan mode will stop(right-click on My-T-Pen to restart the scanprocess).

• ScanRightClickMode=5 results in aright-click aborting the current scan, andacts as though the scan was fully completed(i.e. all the way to key selection), and thenresets based on the Next scan setting. Thisallows quick resets using the right buttonwhile scanning.

• ScanRightClickMode=6 results in aright-click cancelling scanning completely.Only returning to My-T-Pen Setup &re-enabling scanning again will scanning bemade available.

• ScanRightClickMode=7 results in aright-click acting like a left-click. Thissetting allows either click to trigger a scanstep/selection.

522


(Added in 1.78)

ScanLeftClickMode=0

There are 4 different left-click settings (3effective) that affect what happens after theleft-click action occurs. In general, theleft-click steps down to the next scanning level.If stopped, scanning begins at the Panels scan,scanning individual panels. During the Panelsscan, a panel is selected by the left-click, andthe panel scan commences. While scanninggroups of keys (as defined for the panel), aleft-click will begin an individual key scan.Finally, during a key scan, a left-click willselect the key, and act as a a "type" event forthe key (e.g. selecting the key). TheScanLeftClickMode affects what happens afterthis final key selection (i.e. Post Action) Theseare the 4 possible settings:

• ScanLeftClickMode=0 is the default setting,523


and means that the internal handling is notmodified in any way, which is to revert up tothe current panel scan (e.g. the middle level).So during a keyboard scan, and a subsequentkey selection, the keyboard panel willcontinue to be scanned.

• ScanLeftClickMode=1 corresponds to thesame group of keys being scanned, e.g. thescan remains at the key scan level.

• ScanLeftClickMode=2 means that thecurrent panel will be scanned at the panelscan. Although this is handled slightlydifferently internally, the effective result isthe same as ScanLeftClickMode=0 (or thedefault setting). Because the internal codingis different, the setting is here to address thisdifferent implementation.

• ScanLeftClickMode=3 results in a revert tothe top level Panels scan after a keyselection.

524


(Added in 1.78)

ScanReverseAfterNumScans=2

This setting determines how many times aparticular level will be scanned, beforeautomatically returning to the next higherlevel. At the Panels scan level, if the count isreached, the scanning will stop, leaving thecurrent panel highlight by the scan overlay (aleft-click will restart the scan). IfScanReverseAfterNumScan=0, there is nomaximum, and a scan will continue at the samelevel until a user selects a scan highlight with aleft-click, or performs a right-click action.Because this setting is potentially problematicif there is no right-click available, this settingcannot be set to No Maximum if theRight-Click mode is set as None (or notavailable). In other words, never setScanReverseAfterNumsScans=0 andScanRightClickMode=0. Any positive number

525


for ScanReverseAfterNumScans results in aninternal count, that will revert up one levelafter the count is passed. In Scanning Settings,values of 1-6 are available, but this value canbe any positive number (e.g. 1, 10, 20, etc.)

(Added in 1.78 R2)

ScanShowAllOptions=0

This setting indicates whether all options willbe shown for the "Next Scan" and "Right-Click(2nd Button) Mode". As the scanning optionsbecame more complex, it was suggested thatwe default to a limited number of options thataddress the majority of scanning usage. WhenScanShowAllOptions=1, then all possibleoptions are listed and shown in the drop downlists for these 2 settings. WhenScanShowAllOption=0, a limited set of optionsare shown. The order of some of the items willchange based on this setting.

526


(Added in 1.78 R2)

ScanOpenPanels=1

When ScanOpenPanels=1, the customizedpanel options are not available, and duringscanning, all open panels will be scanned,left-to-right. When ScanOpenPanels=0, thenthe ScanOrder setting determines the panelsthat are scanned and their order.

(Added in 1.78)

ScanOrder=WordComplete,KeyboardAlpha

The ScanOrder determines the order of thePanels scan level. The order is left to right aslisted. Panels should not be duplicated. Thislist can be easily manipulated and generatedfrom the Scanning Settings.The complete list of panels available (9 total) is:ScanOrder=WordComplete,KeyboardAlpha,KeyboardEdit,KeyboardNum,Toolbar,ControlPanel,WindowsControls,Macro,Calculator,and the naming should be self-describing of theactual panels in My-T-Pen Note that in the

527


commercial versions, the WordComplete panelcorresponds to the Magnifier panel.

Here are various examples & scanning ordersfor the panels:

ScanOrder=WordComplete,KeyboardNum,Calculator

ScanOrder=Calculator,ControlPanel,Toolbar,Macro,WindowsControls,KeyboardNum,KeyboardEdit,KeyboardAlpha,WordComplete

ScanOrder=Calculator,KeyboardNum,KeyboardAlpha,KeyboardEdit,Toolbar,WordComplete,ControlPanel,Macro,WindowsControls

ScanOrder=WordComplete,KeyboardNum,Calculator

ScanOrder=Calculator,Controlpanel,Toolbar,KeyboardNum,WordComplete

ScanOrder=KeyboardAlpha,KeyboardEdit,KeyboardNum,Toolbar,ControlPanel

ScanOrder=ControlPanel,Toolbar,KeyboardNum,KeyboardEdit,KeyboardAlpha

For each panel in ScanOrder, there needs to bea corresponding Scan[Panel] entry below thatlists key groupings for the correspondingpanel. In all cases, the keys are numbered from1 to the maximum number of keys on thepanel. Groupings are separated by semi-colons

528


(;), and individual keys are separated in thegroup with a comma (,). It is important thatonly valid key numbers are used, otherwise thebounding scan overlay may be incorrect, andpotentially cause other problems because ofinternal table lookups. It is also important thatno spaces be used, or any other characters orpunctuation. Also, there is an internalmaximum of 25 groupings allowed - if this isexceeded, the additional groupings will not beused. In order to provide additional examples(showing alternative groupings and row vs.column scans) and the correct entries, thefollowing lists various examples for eachpanel, along with the default settings.

Text-To-Speech announcements can beembedded within these groupings, so each rowor column can be named, and announced whenText-To-Speech is enabled within the Soundssection. All that is required is that the word or

529


phrase be included prior to the keys listing,enclosed in square brackets (examples below).This is stripped out prior to processing the keysequence. It is important that the squarebrackets be opened and closed correctly, andthat there be no punctuation outside the squarebrackets (spaces, etc. are allowed within thesquare bracket set, but no other square bracketscan be used). The panel descriptions arecurrently fixed internally.

(Added in 1.78)

ScanWordComplete=1,4,7,10,13;2,5,8,11,14;3,6,9,12,15;

There are 15 keys on the WordComplete panel.The default scan settings scans theWordComplete setting as columns, which ismore effective for accessing theWordComplete candidate column.

;;This is a row scan of the WordComplete panel

ScanWordComplete=1,2,3;4,5,6;7,8,9;10,11,12;13,14,15;530


;;This is the column scan of the WordCompletepanel with Text-To-Speech announcements

ScanWordComplete=[Options]1,4,7,10,13;[Words]2,5,8,11,14;[Actions]3,6,9,12,15;

(Added in 1.78)

ScanKeyboardAlpha=1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13;14,15,16,17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,25,26,27;28,29,30,31,32,33,34,35,36,37,38,39,40,53;41,42,43,44,45,46,47,48,49,50,51,52,54;55,56,57,58,59,60,61,62,63,64,65,66,67;68,69,70,71,72

There are 72 keys on the Keyboard (Alpha)panel (101 layouts) and 75 keys for the 104layouts. The default scanning is in rows.

;;This is for row scan top to bottom withText-To-Speech Announcements

ScanKeyboardAlpha=[FunctionKeys]1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13; [Num-bers]14,15,16,17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,25,26,27;[Q

531


row]28,29,30,31,32,33,34,35,36,37,38,39,40,53;[Homerow]41,42,43,44,45,46,47,48,49,50,51,52,54;[Shiftrow]55,56,57,58,59,60,61,62,63,64,65,66,67;[Final row]68,69,70,71,72

;;This for 101 layout

;;This is for row scan top to bottom

ScanKeyboardAlpha=1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13;14,15,16,17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,25,26,27;28,29,30,31,32,33,34,35,36,37,38,39,40,53;41,42,43,44,45,46,47,48,49,50,51,52,54;55,56,57,58,59,60,61,62,63,64,65,66,67;68,69,70,71,72

;;This is for row scan bottom to top

ScanKeyboardAlpha=68,69,70,71,72;55,56,57,58,59,60,61,62,63,64,65,66,67;41,42,43,44,45,46,47,48,49,50,51,52,54;28,29,30,31,32,33,34,35,36,37,38,39,40,53;

532


14,15,16,17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,25,26,27;1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13

;;This for 104 layout


ScanKeyboardAlpha=1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13;14,15,16,17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,25,26,27;28,29,30,31,32,33,34,35,36,37,38,39,40,53;41,42,43,44,45,46,47,48,49,50,51,52,54;55,56,57,58,59,60,61,62,63,64,65,66,67;68,73,69,70,71,74,72


ScanKeyboardAlpha=68,73,69,70,71,74,72;55,56,57,58,59,60,61,62,63,64,65,66,67;41,42,43,44,45,46,47,48,49,50,51,52,54;28,29,30,31,32,33,34,35,36,37,38,39,40,53;14,15,16,17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,25,26,27;1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13;

(Added in 1.78)

533


ScanKeyboardEdit=1,2,3;4,5,6;7,8,9;10,11,12,13;

There are 13 keys on the Keyboard (Edit)panel. The default scan settings scans in rows,with the cursor arrow keys as one block.

;;This is row scan top to bottom

ScanKeyboardEdit=1,2,3;4,5,6;7,8,9;10,11,12,13;

;;This is row scan bottom to top

ScanKeyboardEdit=10,11,12,13;7,8,9;4,5,6;1,2,3;

;;This is column scan left

ScanKeyboardEdit=1,4,7,11;2,5,8,10,12;3,6,9,13;

;;This is column scan right

ScanKeyboardEdit=3,6,9,13;2,5,8,10,12;1,4,7,11;

(Added in 1.78)

ScanKeyboardNum=1,2,3,4;5,6,7;9,10,11;12,13,14;16,17;8,15;

There are 17 keys on the Keyboard(Numpad/numeric) panel. The default scan

534


settings scans in rows, with special handlingfor the elongated buttons on the right.


ScanKeyboardNum=1,2,3,4;5,6,7;9,10,11;12,13,14;16,17;8,15;


ScanKeyboardNum=8,15;16,17;12,13,14;9,10,11;5,6,7;1,2,3,4;

(Added in 1.78)

ScanToolBar=1;

There are 3 keys on the Toolbar panel. Thedefault scan settings only highlights the toptool button. Note that this means the panel scanand the key scan are the same, meaning 2left-clicks are required to select the key.

;;This scans all three buttons (but notrecommended for the scanning user)

ScanToolBar=1;2;3;

535


;;This scans all three buttons in an overlappinggroup

ScanToolBar=1,2;2,3;

(Added in 1.78)

ScanControlPanel=1,2;3,4;5,6;7,8;9,10;11,12;

There are 12 keys on the control panel. Thedefault scan settings highlights the 6 rows of 2buttons.





;;This is for column scan left to right

ScanControlPanel=1,3,5,7,9,11;2,4,6,8,10,12;

;;This is for column scan right to left

ScanControlPanel=2,4,6,8,10,12;1,3,5,7,9,11;

536


(Added in 1.78)

ScanMacro=1;2,3,4;5,6,7;8,9,10;11,12,13;14,15,16;

There are 16 keys on the Macro panel. Thedefault scan settings highlights the top buttonand the 5 rows of 3 buttons.


ScanMacro=1;2,3,4;5,6,7;8,9,10;11,12,13;14,15,16;


ScanMacro=14,15,16;11,12,13;8,9,10;5,6,7;2,3,4;1;


ScanMacro=1;2,5,8,11,14;3,6,9,12,15;4,7,10,13,16;


ScanMacro=1;4,7,10,13,16;3,6,9,12,15;2,5,8,11,14;

(Added in 1.78)

ScanWindowsControls=1,2,3;4,5,6;7,8,9;10,11,12;13,14,15;16,17,18;

537


There are 18 keys on the Windows Controlspanel. The default scan settings highlights the6 rows of 3 buttons.






ScanWindowsControls=1,4,7,10,13,16;2,5,8,11,14,17;3,6,9,12,15,18;


ScanWindowsControls=3,6,9,12,15,18;2,5,8,11,14,17;1,4,7,10,13,16;

(Added in 1.78)

ScanCalculator=1,2,3;4,5,6,7,8;10,11,12,13,14;15,16,17,18,19;21,22,23,24,25;9,20

There are 25 keys on the Calculator panel. Thedefault scan settings highlights the rows, andhandles the elongated buttons on the rightseparately.

538



ScanCalculator=1,2,3;4,5,6,7,8;10,11,12,13,14;15,16,17,18,19;21,22,23,24,25;9,20


ScanCalculator=9,20;21,22,23,24,25;15,16,17,18,19;10,11,12,13,14;4,5,6,7,8;1,2,3


ScanCalculator=1;2;3;4,10,15,21;5,11,16,22;6,12,17,23;7,13,24,18;8,14,19,25;9,20


ScanCalculator=3;2;1;9,20;8,14,19,25;7,13,24,18;6,12,17,23;5,11,16,22;4,10,15,21

[MouseButtons]

LeftButton=0

RightButton=2

MiddleButton=3

ShiftDisplay=1

The MouseButtons settings are used to trackwhich actions are triggered by the MouseButton. LeftButton or RightButton must be set

539


to 0 indicating the button that will press aMy-T-Pen button. The valid settings are 1-63,referenced as follows:

1=Ignore Button Press, 2=Move My-T-Pen3=Look-Through My-T-Pen, 4=OpenMy-T-Pen Menu, 5=Minimize My-T-Pen,6=Enter Key, 7=Escape Key, 8=Tab Key,9=Space Bar, 10=BackSpace Key,11=Up-Arrow, 12=Down-Arrow,13=Left-Arrow, 14=Right-Arrow, 15=Insert,16=Delete, 17=Home, 18=End, 19=Page Up,20=Page Down, 21=F1 (Help), 22=F2, 23=F3,24=F4, 25=F5, 26=F6, 27=F7, 28=F8, 29=F9,30=F10 (Menu), 31=F11, 32=F12, 33=ShiftKey, 34=Ctrl Key, 35=Alt Key, 36=Ctrl-Ins(Copy), 37=Shift-Ins (Paste), 38=Shift-Del(Cut), 39=Ctrl-Del (Clear), 40=Alt-Backspace(Undo), 41=Alt-F4 (Close Window),42=Alt-Tab (Next App), 43=Alt-Esc (FindApp), 44=Alt-Space (System Menu), 45=Alt-Y

540


(Yes), 46=Alt-N (No), 47=Shift-Tab,48=Shift-F4 (Tile), 49=Shift-F5 (Cascade),50=Ctrl-F4 (Close Child), 51=Ctrl-Tab (SelectChild), 52=Ctrl-Esc (Task List),53=Ctrl-Space, 54=Ctrl-Backspace,55=Ctrl-Enter, 56=Ctrl-Home, 57=Ctrl-End,58=Ctrl-Page Up, 59=Ctrl-Page Down,60=Ctrl-Up, 61=Ctrl-Down, 62=Ctrl-Left,63=Ctrl-Right

The ShiftDisplay is included for those userswho use the Shift key as one of their buttons -My-T-Pen repaints the shifted keys when theShift state is on (Shift-Key Down), and there isa slight delay on slower systems. To alleviatethis delay, you may set ShiftDisplay=0.

[StartUp]

QuickHelp=1

Magnifier=1

Calc=0541


Alpha=1

Edit=1

Numeric=1

Window=1

Info=1

MacroBrd=0

MytCtl=1

(Added in 1.77)

MyTMPanel=1

The StartUp settings are used to indicate whichMy-T-Pen Panels will open at My-T-Penstartup. If these are changed, My-T-Penconfiguration will change and then open in thenew configuration from then on.

These settings can be manipulated thru theCONFGMTS utility (ConfigureMTS), the

542


following indicates the relationship to theavailable panels in My-T-Pen:

Alpha - Keyboard panel (letters, function keys)

Edit - Edit Panel (arrow keys, edit keys)

Numeric - Numeric Keypad panel

Window - Windows Controls panel

MacroBrd - Macro panel

Magnifier - Magnifier panel

Calc - Calculator panel

QuickHelp - QuickHelp panel

Info - System Information panel

MytCtl - Control panel

MyTMPanel - Tool bar panel

[SysInfo]

Time=1

543


Date=1

CurPos=1

FreeDsk=1

FreeMem=1

FreeRes=1

Order=TDMSRC

The settings Time, Date, CurPos, FreeDsk,FreeMem, FreeRes indicate if the display isshown.

The Order indicates which order theinformation is displayed.

The relationships are as follows:

Time, Order T, Current System Time.

Date, Order D, Current System Date.

CurPos, Order C, Current Cursos Position.

FreeDsk, Order S, Free Disk Space.

544


FreeMem, Order M, Free System Memory.

FreeRes, Order R, Free System Resources.

(Added in 1.77)

TimeDisplayNoSeconds=0

This setting was requested by a My-T-Pen TSuser to reduce network traffic when using thetime display on the System Information panel.When TimeDisplayNoSeconds=1, instead ofhours, minutes & seconds (HH:MM:SS), thedisplay is hours & minutes (HH:MM), and theupdate occurs only once 1 minute, instead ofonce a second.

[CalculatorTape]

CalcTapeActive=1

OpenTapeWithCalc=0

CalcSendWithCR=0

CalcSendWithEXE=0

545


Program=

DecimalDigits=6

CalcTapeActive=1 indicates that the CalculatorTape can be activated from the CalculatorPanel. When the Calculator Panel opens, theBack Space is changed to indicate "Tape." Ifclicked, the Calculator Tape will open. At anytime, by clicking on the Display, the CalculatorTape will open, or if already open, will close.When the Calculator Panel is closed, theCalculator Tape will automatically close. IfCalcTapeActive=0, these features will not beavailable. As an alternative, ifOpenTapeWithCalc=1, the Calculator Tapewill open when the Calculator Panel is open. IfCalcSendWithCR=1, the [Enter] Key will beappended to the keystrokes sent when the SD(Send) button is clicked on the CalculatorPanel. If CalcSendWithEXE=1, the applicationspecified with the Program= setting will be

546


launched when the SD (Send) button is clickedon the Calculator Panel. Program= is used tospecify the path & file name of the executableprogram to launch whenCalcSendWithEXE=1. Only short file names isrecommended for maximum compatibility.DecimalDigits sets the number of digits thatthe My-T-Pen calculator will display to theright of the decimal place. Valid settings are 1through 6.

[Colors]

Display3DKeys=1

If Display3DKeys=1, then the shaded bitmap isused as a background for the keys - this isrecommended for 16-bit color or higher (256colors is not sufficient) Set Display3DKeys=0to disable the high-resolution display.

Note for sizes smaller than 8, the high-res isnot supported because there are not enough

547


pixels to create an acceptable look.

SystemColors=0

If SystemColors=0, then the following sectiondefines the colors available for the differentpanels. If SystemColors=1, then the colors areretreived from the Windows System, as setupin Display Properties, Appearance.

Colors are RGB values, listed RRR,GGG,BBB.If your monitor displays more than 16 colors,you may adjust these values here & avoid theColors Options in My-T-Pen Setup.

ToolTextIn=0,0,0

Color of the Control Panel text if the Panelindicated is not displayed

ToolTextOut=0,0,255

Color of the Control Panel text if the Panelindicated is displayed

Text1=0,0,0548


Face1=192,192,192

High1=255,255,255

Shadow1=128,128,128

Button Text, Button Face, Button Highlight,Button Shadow of the Magnifier Panel.

Text2=0,0,0

Face2=192,192,192

High2=255,255,255

Shadow2=128,128,128

Button Text, Button Face, Button Highlight,Button Shadow of the Keyboard Panel.

Text3=0,0,0

Face3=192,192,192

High3=255,255,255

Shadow3=128,128,128

549


Button Text, Button Face, Button Highlight,Button Shadow of the Edit Panel.

Text4=0,0,0

Face4=192,192,192

High4=255,255,255

Shadow4=128,128,128

Button Text, Button Face, Button Highlight,Button Shadow of the Numeric Panel.

Text5=0,0,128

Face5=192,192,192

High5=255,255,255

Shadow5=128,128,128

Button Text, Button Face, Button Highlight,Button Shadow of the Windows ControlsPanel.

Text6=128,0,0

550


Face6=192,192,192

High6=255,255,255

Shadow6=128,128,128

Button Text, Button Face, Button Highlight,Button Shadow of the Macro Panel.

Text7=0,0,0

Face7=192,192,192

High7=255,255,255

Shadow7=128,128,128

Button Text, Button Face, Button Highlight,Button Shadow of the Calculator Panel.

SysT=255,255,255

System Information: Time

SysD=0,255,255

System Information: Date

SysC=255,255,0551


System Information: Cursor Position

SysS=255,0,0

System Information: Disk Space

SysM=255,0,255

System Information: System MemoryAvailable

SysR=0,255,0

System Information: System Resources

SysQ=0,255,0

Quick Help Display

Sys#=0,255,0

Calculator Display

CalcMem=255,255,0

Calculator Memory indicator

[Help]

552


This is a lookup section to map internal helptopics to various external help manifestations.During the 16 years of releases, various helpformats have been introduced and then madeobsolete. Currently HTML and PDF are in use,as the most flexible and platform independent,in hopes that they might last a bit longer thanWindows only help formats. This is used bythe HelpInterface function in IMGVERS.DLL,and should not be modified by the user. Notethat the INI file in the same folder asIMGVERS.DLL is used for this lookup. If helpreports a problem with the help file, verifyingthe INI in the installation folder and thissection may be helpful.

THE FOLLOWING ARE SPECIFICAPPLICATIONS IN WHICH My-T-PenREQUIRES SPECIAL SETTINGS

Certain Windows Applications may be affectedby My-T-Pen because of the way they were

553


written. You may set My-T-Pen to act normallyfor any application by setting the Configurationin My-T-Pen Setup or editing theMYTPEN.INI file.

[Special]

MyTSpcl0000=Command Prompt

MyTSpcl0001=CMD.EXE

IMPORTANT: Because of the revised interfaceapproach, and the general improvement inquality of all windows software, many of thesecapabilities & settings are no longer necessary.In fact, the settings included are for examplepurposes only and they are not required forproper operation of the windowed commandprompt. Because these advanced specialhandling capabilities add a great deal offlexibility to the software, all documentationand notes remain.

The Special area designates which applications554


require special consideration by My-T-Pen.These are used internally and should not bemodified by the user here. Refer to My-T-PenSetup to add, remove, or modify these settings.

The following MyTSpcl????= lists theapplication name that My-T-Pen will check inthe application section below for any specialsettings. This application name is the WindowText (Caption Heading) for the Window. Toadd an application to this list, it must beassigned the next sequential number forMyTSpcl????.

ADVANCED NOTES:

The Special settings are used internally byMy-T-Pen to handle the vagaries of differentWindows applications - they are documentedhere in case of similar problems with otherWindows applications.

SPECIAL SETTINGS

555


Special=1 - is used to track internal windowchild controls for Edit, Buttons, List boxes,Scroll bars, etc. - No application should setSpecial=1.

Special=2 - this is for Paintbrush and the factthat it loses the input focus and DOES NOTregain it if another application is activatedwhile text is being entered. This may not beuseful in any other application because of thespecific internal windows messages handledwith this setting - if, however, an application iswritten in the same way, and My-T-Pen isunable to send keystrokes to that application,the user may wish to try this setting for thatapplication. NOTE: This only applies ifInterfaceApproach=0

Special=3 is used internally to handle thedifferences between Help in version 3.0 and3.1.

Special=4 was used to handle the edit areas in556


the PIF editor for the main window. Thissetting is specific to the PIF editor, and will notwork in any other cases. TheInterfaceApproach=1 setting has eliminated theneed for this special action. PIF editor will notact properly if InterfaceApproach=0.

Special=5 is used to bring the Task Windowover My-T-Pen in version 3.0 and handlespecial screen repaint issues - this is specific tothe Task List.

Action Settings:

Action=0 - ignore

Action=1 - minimize to button

Action=2 - minimize to icon

Action=3 - hide My-T-Pen behind Window asan icon

Action=4 - move My-T-Pen off of Window

Action=5 - resize Window, move My-T-Pen off557


Action=6 - Dialog Type Window - MoveMy-T-Pen to bottom

Action=7 - Popup Type Window (Help) - MoveWindow off of My-T-Pen

Flags=1 - Window receives Focus

Flags=2 - Window does not get Input Focus

Action=8 - Screen Saver - My-T-Pen floats

Action=9 - Screen Saver - My-T-Pen bounces

Action=10 - My-T-Pen hides

Action=11 - 29 (RESERVED)

Action=30 - Use Secondary Strategy Win 3.0Only

Action=31 - Use Secondary Strategy Win 3.1Only

Action=32 - Use Secondary Strategy Always

The Flags entry is also checked for allowing aButton Move to a particular class of windows.

558


For example, if Action=0 and Flags=1 for aparticular class, this class will be ignored,AND the button will not move to this class ofwindow. Essentially the Flags setting shouldonly be used for Action=7 as outlined above,or set Flags=1 to prevent the button frommoving to this class of window.

[Command Prompt]

Contention=1

Action=4

[CMD.EXE]

Contention=1

Action=4

[Classes]

MyTClass0000=#32770

MyTClass0001=bordlg

MyTClass0002=Dialog559


MyTClass0003=MS_WINNOTE

MyTClass0004=tutor

MyTClass0005=tutprogman

MyTClass0006=tutwrite

MyTClass0007=ListBox

MyTClass0008=ComboBox

MyTClass0009=ComboLBox

MyTClass0010=WFS_Drives

MyTClass0011=WFS_Drive

MyTClass0012=WindowsScreenSaverClass

MyTClass0013=Sleep

MyTClass0014=FXPopup

MyTClass0015=C_TurboType

MyTClass0016=bosa_sdm_Microsoft Word6.0

560


MyTClass0017=bosa_sdm_XL

MyTClass0018=LOGON

MyTClass0019=Blank Screen Saver

MyTClass0020=My-T-Soft Ctrl-Alt-Del

MyTClass0021=tooltips_class32

MyTClass0022=Button

[#32770]

Action=6

[bordlg]

Action=6

[Dialog]

Action=6

[MS_WINNOTE]

Action=7

Flags=1

561


[tutor]

Action=10

[tutprogman]

Action=10

[tutwrite]

Action=10

[ListBox]

Action=31

[ComboBox]

Action=32

[ComboLBox]

Action=31

[WFS_Drives]

Action=30

[WFS_Drive]

562


Action=30

[WindowsScreenSaverClass]

Action=10

[Sleep]

Action=10

[FXPopup]

Action=10

[C_TurboType]

Action=7

Flags=2

[bosa_sdm_Microsoft Word 6.0]

Action=6

[bosa_sdm_XL]

Action=6

[LOGON]

563


Action=10

[Blank Screen Saver]

Action=10

[My-T-Soft Ctrl-Alt-Del]

Action=6

[tooltips_class32]

Action=0

Flags=1

[Button]

Action=0

Flags=1

ADVANCED NOTES:

The Classes listed here are the classes thatMy-T-Pen must act in special ways. Primarilythis list is referenced internally duringMy-T-Pen operation against the active window.

564


If a match is found, the action My-T-Pen willtake is given by the action.

IMPORTANT: Each Class on this list willaffect the system memory that My-T-Penrequires, and will affect the system operationspeed within Windows since this list must bechecked against the active window. There is noreason to remove any of the entries on this list,and if you do, proper operation of My-T-Pencannot be ensured.

If My-T-Pen does not act the way you want itto act, cross check the My-T-Pen actions listedabove, and if applicable, add the class andaction to the list, as documented below in theexample for screen savers.

NOTE: Screen Savers.

The main reason to add to this list would be toadd a screen saver that you use which is notcurrently on the list. To add an entry: Add the

565


Next sequential entry to the [Classes] section.

e.g.

MyTClass0028=MyScreenSaver

and then add an entry below it as:

[MyScreenSaver]

Action=10

This will result in My-T-Pen hiding behind thescreen saver when the screen saver becomesactive.

NOTE: Reference the actions above foralternate screen saver actions.

Reference the ClassWatch setting in the[Configuration] \section to find out the class ofthe active window.

[MenuClasses]

MyTClass0000=#32768

MyTClass0001=BaseBar566


MyTClass0002=MsoCommandBarPopup

MyTClass0003=DV2ControlHost

These settings have been added to allowadditions of application defined menus.Windows 98 added to the original Popupmenuclass with the BaseBar, and Office 97 addedthe MsoCommandBarPopup. Since thesemenus work better when displayed aboveMy-T-Pen, internal settings & action allow theclasses of windows in this list to appear aboveMy-T-Pen. There is a maximum of 10 classesthat can be entered in this list.

[StayBehindClasses]

MyTClass0000=The Magnifier

MyTClass0001=CrossScanner FingerScan

MyTClass0002=CrossScanner Desktop

MyTClass0003=Defer:WordComplete

567


These settings have been added to providemore flexibility for handling other windows inthe system. Because the MenuClasses settingare used for Menus and can affect focus issues,an additional setting for other interfacewindows that affect the windows display orderhas been added. My-T-Pen will not positionabove (visibly on top) of these windows. The"Defer:" prefix indicates a modified logicapproach internally, so that when the mouse ispositioned in the overlap between the keyboardwindow and the indicated deferred window, anoverride state occurs. When the mouse slidesonto the keyboard window in this state, thekeyboard will then stay above the indicatedwindow class. This lasts until the mousepointer goes off the keyboard window. Thisallows a flexible approach, designedspecifically for the WordComplete window,which stays topmost, unless the user wants totype a letter, which can be accomplished by

568


sliding off the deferred window onto thekeyboard, bringing the keyboard on top of the(otherwise) topmost window. There can beonly 1 Defer entry in this list.

Important Note: The StayBehindClassesarea ONLY refers to other windows thathave the Topmost attribute in the system.This cannot be used for normal typewindows. The Window manager sortsmultiple Topmost windows, which in allcases will be above other non-topmostwindows. The StayBehindClasses is usedto help sort these topmost windows. Inorder to position the topmost My-T-Penwindow below some application window,the application window must also have theTopmost attribute. For application levelcontrol of the keyboard window, refer toIMG’s Build-A-Board.

569


(OnScreen only)

[DoNotArrangeClasses]

maximum 32 characters

MyTClass0000=CrossScanner

MyTClass0001=MyTSetup

MyTClass0002=Shell_TrayWnd

MyTClass0003=Calculator Tape

MyTClass0004=The Magnifier

MyTClass0005=The Right Touch

MyTClass0006=TouchRight Utilities

MyTClass0007=ScrlCtrl

MyTClass0008=DV2ControlHost

MyTClass0009=SmartClick

MyTClass0010=WorkerW

MyTClass0011=SysListView32

570


MyTClass0012=ImlWinCls

MyTClass0013=CrossScanner Cursor Park

These settings have been added to allowadditions of applications that the user does notwant to be Auto-arranged whenAutoArrange=1 - (see above for this setting).Because certain OnScreen & CrossScannerwindows should not be affected byAuto-Arrange when enabled, this list providesthe list of window classes that will not bearranged.

[MacroPanelsToOpen]

The default setting is to have no panelsautomatically open. The list that would appearhere is appended to the Window Names in thespecial MyTSpcl????= list above.

NOTE: If MacroPanelsToOpen includes one ofthe Special settings windows names, only theSpecial Settings will work & the Macro Panel

571


will not open.

IMPORTANT: Each Panel on this list willaffect the system memory that My-T-Penrequires, and will affect the system operationspeed within Windows since this list must bechecked against the active window.

The list is built fromOpenPanel????=MAC?????.KMF entries.

Example:

OpenPanel0000=MAC00032.KMF



where OpenPanel???? entries must be insequential order starting at 0000. The numbersmust be sequential. The Macro File name withID embedded in the name must be the entry.

Since there is no easy way to view the MacroPanel at the file level, these settings should be

572


handled within My-T-Pen Setup.

[Keys]

MyTKeys0000=78,16384

The [Keys] section lists a sequential list of keyIDs and enhanced settings code. The firstnumber in the list is the key ID for eachMyTKeys???? entry, and the second number(after the comma) lists the enhanced settingsID. See BUILD-A-MACRO notes above forthe Key IDs list.

The MyTKeys???? must be sequential startingat MyTKeys0000. e.g. Additional entries to theabove would be

MyTKeys0001=1,1

MyTKeys0002=12,64

The Enhanced setting is a binary code(decimally displayed) that is set as follows:

Enable/Disable is 1-128573


Launch is 256-32768

For any particular key, the bits are "or"-ed, orsummed as follows

0 - Key enabled

+1 Disable Keystroke

+2 Disable Shift + Keystroke

+4 Disable Ctrl + Keystroke

+8 Disable Alt + Keystroke

+16 Disable Alt-Shift + Keystroke

+32 Disable Ctrl-Shift + Keystroke

+64 Disable Alt-Ctrl + Keystroke

+128 Disable Alt-Ctrl-Shift + Keystroke

+256 Launch with Keystroke

+512 Launch with Shift + Keystroke

+1024 Launch with Ctrl + Keystroke

574


+2048 Launch with Alt + Keystroke

+4096 Launch with Alt-Shift + Keystroke

+8192 Launch with Ctrl-Shift + Keystroke

+16384 Launch with Alt-Ctrl + Keystroke

+32768 Launch with Alt-Ctrl-Shift +Keystroke

The above setting for MyTKeys0000 is for theDelete Key (with Ctrl and the Alt key pressed)to launch the Key EXE below (for Key0078).The utility will force Windows to restart, soCtrl-Alt-Delete on the keyboard will result in awarm reboot. When the Logon Utilities areenabled in Windows 2000 / XP, a Ctrl-Alt-Delwill perform the same result as if done on aphysical keyboard, e.g. show a dialog in thesecure WinLogon desktop. In Windows Vista, aseparate set of buttons will be displayed on theuser desktop, allowing similar functionality tothe WinLogon options shown if a Ctrl-Alt-Del

575


is performed by a physical keyboard (theGINA interface has been dropped by Microsoftin Windows Vista, so transferring to the secureWinLogon desktop does not occur). Optionsinclude: Lock Workstation/Switch User, LogOff, Restart, Shutdown, and the Task Manager.

[Key0078]

Program=%PRODDIR%\CTALTDEL.EXE

NOTE: This assumes the default install on anormal windows setup - it is included primarilyfor example. Each Key ID can have 1 Key EXEassociated with it, and 1 or more keycombinations can launch this EXE based onthe MyTKeys???? setting above in [Keys].

Note that the Enable/Disable portion of akeystroke is independent of its Launch setting.The Keystroke should be initiated prior to thelaunch of the EXE, but system & Windowsissues may affect this timing. The path & file

576


name conform to "short" file names forbackwards compatibility. Make sure you do notuse Long file names in the path.

Developer’s Kit Notes: The followingsections are NOT in the default INI asshipped with the product, but since theyare valid & available entries, they arebriefly listed here for reference. Forcomplete coverage, entry information, andfurther details on these sections, pleaserefer to the Developer’s Kit documentation.

AddOnDLL sections

There are 3 possible sections available -[AddOnDLL1], [AddOnDLL2],[AddOnDLL3]. Only a single section is listedhere. The Developer’s Kit covers a sampleAddOnDLL, along with a Logging Log DLLusing these capabilities.

577


[AddOnDLL1]

DLLName=%PRODDIR%ADDONDLL\ADDON.dll

InitializeFunctionName=InitFuncType7

InitializeFunctionType=7

TimerFunctionName=TimerFuncType9

TimerFunctionType=9

TimerDelay=1000

CleanupFunctionName=CleanupFuncType8

CleanupFunctionType=8

Value1=1

Value2=201

Value3=3302

PaintDLL section

The Paint DLL allows an external DLL tohandle certain painting tasks within My-T-Pen,allowing customization to the panel

578


background, and the keys (both keybackground image and key label) Refer to theDeveloper’s Kit for details and a sample DLLthat shows some custom painted images.

[PaintDLL]

DLLName=%PRODDIR%\PaintDLL\Release\PaintDLL.DLL

PaintFrame=1

PaintFrameFunc=PaintDLLPaintFrame

PaintKey=0

PaintKeyFunc=PaintDLLPaintKey

PaintKeyBackground=1

PaintKeyBackgroundFunc=PaintDLLPaintKeyBackground

PaintKeyModBackground=0

PaintKeyModBackgroundFunc=PaintDLLPaintKeyModBackground

PaintKeyLabel=1

PaintKeyLabelFunc=PaintDLLPaintKeyLabel

579


WordsDLL section

The Words DLL allows an external DLL tohandle Word List functionality when theWordComplete panel is available. Refer to theDeveloper’s Kit for details and a sample DLLthat shows the integration.

[WordsDLL]

DLLName=%PRODDIR%\WordsDLL\Release\WordsDLL.DLL

WordsGetWordListFunc=GetWordList

WordsTypedWordFunc=TypedWord

580

Chapter 11. ErrorMessages and Numbers

My-T-Pen Errors & Notes are listed is thissection describing details and possibleresolutions.

My-T-Pen Error MessagesMy-T-Pen Errors & Notes are listed belowalphabetically with the following information:

Internal Error Codes

Explanations

Possible Solutions to resolve the problem

If you are unable to resolve the problem andrequire technical support please write down the

581

Chapter 11. Error Messages and Numbers

error code and refer to the Customer Supportsection of this manual.

My-T-Pen is Already Open! Cannot OpenAnother...

Internal Code: 1

Explanation: My-T-Pen is already running.

Solutions: My-T-Pen should be visiblesomewhere on your screen display - it may beminimized to a button or icon.

If using the Developer’s Kit, if is possible thatMy-T-Pen is open, but off-screen, and notaccessible - you can try going to a higherresolution (Control Panel | Display | Settings,and raise the resolution (e.g. 800x600 to1024x768)). You can also use theCLOSEMTS.EXE from the Developer’s Kit toforce My-T-Pen to close. If you haveconfigured My-T-Pen to open off-screen, youmay run My-T-Pen Setup | Configuration |

582


Special Options | Return to InstallationDefaults. You may also try MOVEWMTS.EXEto move back on the visible screen, then SaveSettings & Save Position. Refer to Developer’sKit notes for further details.

My-T-Pen Initialization Error! Cannotaccess My-T-Pen Initialization File:MYTPEN.INI

Internal Code: 39

Explanation: My-T-Pen could not access theMYTPEN.INI file.

Solutions: The My-T-Pen Initialization file isnot in the Installation directory. You can runMy-T-Pen Setup from the Program ManagerMy-T-Pen group, selectConfiguration-Special-Return To InstallationDefaults, and select Yes, then retry My-T-Pen.

My-T-Pen Initialization Error! Cannotaccess My-T-Pen Keyboard File:

583


KEYBOARD.KBF

Internal Codes: 4, 82, 83, 85, 86, 87, 88, 90,91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 97

Explanation: My-T-Pen could not access theKEYBOARD.KBF file.

Solutions: If My-T-Pen cannot access theKEYBOARD.KBF file located in theMy-T-Pen Installation Directory, My-T-Pencannot be run. You may wish to exit Windows,restart, and retry. If this does not work, youwill have to re-install My-T-Pen from diskette.

Internal Codes: 84, 89, 96

Explanation: The KEYBOARD.KBF file iscorrupt.

Solutions: You can try to restore the originalfiles by going into My-T-Pen Setup |Configuration (Appearance [Advanced]) |Special Options and select Return to

584


Installation defaults, or you will need tore-install My-T-Pen.

My-T-Pen File Error! Cannot accessMy-T-Pen Macro File: MAC?????.KMF orKeyboard Macro file KYBD????.KMF

Internal Code: 98, 108, 109, 110, 111, 112,113, 114, 115, 116, 117, 118

Explanation: My-T-Pen could not access thefile listed in the Error message.

Solutions: You may have deleted the MacroFile listed, and the Macro Panel is notavailable. Check all Macro Key assignments toverify that none are attempting to open anon-existent Macro Panel. There may be somesystem or permissions issue that is preventingaccess to the file - you can try as anAdministrator to see if results are different.You should verify the installation (orre-install).

585


There is not enough System MemoryAvailable for My-T-Pen to run in thisConfiguration. Consult Your Manual.

Internal Code: 103

Explanation: There is not enough WindowsGlobal Memory available to operate My-T-Penin the current configuration.

Solutions: You may try to increase SystemMemory available to all applications withinWindows, or operate My-T-Pen in a smallerconfiguration and/or size. My-T-Pen requiresmore System Memory as the screen displayarea increases. As you open Panels or go to alarger size, the demand increases. You may tryto increase the system memory by increasingthe Windows Swap File (see Virtual Memoryunder 386 Enhanced in the Windows ControlPanel), or physically adding more memory toyour system.

586


This is a Single User Version of My-T-Pen.Please Contact Innovation ManagementGroup, Inc. for Multi-User Licensing.

Internal Code: 101

Explanation: This is a Single User Version.

Solutions: Contact Innovation ManagementGroup, Inc. regarding Multi-User and SiteLicensing of My-T-Pen.

Too many clocks or timers! Close SomeWindows or Stop Animations, then Retry.

Internal Code: 3

Explanation: There is not a System Timeravailable

Solutions: You can close some windows, orstop any animations, or try exiting Windowsand restart.

Window Creation Error! Cannot continue!Check System and Try again.

587


Internal Code: 1

Explanation: Windows could not create aWindow for My-T-Pen

Solutions: You may have too many windowsopen, and there are not enough resources, orthe Windows Environment may have beencorrupted, or some other system error. EitherClose other windows and try again, or exitWindows, and restart.

Window Tracking Error. Close My-T-Penand Restart.

Internal Code: 1001, 1002, 1003, 1004, 1005

Explanation: InterfaceApproach is set to 0 inMYTPEN.INI and there has been an internalerror in My-T-Pen.

Solutions: Close My-T-Pen, and reset theInterfaceApproach in the MYTPEN.INI to 1,then restart My-T-Pen.

588


Windows Internal Controls Are Active inActive Window! Cannot Remove My-T-Pen!Close Active Window or Switch to AnotherWindow, then Retry.

Internal Code 1000:

Explanation: InterfaceApproach is set to 0 inMYTPEN.INI, and Windows Internal Controlshave been subclassed

Solution: Close Active Window, or Switch toAnother Window and retry.

Windows Global Memory Allocation Error!Close My-T-Pen and Restart.

Internal Codes: 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14,15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26,27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38,40, 99. 100, DLL

Explanation: My-T-Pen attempted to Lock orAllocate Global Memory, and received an error

589


code from Windows.

Solutions: See Solutions under "There is notenough System Memory..." above.

Windows Local Memory Allocation Error!Close My-T-Pen and Restart.

Internal Codes: 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49,50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61,62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73,74, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79, 80, 81, 102, 104, 105,106, 107, 118, 119, 120, 121, 122, 123

Explanation: My-T-Pen is unable to accessLocal Memory to My-T-Pen. You should neversee this error.

Solutions: Close My-T-Pen and Restart. If thatis not successful, Exit Windows and Restart.

590

Index

Symbols101Keyboard, 71104Keyboard, 712-ButtonMouse, 2162037 / 2038yearlimitation,3603-ButtonMouse, 2163D KeyDisplay, 110

AABCKeyboard,158

About thisproduct, 317

ActionButton, 215

Action ButtonMove, 119

ActionPanel -INI setting,474

ActionPanelEnabled- INI setting,480

ActivateKeystrokeMacro, 189

591

Index

ActiveApplication(ActiveWindow), 71

Add A Panel,184

Add/RemovePrograms, 2,19

AdditionalKeyboardNotes, 161

addresses, 183

Administrator,20, 96

AdministratorRights, 224,245, 281

AdvancedLogon

Configuration,258

AdvancedNotes forLogonUtilities, 271

AdvancedUser Notes,297

Allow ActionButton Move,119

AllowFrameMove- INI setting,446

AllowGrayedKey- INI setting,499

AllowReadOnlyOperation- INI setting,506

592

Index

Alt Keyoperation, 71AlternateVirtualInterface, 119AltGr, 160AltGr Keyoperation, 72Application(Launch fromMacro Key),200ApplicationNotes, 308Auto Logon,278, 291Auto-Open(MacroPanel), 81AutoArrange -INI setting,

477AutoArrangeActive- INI setting,478AutoCapI -INI setting,476AutomaticKeystrokes,116AutomaticLogon, 227,278, 281, 291AutomaticTyping, 116AutomaticU -INI setting,475AutoSaveMove- INI setting,478

593

Index

AutoSpace -INI setting,475

AutoSpaceDisable- INI setting,475

Bbackground,64

Background(Keyboard),150

BackgroundColor- INI setting,424

BIOS, 52

border, 113

Border - Key,121

BorderNoHit -INI setting,448

Build-A-Board,366

Build-A-Board layoutsupport, 389

Build-A-Macro,183

Build-A-Macro Notes,367

Button(Minimize tobutton)Position

594

Index

Options, 420ButtonDisplay, 392ButtonIgnoreWindowXY- INI setting,423ButtonOffsetX- INI setting,419ButtonOffsetY- INI setting,419ButtonOverrideH- INI setting,420ButtonOverrideW- INI setting,420ButtonOverrideX- INI setting,422

ButtonOverrideY- INI setting,422

ButtonSingleMonitorLimit- INI setting,424

bypassautomaticlogon, 255

CCalc(Calculatorpanel), 68

calculatordisplay, 83

CalculatorPanel, 82

595

Index

Calculatorsection [Cal-culatorTape](INI file), 545

CalculatorTape, 83

Caps Locksetting, 458

CapsLockMode- INI setting,460

CaptionWatch- INI setting,419

Caret (textcursor), 71

Catalog, 56

CD(CD-ROM orDVD), 1, 18

Center - INIsetting, 427

CenterOversize- INI setting,496

Certificate ofAuthenticity,1, 18

CheckFloppies- INI setting,433

CheckMinMax- INI setting,434

Classessection[Classes] (INIfile), 559

ClassWatch -INI setting,435

596

Index

Clear Key(Macro), 201Click (Soundfeedback),396Close(CalculatorTape), 83Close (ChildWindow), 74Close (Exit),93Close (Exit)(Quit), 68Close(My-T-Pen),93Close(Panels), 68Close (Toolbar), 65

CLOSE(Window), 74

Close a panel,68

ColorsDialog, 146

Colors section[Colors] (INIfile), 547

CommandLine Options,380

CommonlyAskedQuestions, 44

ConfigPath -INI setting,408

Configuration- Special, 393

597

Index

ConfigurationDialog, 104

Configurationsection [Con-figuration](INI file), 408

ConfigureAutomaticLogon, 278,291

ConfigureSecure Logon,229

Configureyour MouseButtons, 215

ContactingIMG, 315

Contention -INI setting,411

ContextSensitiveHelp, 103Control Keyoperation, 71Control Panel,68Control-Alt-Delete,226ControlLogo -INI setting,442ControlPanel -INI setting,445ControlPanelKeyboard- INI setting,445ControlPanelToggleButtons- INI setting,

598

Index

494Copy (Macroediting), 209Copy(WindowsControlPanel), 74Copy Key(Macro), 201Copyrights, 6CreateKeystrokeMacro, 189CrossScanner- INI setting,497CrossScannersection[CrossScan-ner] (INI file),498

CurrentSettings, 91Cursor (dis-play/selecting),219Cursor(MagnifierPanel), 87Cursor (withinMagnifier),114Cursor - INIsetting, 415Cursors, 220Custom Logo,139CustomerService, 54CustomerSuggestions,322

599

Index

CustomerSupport, 54Cut (Macroediting), 209Cut (WindowsControlPanel), 74

DDate (SystemInformationpanel), 85DebuggingOptions -MYT-PEN.INI,435DefaultDomain

Name, 241,251

Default LogonName, 278,292

DefaultPassword,278, 292

Default UserName, 279,292

DefaultDrive -INI setting,433

Delete (Macroediting), 209

Delete MacroPanel, 193

Delete Panel,184

600

Index

DeltaV(AdvancedLogon Con-figuration),259

DeploymentInformation,352

desktop, 259

DeveloperUtilities, 335

Developers,315

Dialogs (reactto), 115

Display, 45

DisplayCursor (withinMagnifier),114

DisplayNotes, 392

DisplayOptions, 110

DisplayChangeEnabled- INI setting,503

Document AllMacro Panels,196

Document AllPanels, 184

DocumentMacro Panel,195

Post toClipboard,195

Save toFile, 195

601

Index

DocumentPanel, 184

DocumentationFile Save, 197

Domain List,254

DoNotArrangesection[DoNotAr-range] (INIfile), 570

DOSWindows, 364

DragMode -INI setting,462

Drivers, 53

DriveTypesToCheck- INI setting,433

DVD(CD-ROM orDVD), 1, 18

Dvoraklayout, 158

DwellTime -INI setting,482

EEdit (edit(keyboard)panel), 68

Edit(KeyboardPanel), 71

EditingMacros, 190

602

Index

Editor - INIsetting, 445

EGA Users,359

Enable AutoLogon, 278,292

EnableShutdownwithoutLogon, 241,252

EnableDwell -INI setting,481

EnableMouseScroll- INI setting,494

EnableOperator- INI setting,440

EnableScan -INI setting,515EnableScreenScroll- INI setting,495equipment, 17ErrorMessages andNumbers, 581EvaulationLicense, 29ExampleMacro Panels,81Exit (Close),93Exit (Close)(Quit), 68ExpandAKey- INI setting,

603

Index

491

ExpandAKeyFactor- INI setting,492

ExtraLogonregistryentries, 270

FFast UserSwitching,395

Features, 14

File Notes,325

Files -Product FilesInstalled, 325

Final ReleaseNotes, 299

Find (ChildWindow), 74

FIND(Window), 74

focus (activewindow), 71

Fonts, 153

ForceUnHook- INI setting,449

four functioncalculator, 82

GGINA - OtherOptions, 243

604

Index

GinaDLL -Registry Entry(WinLogon),245Guide(Using), 7

Hhard diskspace, 17hardwarerequirements,17Help, 90Help(accessing),103Help (QuickHelp panel),

68Help section[Help] (INIfile), 552Hide Keys(Show &Hide), 111HoldShiftCtrl- INI setting,462HOMEDRIVE,275HOMEPATH,275

IIcon (dis-play/selecting),219

605

Index

Icon - INIsetting, 417

Icons, 221

IgnoreSystemCapsLock- INI setting,458

IMG, 22, 24

ImportantUserInformation, 7

incompatibilities,305

Info (SystemInformationpanel), 68

InformationDisplay(SystemInformationPanel), 144

InformationPanel, 84

Informationpanel(display), 109

INI - FileDocumenta-tion(MYT-PEN.INI),406

InitializationFile Docu-mentation(MYT-PEN.INI),406

InnovationManagementGroup, Inc.,54

606

Index

input device,305Input Deviceoptions, 120Install

Installing,1, 18Installing /Un-Installing,18

Install -Silent, 345InstallDeveloper’sKit, 22InstallationInformation,345InstallPath -INI setting,

445

InterfaceSettings, 122

Internal ErrorCodes, 581

International(keyboard)operation, 72

Internationalkeyboard, 160

InternationalKeyboardLayouts andWindows, 165

IntlWordComplete- INI setting,473

Invisible(Cursor), 220

607

Index

JJoysticks, 53

KKBF Files,366

Key Border,121

Key Click,396

Key Display,392

Key EXE, 130

Key Options,108, 125

Keyboard

PhysicalKeyboard,52

Keyboard -INI setting,429

KeyboardBackground,150

Keyboarddisplay(Fonts), 153

KeyboardLayouts, 157

KeyboardLayouts andWindows, 165

KeyboardLogon, 233,248, 283

608

Index

KeyboardNotes, 362

KeyboardPanel, 71

KeyboardPanels (al-pha/edit/numeric),71

KeyboardSelect dialog,157

Keyboard1SizeAdjBase- INI setting,454

Keyboard1SizeAdjLarge- INI setting,454

Keyboard1SizeAdjMedium- INI setting,454

KeyboardCharSetBase- INI setting,454

KeyboardCharSetLarge- INI setting,454

KeyboardCharSetMedium- INI setting,454

KeyboardEnabled- INI setting,481

KeyboardFile- INI setting,472

KeyboardFontBase- INI setting,454

KeyboardFontLarge- INI setting,454

609

Index

KeyboardFontMedium- INI setting,454

KeyboardUpdate- INI setting,453

KeyDelay -INI setting,414

Keys

Alt-Backspace,74

Alt-Esc, 74

Alt-F4, 74,111

Alt-Space,74

Alt-Tab,362

Control-Tab,74Ctrl-Alt-Del,362Ctrl-Break,362Pause Key,48, 362PrintScreenKey, 48,362Shift-F10,74, 362Sys-Rq,362

Keys - specialkeyboardkeys, 362

610

Index

Keys section[Keys] (INIfile), 573

KeysOnlyAssist- INI setting,500

KeysOnlyAssistNumbers- INI setting,500

Keystroke(sequence,down and up),117

Keystroke persingle click,117

Keystrokescript(macro), 183

Keystrokesequence

(macro), 80,183Keystrokes(Automatic),116KeyWatch -INI setting,435KMF Files,366KoreanWindows IMEUsage, 395Kybd(Keyboardpanel), 68

Llanguage

611

Index

(Keyboardlayout), 159

LaunchApplication(Macro Key),200

Launch KeyEXE, 128

LaunchKeyboard onSpecifiedDesktops, 268

LaunchKeyboardPrior toLogon, 261

Layout(internationalkeyboards),72

Layouts(keyboards),157

Left Button(actionbutton), 215

Left-Hand(cursor), 219

Legal Notice(logon), 246,255

LetterAssist -INI setting,498

letters, 183

License Key,1, 18, 24

LicenseManager, 24

Licensing, 24612

Index

LicensingInformation,22

Logo(Custom),109, 139

Logon -Automatic,278, 291

LogonConfigurationOptions -Advanced,258

LOGONFolder, 235,285

LogonOptions, 241,251

LogonUtilities, 112

ActivateUserProfile, 275

AdministratorRights,224, 281

AdvancedLogonConfigura-tion,258

AdvancedUser Notes,271

Build-A-BoardLayouts,234, 284

613

Index

Ctrl-Alt-Delreplace-ment,226

DefaultDomainName, 241,251

DisplayOptions,246, 254

DomainList, 254

Environment,275

LargeKeyboardDialog, 249

LegalNotice,

246, 255

LOGONFolder,235, 285

LogonOptions,241, 251

LogonScripts,275

LogonUser, 275

My-T-Soft2 - small,medium,large, 234,284

My-T-Soft2Keyboard,233, 283

614

Index

My-T-Soft2 TechnicalNotes, 235,285

NetworkLogon, 275

NovellGINA(NWGINA),243

Shutdown -Enable,241, 252

User Name- Do notDisplayLast User,242, 253

User ShellActivation,274

USERINIT,275

Windows2000/XP,226

WindowsVista, 280

LOGONSERVER,275

LowerCaseDisplay- INI setting,457

MMacro

Build-A-Macro,183

615

Index

Macro (Macropanels), 68

Macro Key,198

Macro PanelDescription,192

Macro PanelDialog, 202

Macro PanelID, 191

Macro Panels,80

Add APanel, 184

DeletePanel, 184

DocumentAll Panels,184

DocumentPanel, 184

Macro ZoomDialog, 206

MacroPanelsToOpensection[MacroPanel-sToOpen](INI file), 571

Macros

ActivateKeystrokeMacro, 189

Clear Key,201

Copy Key,201

CreateKeystrokeMacro, 189

616

Index

DeleteMacroPanel, 193

DocumentAll MacroPanels, 196

DocumentMacroPanel, 195

Editing(Ad-vanced),190

LaunchApplica-tion,200

OpenMacroPanel, 200

Panel De-scription,192

Panel ID,191

Paste Key,201

Mag(Magnifierpanel), 68

Magnification,86

MagnifierPanel, 86

Main MacroPanel, 80,137, 184, 194

ManualToolControl- INI setting,507

617

Index

MAX(WindowsControlPanel), 74

Memory, 379

MenuClassessection[Menu-Classes] (INIfile), 566

MenuForceForeground- INI setting,511

MenuOffset -INI setting,463

Menus -Windowsmenuoperationnotes, 361

messaginginformation,315MIN(WindowsControlPanel), 74MinimizeOptions, 89

Button, 89Icon, 89TaskbarIcon (tray),89

MinimizeToButton- INI setting,419MotionDialog Box,140Mouse

618

Index

PhysicalMouse, 52

Required,52

Touchscreen/ Pen /PointingDevice, 52

Mouse -Drivers, 53

MouseButtons, 215

MouseButtons - 2 or3-ButtonMouse, 216

MouseButtons - LeftButton (actionbutton), 215

Mouse Driver- 2 or3-ButtonMouse, 216

Mouse pointer(cursor), 219

MouseButtonssection[MouseBut-tons] (INIfile), 539

MouseOverHilite- INI setting,493

MSI Install,345

MYTPEN.INIFile Docu-mentation,406

619

Index

ButtonPosition,420

DebuggingOptions,435

NNew Macro,189

New MacroPanel, 187

NoAnnounce- INI setting,484

NoHooksEver- INI setting,452

NoSplash -INI setting,414NovellNetwareLogon, 243Num(KeyboardPanel), 71Num (numeric(keyboard)panel), 68NumPadAlways- INI setting,501

OOff-Screen -Screen-Edge

620

Index

Scroll, 89Opaque, 93Open a panel,68Open MacroPanel, 200OpenAbout -INI setting,412OpenCentered- INI setting,413OpenFirst -INI setting,412Operation

General, 64OperationNotes, 359OperationOptions, 108,

115

Operator -DisableMinimize,139

OperatorMode, 65

OperatorSecurity, 137

OperatorNoMin- INI setting,441

PPanel Colors,148

Panel Motion,140

621

Index

PanelSelection, 113

Panels

CalculatorPanel, 82

Closing, 68

ControlPanel, 68

KeyboardPanel, 71

MacroPanels, 80

MagnifierPanel, 86

Opening,68

Quick HelpPanel, 84

Selection,113

System In-formationPanel, 84Tool BarPanel, 65WindowControlPanels, 74

PanelWatch,96Parameters (toEXE) -CommandLine, 380Password(default), 138Password -INI setting,440Paste (Macroediting), 209

622

Index

Paste(WindowsControlPanel), 74Paste Key(Macro), 201Patents, 6Pause Key, 48Pens, 53PhysicalKeyboard

BIOSsettings,booting, 52Caps Lockoperation,458Ctrl-Alt-Del,573layout, 159

mechanicalemulation,447

NumericKeypadoperationoption, 501

operation,117

PointingDevices

Joysticks,53

Mouse, 53

Pens, 53

Touchscreens,53

Position, 92

Print ScreenKey, 48

623

Index

ProductCatalog, 56ProgrammingInformation,315

QQuestions

CommonlyAskedQuestions,44

Quick Help,90Quick HelpPanel, 84Quick Start, 1Quit (Exit)(Close), 68

QWERTY(KeyboardLayout), 157

RReact toDialogs andotherWindows, 115ReadOnlyOK- INI setting,505Regional(International)settings(KeyboardLayouts andWindows),165

624

Index

ReleaseInformation,1, 19, 345

ReleaseNotes, 299

reposition, 64,92

requirements,17

restart, 573

Restart -DeveloperUtilities, 335

RestorePosition, 92

RestoreSettings, 91

RestorePosition- INI setting,427

Return toInstallationDefaults, 137Right MouseButton, 215Right-Hand(cursor), 219

SSave CurrentSettings, 91Save Position,92SaveAfterChange- INI setting,512SaveAfterMove- INI setting,512

625

Index

SaveAtClose -INI setting,512

SaveAtEndSession- INI setting,512

ScanCalculator- INI setting,538

ScanColor -INI setting,516

ScanControlPanel- INI setting,536

ScanEnableDisableSound- INI setting,516

ScanKeyboardAlpha- INI setting,531

ScanKeyboardEdit- INI setting,533

ScanKeyboardNum- INI setting,534

ScanLeftClickMode- INI setting,522

ScanMacro -INI setting,536

ScanOpenPanels- INI setting,526

ScanOrder -INI setting,527

ScanReverseAfterNumScans- INI setting,524

626

Index

ScanRightClickMode- INI setting,518

ScanShowAllOptions- INI setting,526

ScanSound -INI setting,515

ScanTime -INI setting,518

ScanToolBar -INI setting,535

ScanTransparencyLevel- INI setting,517

ScanWindowsControls- INI setting,537

ScanWordComplete- INI setting,530Screen-EdgeScroll, 89screen-saverdesktop, 260Screen-Saveroptions, 555script -Keystrokemacro, 183Scroll(Screen-Edge),89ScrollMovePixels- INI setting,496SecondSpace- INI setting,

627

Index

477Secure LogonConfiguration,229SecureOperator, 259See Through,93Select All(Macroediting), 209Select Key,126Select KeyModifier, 126SelectKeyboardBackground,150SelectKeyboard

Layouts, 157sequence ofkeystrokes,183SerialNumber, 1,18, 24SessionChangeEnabled- INI setting,504Set Position,92SetActiveWindowWatch- INI setting,435Setup, 1, 38

InstallationOptions,345ProductInstallation,

628

Index

345QuietInstall, 345

Setup(Product), 40,90SetupMode -INI setting,471SetupSaveSettings- INI setting,438Shift Keyoperation, 71Short-Cut, 14short-cuts -menu, 361Show & HideKeys, 111ShowAsGrayed- INI setting,

499ShowKeys -INI setting,446Shutdown -Enable atLogon, 241,252SilentInstallation,345SingleKeyPerClick- INI setting,447Size, 88

Size 12, 89Size Down,88Size Up, 88

Size - INIsetting, 425

629

Index

SizeSelections,142SizeMax - INIsetting, 426SizeMin - INIsetting, 426SkipTopMostAction- INI setting,435Slide-OutPanels, 140SlideOption -INI setting,425Snap-OutPanels, 140Sound - INIsetting, 482Sounds - KeyClick, 396

SpecialHandling, 131

SpecialOptions, 109,131, 393

Specialsection[Special] (INIfile), 554

Splash Screen(openingMy-T-Pen),414

standardconfiguration,35

standardsettings, 35

StartDelay -INI setting,414

630

Index

StartUpgroup, 95Startup ofMy-T-Pen,414StartUpsection[StartUp] (INIfile), 541StayBehindClassessection[StayBehind-Classes] (INIfile), 567Suffixes - INIsetting, 473Suggestions,322Supervisor/Operator,109Support

CustomerSupport, 54

website, 54

SysInfosection[SysInfo] (INIfile), 543

SystemColors, 146

SystemInformationDisplay, 144

SystemInformationPanel, 84

Systemrequirements,17

631

Index

TTablet PCInput Panel,95, 395

TabletPCEnabled- INI setting,510

Tape key(CalculatorTape), 83

Taskbarbutton, 106

TechnicalDocumenta-tion Section,297

TechnicalNotes, 307

TerminalServer /

TerminalServices, 2

TerminalServerConsoleEnable- INI setting,514

Text-To-Speech - noannouncing,484

three-buttonmouse, 216

Tile(Windows),74

Time (SystemInformationpanel), 85

Tool BarControl(Manual), 94

632

Index

Tool BarPanel, 65TopOffset -INI setting,485touchscreens,53TrackPointingDevice Inputat all times,120Trademarks, 6Transparency,93Transparency- INI setting,464TransparencyLevel- INI setting,465

TrapDialAKeyCursor- INI setting,416Tray Icon, 106TTSAvailable- INI setting,486TTSDelay -INI setting,488TTSRepeat -INI setting,487TTSSingleCharKey- INI setting,489TTSSpeakWord- INI setting,489TTSWordComplete- INI setting,

633

Index

490

TTSWordsKey- INI setting,490

Tutorial, 3, 90

TutorialandStandardSettings, 35

two-buttonmouse, 216

TwoButtonMouse- INI setting,428

TypeMatic -INI setting,414

TypematicOperation,116

UUn-Install, 20

Undo (Macroediting), 209

Undo(WindowsControlPanel), 74

Upper CaseCharactersAlways(Keyboard),120

UseOrgCutCopyPasteUndo- INI setting,461

user desktop,259

User name,241, 252

634

Index

User Notes,305User Profile,275User ShellActivation,274user-definedpanels, 183USERINIT,272Using thisguide, 7

VVersion(history), 299view thecursor, 47

VirtualMachines -TechnicalNotes, 307VirtualPointer inUse, 118VirtualPointer- INI setting,447visuallyimpaired, 86

WWantATVersion- INI setting,471Wave File -sound

635

Index

integration,396website, 54What isMy-T-Pen, 10What YouNeed, 17Why Do INeedMy-T-Pen?,13Win(WindowsControlspanel), 68Win2000ShutDown- INI setting,502Window(minimize),107

WindowContention(reaction), 115WindowsAPI, 272WindowsApplications,44WindowsControlPanels, 74WindowsControlspanel, 68WindowsDevelopers,315WindowsInstaller, 345WindowsLogon, 233,

636

Index

248, 283

WindowsMenus, 361

WindowsNotes, 395

WindowsKeysGraphics- INI setting,508

WindowsKeyWndsLatch- INI setting,509

WindowWatch- INI setting,435

WinLogon -GinaDLLRegistryEntry, 245

without akeyboard, 52

WordComplete- INI setting,472

ZZoom -KeystrokeMacro, 189

637